GTN Xi Series: Pilot's Guide

GTN Xi Series
Pilot's Guide
COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS
© 2019 - 2024 Garmin International, Inc., or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced,
copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium,
for any purpose without the express prior written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby
grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to
this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and
to print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such
electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text
of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial
distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, flyGarmin®, flyGarmin.com®, GDL®, SafeTaxi®, and
WATCH® are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its subsidiaries.
ChartView™, Connext™, ESP™, Garmin Pilot™, G3X™, G3X Touch™, GDU™,
GFC™, GMA™, GNS™, GTN™, GTS™, GTX™, GWX™, Smart Airspace™,
Smart Glide™, and Telligence™ are trademarks of Garmin International or its
subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of
Garmin.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Iridium® is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications, Inc. All rights
reserved.
Mac®, Macintosh®, and macOS® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
© 2024 SD® is a registered trademark of SD-3C, LLC. All rights reserved.
© 2024 SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Sirius, SXM, and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. All other marks and logos are property of their
respective owners. All rights reserved.
SkyWatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications.
The term Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
All other marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
SOFTWARE VERSION
This manual reflects the operation of system software v20.40. Some differences in
operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to later
software versions.
INFORMATION & SUPPORT

United States radar data provided by NOAA; European radar data collected and
provided by Meteo France.
For information regarding the Aviation Limited Warranty, refer to Garmin’s website.
For aviation product support, visit flyGarmin.com.
22
PAP
Warnings, Cautions & Notes
WARNING
Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for
maintaining separation from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and
obstacle data from third-party sources and cannot independently verify the
accuracy of the information.
WARNING
Do not rely solely upon Terrain Proximity data for terrain avoidance.
Terrain Proximity is not a certified terrain awareness system. It is an aid to
situational awareness only. Using Terrain Proximity data does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid
terrain or obstacles.
WARNING
Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS
is intended only to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING
Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of
displayed aeronautical information. Displayed aeronautical data may not
incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING
Never use GPS altitude for vertical navigation, traffic avoidance, or compliance
with any air traffic control clearance. The altitude calculated by GPS receivers is
geometric height above Mean Sea Level and may vary significantly from the
altitude displayed on the primary barometric altimeter. The barometric
altimeter must be used to comply with all air traffic control clearances.
WARNING
Do not rely solely on VNAV guidance when navigating horizontally and
vertically around user-defined airports. It is the pilot's responsibility to ensure
separation from terrain and obstacles during an approach to a user-defined
airport.
WARNING
Never use expired databases. Update databases regularly to ensure currency.
Use out of date database information at your own risk.
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide i

WARNING
Never use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of
navigation. Basemap data is intended only to supplement other approved
navigation data sources and should be considered only an aid to enhance
situational awareness.
WARNING
Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all
of the traffic within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal
reception, and/or inaccurate information from aircraft or ground stations, traffic
may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING
Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance
maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution
advisories and does not under any circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s
responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING
Never use datalink weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around
areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within datalink weather
products may not accurately depict current weather conditions.
WARNING
Never use datalink weather information for entering a thunderstorm. Per the
FAA’s Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) and AC 00-24C: “avoid by at least
20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an intense radar echo.”
WARNING
Do not use the indicated datalink weather product age to determine the age of
the weather information shown by the datalink weather product. Due to time
delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for datalink
transmission, the weather information shown by the datalink weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING
Do not rely solely upon Datalink services to provide TFR information. Always
confirm TFR information through official sources such as flight service stations
or air traffic control.
ii Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

WARNING
Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole
basis for hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may
cause the system to display inaccurate or incomplete information. Refer to
documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for detailed
information about the system.
WARNING
Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance
altitudes. The displayed MSAs are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information.
WARNING
Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a
“NON WGS84 WPT” by a system message. “NON WGS84 WPT” waypoints are
derived from an unknown map reference datum that may be incompatible with
the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be
positioned in error as displayed.
WARNING
Do not learn operational procedures for this product in the air. For safety
reasons, thoroughly practice basic operation of this product on the ground
before use during flight.
WARNING
Review and understand all aspects of this pilot’s guide. Doing so reduces the risk
of unsafe operation.
WARNING
Always resolve any discrepancies between the display and other navigation
sources when they occur. During flight operations, compare display indications
to information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, and other available
sources before continuing navigation.
WARNING
Be aware that this product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive
harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with California’s Proposition
65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer
to our website at www.garmin.com/prop65.
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide iii

CAUTION
Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia.
They will harm the anti-reflective coating. Use a clean, lint-free cloth and anti-reflective
lens cleaner.
CAUTION
Ensure that any unit repairs are made by an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and affect the
airworthiness of the aircraft.
NOTE
Foreign materials (i.e., moisture, objects) that come into contact with the touchscreen
can prevent the unit from responding to touch commands. To restore functionality, wipe
the screen dry and/or remove interfering objects.
NOTE
The COM application supports channel tuning for both 8.33 kHz and 25 kHz channels
within radio-frequency range. If flying in a region where 8.33 kHz channel spacing is
available, set the COM radio to 8.33 kHz to prevent the loss of any stored or recently
used frequencies.
NOTE
Mounted along the fuselage, the COM transceiver antenna(s) of the equipment is (are)
accessible only to aircraft maintenance personnel.
NOTE
All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the
system panel and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current
system software and aviation databases. Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from
the actual equipment. Feature depictions may differ from actual unit features depending
on configuration.
NOTE
The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely
responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which
could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system
utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVAID. Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information
presented by the system can be misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become
unsafe.
iv Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE
Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an
intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground.
Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards away from the source of the interference should
alleviate the condition.
NOTE
Use of polarized eye wear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE
Canadian installations: In accordance with Canadian Radio Specifications Standard 102
(RSS 102), RF field strength exposure to persons from an antenna connected to this
device should be limited to 60 V/m for controlled environment and 28 V/m for
uncontrolled environment.
NOTE
Do not use SafeTaxi or ChartView as the basis for ground maneuvering. These functions
do not comply with the requirements of AC 120-76C and are not qualified for use as an
airport moving map display. They should be used for orientation purposes only.
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide v

NOTE
The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent
avionics of the following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory
guidance and information related to the use of databases in the National Airspace
System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from
Garmin or Jeppesen. Do not attempt to load databases that are not from these sources.
Databases obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 LOA from the FAA are
assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA
is available for each applicable database and can be viewed at flyGarmin.com by
selecting “Aviation Database Declarations.”
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required
for compliance with established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute
authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures that may be presented by the system.
It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established AFM(S) and
regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed
equipment.
NOTE
The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusions list,
as discussed in SAIB CE-14-04, to determine what data may be incomplete.
Visit flyGarmin.com and select “Database Exclusions List.”
NOTE
The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and
consider their impact on the intended aircraft operation. To view these alerts,
visit flyGarmin.com and select “Aviation Database Alerts.”
NOTE
Contact Garmin Product Support if you want or need to adjust the database.
NOTE
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database
information. These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure;
incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and fixes; or any other displayed item used for
navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Visit flyGarmin.com and select
“Aviation Data Error Report.”
vi Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

NOTE
Information obtained solely through FIS-B does not replace a thorough preflight briefing.
NOTAMs received via FIS-B uplink may not be a complete listing. Active NOTAMs are
removed from the FIS-B data stream 30 days after issuance. FIS-B uplink is not an FAA
approved source for NOTAMs.
NOTE
When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby
thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode.
However, clusters of two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate
thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE
This navigation unit has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must
realize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable system
failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to
occur without fault indication. It is the responsibility of the pilot to detect such
occurrences by cross-checking with all redundant or correlated information available in
the cockpit.
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide vii

About This Guide
Record of Revision
REVISION DATE CHANGE DESCRIPTION

A 11.20.19 Initial Release.
B 12.06.19 Production Release.
C 11.20.20 Updates for software v20.10.
D 07.22.21 Updates for software v20.20.
E 01.03.23 Updates for software v20.30.
F 03.01.24 Updates for software v20.40.
Available for Download

Electronic Pilot’s Guide
A version of this guide saved in Adobe Acrobat. Available for viewing on your
computer or portable device.
Upgrade Supplement
Details document changes for software enhancements.
Go to garmin.com/manuals.
viii Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

About This Guide
Layout
SECTION TITLE The design and layout of this guide is

intended to provide clear, concise
1 System at a Glance sections written in the logical order
of a pilot’s flight instrument and
2 Get Started
systems scan.
3 Navigation
4 Planning
5 Hazard Awareness
6 Abnormal Operations
7 Services
8 Messages
9 Qualification
10 Practice
11 Glossary
12 Regulatory Information
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide ix

About This Guide
Product Descriptions
This guide covers the operation of the following Garmin product series.
GTN 650Xi Series GTN 750Xi Series
When you see It means

a product name in bold the information pertains to that
(e.g., GTN 750Xi) specific model only
the information pertains to all

a reference to a product series
models listed within that series
(e.g., GTN 650Xi Series)
(e.g., GTN 625Xi/635Xi/650Xi)
product names separated by a forward slash the information pertains to both

(e.g., GTN 635Xi/650Xi or GTN 650Xi/750Xi) products
GTN 650Xi Series

• GTN 625Xi
• GTN 635Xi
• GTN 650Xi
GTN 750Xi Series Unless otherwise stated, information
pertaining to the GTN Xi Series is
• GTN 725Xi applicable to all 650Xi and 750Xi
• GTN 750Xi series navigators.
Feature Depictions
Except for cases when operational differences dictate, the GTN 750Xi display is
shown as typical.
x Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

About This Guide
Special Notations
This guide uses the following message types when applicable.
WARNING
Indicates when serious injury or death will occur.
CAUTION
Indicates when equipment damage is possible.
NOTE
Emphasizes a point about a specific feature, function, or operation.
Insets
These boxes may include a list of features or application functions, references to
additional information, or a useful pilot’s tip.
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xi

Reference Documentation
Reference Manuals
DOCUMENT P/N
G500(H)/G600/G700 TXi Pilot’s Guide 190-01717-10
GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions 190-00355-04
GDL 84/88 ADS-B Transceiver Pilot’s Guide 190-01122-03
GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide Addendum for GDL 60 190-02327-A0
GTX 335/345 All-In-One ADS-B Transponder Pilot’s Guide 190-01499-00
Telligence Voice Command Guide 190-01007-50
Reference Websites
WEBSITE QR CODE (SCAN/GO)
ADS-B Academy
https://www.garmin.com/en-US/aviation/adsb/
Aviation Limited Warranty

https://www.garmin.com/en-US/legal/aviation-limited-warranty
Connext
http://www.garmin.com/connext
Database Concierge
Go to http://www.flygarmin.com/support and select Database
Management.
FAA Dynamic Regulatory System

https://drs.faa.gov
Garmin Aviation Weather Radar 2.0 eLearning Course

https://buy.garmin.com/en-US/US/p/pn/AVNE-GMWXOP-A1
GTN Essentials 2.0 eLearning Course

https://www.garmin.com/en-US/p/pn/AVNE-GM765P-B1
xii Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

Table of Contents
1 SYSTEM AT A GLANCE ..................................................................................................... 1-1

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................1-2
Unit Configurations ....................................................................................... 1-3
Apps & Features ............................................................................................. 1-4
Pilot Interface ........................................................................................................................................1-5
Bezel ............................................................................................................. 1-5
SD Card Slot .................................................................................................. 1-7
Touchscreen .................................................................................................. 1-8
Gestures .................................................................................................... 1-8
Keys ......................................................................................................... 1-9
Menus ..................................................................................................... 1-11
Tabs ....................................................................................................... 1-12
Keyboards ................................................................................................ 1-12
Control Knobs ............................................................................................. 1-14
Page Navigation Labels ............................................................................. 1-15
Knob Function Indicators .......................................................................... 1-16
Screenshots .............................................................................................. 1-18
Color Conventions ....................................................................................... 1-19
Compatible Equipment ................................................................................................................. 1-20
Line Replaceable Units ................................................................................. 1-20
2 GET STARTED ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
Power Up ..................................................................................................................................................2-2
Remote Database Confirmation ..................................................................... 2-4
Preset Fuel Quantities ..................................................................................... 2-6
Instrument Panel Self-Test .............................................................................. 2-8
Databases .................................................................................................................................................2-9
Database Effective Cycles ............................................................................. 2-10
Database Conflicts ....................................................................................... 2-11
Active and Standby Databases ..................................................................... 2-12
Database Info ........................................................................................... 2-12
Database Updates ........................................................................................ 2-14
Manual Updates ....................................................................................... 2-15
Automatic Updates .................................................................................. 2-19
Load Databases from an SD Card ............................................................. 2-21
Transfer Databases Using Database Concierge .......................................... 2-22
Synchronize Databases Across Multiple Units ............................................ 2-24
Stream Charts .......................................................................................... 2-29
Connectivity ......................................................................................................................................... 2-31
Wi-Fi Password ............................................................................................ 2-32
Flight Stream 210/510 Setup ........................................................................ 2-33
Set Up Bluetooth ...................................................................................... 2-34
Import a Flight Plan .................................................................................. 2-35
Set Up Wi-Fi ............................................................................................. 2-35
COM .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-37
COM Standby Control Panel ........................................................................ 2-37
COM Volume Controls ............................................................................. 2-38
Open Squelch .......................................................................................... 2-38
COM Radio Setup ........................................................................................ 2-39
Set COM Channel Spacing ....................................................................... 2-41
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xiii

Table of Contents
Revert Knob Function to Radio Control ..................................................... 2-42

Access Remote Unit Radio Functions ........................................................ 2-42
Enable Reverse Frequency Look-up ........................................................... 2-44
Adjust Sidetone Volume Offset ................................................................. 2-45
Tuning & Monitoring ................................................................................... 2-46
Direct Tuning ........................................................................................... 2-47
Transfer Frequency to Active (Flip-Flop) ..................................................... 2-50
Remote Radio Control .............................................................................. 2-51
Monitor Mode ......................................................................................... 2-53
Frequency Selection ..................................................................................... 2-54
Search Tabs .............................................................................................. 2-54
Remote Frequency Selection ..................................................................... 2-55
Emergency Frequency ............................................................................... 2-55
Create User Frequencies ............................................................................... 2-56
COM Alert ................................................................................................... 2-58
Stuck Microphone .................................................................................... 2-58
NAV ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-59
Frequency Tuning & Selection ...................................................................... 2-59
Direct Tuning ........................................................................................... 2-59
Search Tabs .............................................................................................. 2-60
IDENT .......................................................................................................... 2-61
NAV Alert .................................................................................................... 2-61
Audio Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 2-62
Audio Panel Controls ................................................................................... 2-62
Mic Setup ................................................................................................ 2-64
3D Audio ................................................................................................. 2-65
MARKER Audio ........................................................................................ 2-65
Intercom ...................................................................................................... 2-66
Intercom Modes ....................................................................................... 2-66
Intercom Setup ......................................................................................... 2-67
Music Setup ............................................................................................. 2-67
Telephone Setup ...................................................................................... 2-68
Bluetooth Audio ....................................................................................... 2-68
Telligence Voice Command .......................................................................... 2-69
Voice Command Setup ............................................................................. 2-70
Audio Panel Alert ......................................................................................... 2-71
XPDR ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-72
XPDR Control Panel ..................................................................................... 2-72
XPDR Setup ................................................................................................. 2-73
Enable ADS-B Out Transmissions .............................................................. 2-73
Assign a Flight ID ...................................................................................... 2-73
XPDR Modes ................................................................................................ 2-74
Squawk Code Keys ...................................................................................... 2-75
VFR ....................................................................................................... 2-75
XPDR Key ................................................................................................. 2-75
XPDR Alert ................................................................................................... 2-77
ADS-B Altitude Reporting ............................................................................................................. 2-78
ADS-B Control Panel .................................................................................... 2-78
ADS-B Key ............................................................................................... 2-79
xiv Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

Table of Contents
Enable Anonymous Mode ........................................................................ 2-79

Assign a Flight ID ...................................................................................... 2-80
GDL 88 Alert ................................................................................................ 2-80
Pilot Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 2-81
CDI Scale ..................................................................................................... 2-82
Horizontal Alarm Limits ............................................................................ 2-83
ILS CDI Capture ........................................................................................ 2-84
Startup Page ................................................................................................ 2-84
Keyboard Type ............................................................................................. 2-85
Nearest Airport Runway Criteria ................................................................... 2-86
Clocks & Timers ........................................................................................... 2-87
Timers ...................................................................................................... 2-87
Clock ....................................................................................................... 2-87
Page Shortcuts ............................................................................................. 2-88
Alerts Settings .............................................................................................. 2-89
Arrival Alerts ............................................................................................ 2-89
Airspace Alerts ......................................................................................... 2-89
Unit Selections ............................................................................................. 2-90
User Selected NAV Angle ......................................................................... 2-91
Position Formats ....................................................................................... 2-91
Click Volume ............................................................................................... 2-93
Click Volume Control ............................................................................... 2-93
HTAWS/HTerrain Voice Alert Options ....................................................... 2-93
Display Brightness Control ........................................................................... 2-94
Automatic Brightness Control ................................................................... 2-94
Manual Brightness Control ....................................................................... 2-94
Scheduled Messages .................................................................................... 2-95
Message Types ......................................................................................... 2-95
Modifying Scheduled Messages ................................................................ 2-95
Crossfill ........................................................................................................ 2-96
GTN to GTN Data ..................................................................................... 2-96
GTN to GNS Data ..................................................................................... 2-97
Status Indications .............................................................................................................................. 2-98
Alert Types ................................................................................................... 2-98
Alert Annunciations .................................................................................. 2-99
Pop-up Alerts ........................................................................................... 2-99
Aural Alerts ............................................................................................ 2-103
System Status ............................................................................................ 2-104
GPS Status ................................................................................................. 2-105
Circle of Uncertainty ............................................................................... 2-107
SBAS Providers ....................................................................................... 2-108
GPS Status Annunciations ...................................................................... 2-108
GPS Alerts .............................................................................................. 2-109
LRU Status ................................................................................................. 2-110
Logs ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-111
Data Logging at a Glance ........................................................................... 2-112
File Naming Conventions ........................................................................ 2-114
Exporting Data Logs to an SD Card ............................................................ 2-115
Data Logging with Flight Stream 510 ......................................................... 2-117
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xv

Table of Contents
3 NAVIGATION ......................................................................................................................... 3-1

Map ..............................................................................................................................................................3-4
Map Setup ..................................................................................................... 3-8
Map Display Orientation ............................................................................. 3-9
North Up Above ......................................................................................... 3-9
Visual Approach ....................................................................................... 3-10
Auto Zoom .............................................................................................. 3-11
Track Vector ............................................................................................. 3-12
Altitude Constraints ................................................................................. 3-12
Glide Range Ring ..................................................................................... 3-13
NAV Range Ring ...................................................................................... 3-17
Fuel Range Ring ....................................................................................... 3-17
TOPO Scale .............................................................................................. 3-18
Chart Color Scheme ................................................................................. 3-18
Selected Altitude Range Arc ..................................................................... 3-19
Aviation Selections ....................................................................................... 3-20
SafeTaxi ................................................................................................... 3-22
Airspace Selections ...................................................................................... 3-24
Smart Airspace ......................................................................................... 3-25
Land Selections ............................................................................................ 3-26
Traffic & Weather Selections ........................................................................ 3-27
Map Interactions .......................................................................................... 3-28
Basic Interactions ...................................................................................... 3-28
Graphical Flight Plan Editing ..................................................................... 3-31
Map Overlays ............................................................................................... 3-36
Overlay Controls ....................................................................................... 3-36
Overlay Status Icons ................................................................................. 3-40
User Fields ................................................................................................... 3-41
Non-map User Fields ................................................................................ 3-45
Map Detail ................................................................................................... 3-47
Charts ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-48
Chart Setup ................................................................................................. 3-50
Chart Selection ............................................................................................ 3-51
Aircraft Position Icon .................................................................................... 3-53
Waypoints .............................................................................................................................................. 3-54
Waypoint Information .................................................................................. 3-55
Common Page Features ........................................................................... 3-56
Waypoint Specific Page Features .............................................................. 3-57
Waypoint Selection ...................................................................................... 3-59
Waypoint Autofill ..................................................................................... 3-59
FastFind Predictive Waypoint Entry ........................................................... 3-60
Search Tabs .............................................................................................. 3-61
Create User Waypoints ................................................................................ 3-63
Define Waypoint Criteria .......................................................................... 3-65
Create a User Waypoint ........................................................................... 3-67
Edit an Existing User Waypoint ................................................................. 3-68
Delete User Waypoints ............................................................................. 3-69
Import User Waypoints ................................................................................ 3-70
Nearest ........................................................................................................ 3-72
xvi Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

Table of Contents
Active Flight Plan .............................................................................................................................. 3-75

Create a Flight Plan ...................................................................................... 3-80
Airway Options ............................................................................................ 3-81
Collapse All Airways ................................................................................. 3-81
Sort Airways ............................................................................................. 3-82
En Route Vertical Navigation ........................................................................ 3-83
Define a VNAV Profile .............................................................................. 3-84
Altitude Constraints ................................................................................. 3-86
VNAV Direct To ....................................................................................... 3-90
Transition to Approach ............................................................................. 3-90
Temperature Compensated Altitude ......................................................... 3-91
OBS ............................................................................................................. 3-92
Dead Reckoning ........................................................................................... 3-93
Parallel Track ................................................................................................ 3-94
Invert Flight Plan .......................................................................................... 3-96
Edit Data Fields ............................................................................................ 3-96
Flight Plan Catalog ....................................................................................... 3-97
Catalog Route Options ............................................................................. 3-98
Flight Plan Waypoint Options ................................................................. 3-100
Import a Flight Plan .................................................................................... 3-101
Import Options ....................................................................................... 3-101
Potential Import Errors ............................................................................ 3-102
Along Track Offsets ................................................................................... 3-102
User Holds ................................................................................................. 3-104
Hold at Waypoint Options ...................................................................... 3-104
Search and Rescue Patterns ........................................................................ 3-106
SAR Pattern Options ............................................................................... 3-106
SAR Flight Plan Options .......................................................................... 3-108
Flight Plan Map Overlays ............................................................................ 3-109
Leg Status Indications ............................................................................. 3-109
Along Track Offset Indications ................................................................ 3-110
Altitude Constraint Labels ...................................................................... 3-111
User Airport Symbol ............................................................................... 3-112
Fly-over Waypoint Symbol ...................................................................... 3-113
CDI ............................................................................................................ 3-114
GPS Nav Status Bar .................................................................................... 3-115
Direct To .............................................................................................................................................. 3-116
Direct To Basics .......................................................................................... 3-116
Direct To Search Tabs ............................................................................. 3-117
Direct To Activation ................................................................................ 3-118
Navigating Direct To ............................................................................... 3-120
Remove a Direct Course ......................................................................... 3-121
User Holds ................................................................................................. 3-122
Search and Rescue Patterns ........................................................................ 3-123
Procedures ......................................................................................................................................... 3-124
Flight Procedure Basics ............................................................................... 3-125
Localizer or VOR-based Approaches ....................................................... 3-128
GPS Flight Phase Annunciations .............................................................. 3-129
Departures ................................................................................................. 3-131
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xvii

Table of Contents
Flight Plan Departure Options ................................................................. 3-132

Arrivals ...................................................................................................... 3-133
Flight Plan Arrival Options ...................................................................... 3-134
Approaches ............................................................................................... 3-135
Flight Plan Approach Options ................................................................. 3-137
Missed Approach ................................................................................... 3-138
Approach Hold ....................................................................................... 3-139
DME Arc ................................................................................................ 3-142
RF Legs .................................................................................................. 3-143
Vectors to Final ...................................................................................... 3-143
ILS Approach .......................................................................................... 3-144
VOR+V Approaches ................................................................................ 3-144
RNAV Approaches .................................................................................. 3-145
Visual Approach ..................................................................................... 3-151
Autopilot Outputs .................................................................................. 3-153
4 PLANNING .............................................................................................................................. 4-1
VCALC .........................................................................................................................................................4-4
Define a VCALC Profile .................................................................................. 4-4
VCALC Setup ................................................................................................. 4-6
Trip Planning ..........................................................................................................................................4-7
Trip Planning Modes ...................................................................................... 4-7
Trip Data ........................................................................................................ 4-9
Fuel Planning ....................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Fuel Planning Modes .................................................................................... 4-11
Fuel Data ..................................................................................................... 4-13
DALT/TAS/Wind Calculator ......................................................................................................... 4-15
Edit Input Data ............................................................................................. 4-16
DALT/TAS/Wind Calculations ........................................................................ 4-17
RAIM Prediction ................................................................................................................................. 4-18
Calculate RAIM Status .................................................................................. 4-19
Checklists .............................................................................................................................................. 4-20
View a Checklist .......................................................................................... 4-21
5 HAZARD AWARENESS ..................................................................................................... 5-1
Weather Awareness ............................................................................................................................5-3
Datalink Weather ........................................................................................... 5-3
WX Info Banner .......................................................................................... 5-5
WX Display Orientation .............................................................................. 5-5
WX Display/Map Settings ........................................................................... 5-6
Datalink Weather Products ............................................................................. 5-7
Product Age ............................................................................................... 5-9
Product Legends ....................................................................................... 5-11
Altitude Adjustment Keys ......................................................................... 5-11
Airport Icons ............................................................................................ 5-11
Precipitation ............................................................................................. 5-12
Textual AIRMETs ....................................................................................... 5-16
Graphical AIRMETs ................................................................................... 5-17
AIREPs ...................................................................................................... 5-19
Cell Movements ....................................................................................... 5-20
Center Weather Advisory ......................................................................... 5-21
xviii Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

Table of Contents
City Forecast ............................................................................................ 5-21

Clouds ..................................................................................................... 5-22
County Warnings ..................................................................................... 5-23
Cyclone .................................................................................................... 5-23
Echo Tops ................................................................................................ 5-24
Freezing Levels ......................................................................................... 5-24
Icing ....................................................................................................... 5-25
Lightning ................................................................................................. 5-27
METARs and TAFs .................................................................................... 5-28
PIREPs ...................................................................................................... 5-29
SIGMETs .................................................................................................. 5-30
Surface Analysis ....................................................................................... 5-30
TFRs ....................................................................................................... 5-31
Turbulence ............................................................................................... 5-32
Winds Aloft .............................................................................................. 5-33
SiriusXM Weather ........................................................................................ 5-35
Activate SiriusXM Services ........................................................................ 5-35
SiriusXM Weather Setup ........................................................................... 5-37
FIS-B Weather .............................................................................................. 5-38
Data Transmission Limitations ................................................................... 5-38
FIS-B Product Status ................................................................................. 5-40
FIS-B Weather Setup ................................................................................. 5-41
Raw Text Reports ..................................................................................... 5-42
FIS-B Ground Reception Status ................................................................. 5-44
Connext Weather ........................................................................................ 5-45
Connext Weather Setup ........................................................................... 5-46
Connext Data Requests ............................................................................ 5-47
Stormscope .................................................................................................. 5-49
Stormscope Setup .................................................................................... 5-50
Stormscope Modes & Symbols .................................................................. 5-50
Strike Rate ................................................................................................ 5-51
Views ....................................................................................................... 5-51
Airborne Weather Radar .............................................................................. 5-53
Weather Radar Setup ............................................................................... 5-56
Radar Modes ............................................................................................ 5-65
Radar Controls ......................................................................................... 5-70
Radar Alerts ............................................................................................. 5-74
Traffic Awareness ............................................................................................................................. 5-76
Traffic Display .............................................................................................. 5-77
Traffic Setup ................................................................................................ 5-80
Traffic Test ............................................................................................... 5-81
Altitude Filtering ....................................................................................... 5-81
Traffic Interactions ....................................................................................... 5-82
Mute Alert ............................................................................................... 5-82
Traffic Types ................................................................................................ 5-83
TIS-A ....................................................................................................... 5-83
TCAD 9900B ............................................................................................ 5-85
TCAD 9900BX .......................................................................................... 5-87
Ryan TCAD 9900BX with GDL 88 ............................................................. 5-88
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xix

Table of Contents
TAS/TCAS I ............................................................................................... 5-90

TCAS II ..................................................................................................... 5-92
ADS-B ...................................................................................................... 5-95
Traffic Alerting ........................................................................................... 5-102
Alerting Parameters ................................................................................ 5-103
Terrain Awareness ......................................................................................................................... 5-104
Terrain Configurations ............................................................................... 5-104
GPS Altitude for Terrain .......................................................................... 5-105
Database Limitations .................................................................................. 5-106
Terrain Display ........................................................................................... 5-107
Terrain Setup ............................................................................................. 5-108
Terrain & Obstacle Depictions .................................................................... 5-110
Terrain Elevation Depictions .................................................................... 5-110
Obstacle Elevation Depictions ................................................................. 5-111
Alert Types ................................................................................................. 5-113
Alerting Thresholds .................................................................................... 5-115
Alert Inhibit ................................................................................................ 5-123
Terrain Proximity ........................................................................................ 5-124
Terrain Alerting .......................................................................................... 5-125
Terrain Alerts .......................................................................................... 5-125
TAWS-B ..................................................................................................... 5-128
TAWS-B Setup Selections ....................................................................... 5-128
TAWS-B Alerts ........................................................................................ 5-129
TAWS-A ..................................................................................................... 5-133
TAWS-A Setup Selections ....................................................................... 5-133
TAWS-A Alerts ....................................................................................... 5-138
HTAWS/HTerrain Alerting ........................................................................... 5-145
HTAWS/HTerrain Setup Selections .......................................................... 5-146
HTAWS/HTerrain Alerts .......................................................................... 5-147
6 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS ............................................................................................. 6-1
Emergency Modes at a Glance .....................................................................................................6-2
Smart Glide ..............................................................................................................................................6-4
How it Works ................................................................................................. 6-5
Enable Smart Glide Activation ...................................................................... 6-11
Activate Smart Glide .................................................................................... 6-11
View Smart Glide Status Information ............................................................ 6-13
Tune Transponder ........................................................................................ 6-16
View Smart Glide Information on Map ......................................................... 6-17
Select an Alternate Airport on Map .............................................................. 6-19
Find Alternate Airport .................................................................................. 6-20
Deactivate Smart Glide ................................................................................. 6-21
Smart Glide Alerts ........................................................................................ 6-22
System Failure Alerts ................................................................................ 6-26
Emergency Descent ......................................................................................................................... 6-27
EDM Activation ............................................................................................ 6-27
Manual Activation .................................................................................... 6-28
Automatic Activation ................................................................................ 6-28
7 SERVICES ................................................................................................................................. 7-1
SiriusXM Audio Entertainment .....................................................................................................7-3
xx Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

Table of Contents
SiriusXM Audio Activation .............................................................................. 7-4

Adjust Radio Volume ..................................................................................... 7-5
Direct Channel Tuning ................................................................................... 7-5
Browse Music Channels ................................................................................. 7-6
Assign Channel Presets .................................................................................. 7-7
XM Data Link Failure ...................................................................................... 7-8
Connext Services ..................................................................................................................................7-9
Phone ............................................................................................................ 7-9
Phone Volume ......................................................................................... 7-11
Phone Status Annunciations ..................................................................... 7-11
Suppress Visuals ....................................................................................... 7-12
In-Call Distribution ................................................................................... 7-12
Outgoing Calls ......................................................................................... 7-13
Incoming Calls .......................................................................................... 7-14
SMS Text ..................................................................................................... 7-15
Message Filtering & Setup Options ........................................................... 7-16
Send a Text Message ................................................................................ 7-17
Receiving Text Messages .......................................................................... 7-19
Position Reports ........................................................................................... 7-20
Position Report Data ................................................................................. 7-20
Position Reporting Status Annunciations ................................................... 7-21
Counters & Timers .................................................................................... 7-22
Position Reporting .................................................................................... 7-22
Contacts ...................................................................................................... 7-23
Create a Contact ...................................................................................... 7-23
Find a Contact .......................................................................................... 7-24
Contact Options ....................................................................................... 7-24
8 MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................. 8-1
Advisory Messages ..............................................................................................................................8-2
Message Key .................................................................................................. 8-3
Airspace Advisories ........................................................................................ 8-3
Database Advisories ....................................................................................... 8-4
Datalink Advisories ......................................................................................... 8-6
Flight Plan Advisories ..................................................................................... 8-8
GPS/WAAS Advisories .................................................................................. 8-10
Navigation Advisories ................................................................................... 8-11
Pilot Specified Advisories .............................................................................. 8-14
Smart Glide Advisories ................................................................................. 8-15
System Hardware Advisories ........................................................................ 8-17
Audio Panel Advisories ............................................................................. 8-21
COM Radio Advisories .............................................................................. 8-22
XPDR Advisories ....................................................................................... 8-24
Terrain Advisories ......................................................................................... 8-25
Traffic System Advisories .............................................................................. 8-26
VCALC Advisories ........................................................................................ 8-28
VLOC/GS Advisories ..................................................................................... 8-28
Waypoint Advisories .................................................................................... 8-29
Weather Service Advisories .......................................................................... 8-31
9 QUALIFICATION .................................................................................................................. 9-1
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xxi

Table of Contents
Glove Qualification .............................................................................................................................9-2

Voice Command Qualification .....................................................................................................9-6
10 PRACTICE ...........................................................................................................................10-1
Demo Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 10-2
Enable Demo Mode ..................................................................................... 10-2
Demo Setup Options .................................................................................... 10-4
Advanced Settings .................................................................................... 10-5
11 GLOSSARY ..........................................................................................................................11-1
12 REGULATORY INFORMATION ................................................................................12-1
Compliance .......................................................................................................................................... 12-2
FCC Compliance Statement ......................................................................... 12-2
AC 90-100A
Statement of Compliance ............................................................................. 12-2
Software License Agreement ..................................................................................................... 12-3
xxii Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

1 System at a Glance
OVERVIEW.................................................................................................................1-2
PILOT INTERFACE .................................................................................................1-5
COMPATIBLE EQUIPMENT............................................................................ 1-20

System at a Glance
Overview
Two series of panel mount navigators comprise the GTN Xi Series. The primary
difference between these displays is the size of the screen.
4.9” GTN 650Xi Series 6.9” GTN 750Xi Series

GTN 625Xi GTN 725Xi
GTN 635Xi GTN 750Xi
GTN 650Xi
Due to its large-format display, the GTN 750Xi Series comes loaded with terminal
procedure charts, including departure, arrival, and approach plates.
1-2 Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

System at a Glance
Unit Configurations
GTN 625Xi GTN 635Xi
GPS/MFD GPS/MFD/COM
GTN 650Xi
GPS/MFD/COM/NAV
GTN 725Xi GTN 750Xi
GPS/MFD GPS/MFD/COM/NAV
COMPARISON TABLE
Remote
COM NAV Chart Weather Audio
GTN Xi GPS/MFD Radio Radio Display Radar Panel
625 •
635 • •
650 • • •
725 • • • •
750 • • • • • •
190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide 1-3

System at a Glance
Apps & Features

While features vary depending on
COMMON FEATURES
model and unit configuration, all
Airways models share many of the same
Arrivals features.
Approaches
Automatic Database Updates1
CDI
Checklists
Database Concierge Access2
Datalink Weather1
Departures
Flight Plan
Graphical Flight Planning
Iridium Phone/SMS1
Moving Map
Remote Transponder Control1
SafeTaxi
SiriusXM Music1
Smart Glide1
Stormscope1
TAWS/HTAWS1
Telligence Voice Command1
Traffic1
Waypoints (includes user-generated
and nearest waypoint info)
VNAV Descent1
1 Optional. Function availability dependent upon aircraft interfaces or enablement.

2
Requires Wi-Fi connection via Flight Stream 510.

System at a Glance
Pilot Interface
Bezel
The bezel provides a combination of mechanical knobs and push-keys. Active touch
areas on the display screen allow access to unit apps and features.
GTN 750Xi Series
5 7
Touchscreen
1
3
4
GTN 650Xi Series
5 7
1 3
Touchscreen
2 4

System at a Glance
1 Bezel 3 Home Key 6 Inner & Outer

Ledges provide hand Provides direct Knobs
stability when access to the Multipurpose dual
performing data entry Home page. concentric knob
and making allows data entry,
selections. list scrolling, map
range control, page
4 Direct To Key navigation, and
Opens the Direct To NAV/COM
2 SD Card Slot function for frequency tuning.
Interface for loading immediate course
database, exporting setting.
log files, and updating
software. 7 Photocell
Compatibility with Measures cockpit
Flight Stream 510 5 Volume/Squelch ambient light level
allows wireless Knob to automatically
database transfer Allows audio adjust display
from the Garmin Pilot volume adjustment brightness for day
app on a portable for the active COM and night.
electronic device via radio, NAV receiver,
Database Concierge. or connected
external audio
panel. COM squelch
and NAV ident
functionality
accessible via knob
push.
Home Key Shortcuts

GTN 650Xi Series: Pushing and holding the Home key provides
direct access to Default Navigation features.
GTN 750Xi Series: Pushing and holding the Home key provides
direct access to the moving map.
Direct To Key Shortcut

For airframes without a dedicated Smart Glide switch, pushing
and holding the Direct To key for 2 seconds activates the
Smart Glide feature.1
1 Applicable only to systems configured for Smart Glide.

System at a Glance
SD Card Slot
NOTE
Do not remove or insert an SD card while in flight. Always verify the system is
powered off before inserting or removing an SD card.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• SD card in the FAT32 format, with memory capacity between 8 GB and 32 GB
The navigator uses the SD card slot for the following tasks.
• Exporting data logs • Enabling Flight Stream 510 connectivity
• Capturing screen images • Updating databases
• Upgrading software
INSERT AN SD CARD
When inserting an SD card:
1. Verify unit power is off and the slot is empty.
2. Hold card such that label faces left edge of display screen.
3. Ensure back edge of card is flush with display bezel after insertion.
EJECT AN SD CARD
1. Power off the unit.
2. Release the spring latch by pressing lightly on exposed edge of card.
For Mac Users

Do not use macOS to format an SD card or the Flight Stream 510 wireless transceiver
if you plan to use either as a media storage device for updating databases.
In the event there is a file corruption problem with the SD card (including the
wireless transceiver when used as a database storage device), it may be necessary to
reformat the card. This can cause an issue when formatting the SD card using
macOS, where the newly formatted card will not be recognized by the avionics
system. When using a Macintosh computer to format the SD card, or the wireless
transceiver, Garmin recommends using the SD Memory Card Formatter application
available as a download from SDcard.org. When running the application, use the
Quick Format option.

System at a Glance
Touchscreen
A multi-touch color display provides onscreen controls for unit operation.
Gestures
Touching the screen briefly with a single finger.
TAP
Use this gesture for:
• Opening a page or menu
• Activating a command key or data entry field
• Displaying map feature information
• Selecting an option within an application
Certain momentary controls (e.g., directional arrow

TAP AND HOLD keys) provide a secondary tap and hold function.
Tap the key and hold your finger in place until the
desired action occurs.
• Scrolling with arrow keys
• Increasing/decreasing values continuously
SWIPE A smooth motion that involves touching an object, then

sliding your finger across the screen and lifting up.
• Accessing multiple panes (right or left swipes)
• Viewing and scrolling lists
• Panning across a map display
FLICK Swiping the screen in a quick upward or downward

motion. Information moves at a fast speed (faster than
if holding the arrow key), then slows to a stop.
Use this gesture for scrolling an item list.
PINCH & STRETCH Touch any map with two fingers at the same time, then
bring the fingers close together (pinch) or spread them
apart (stretch). Just remember: stretch to zoom in and
pinch to zoom out.
Use this gesture for magnifying map features.

System at a Glance
Keys
COMMON COMMANDS
Open the system messages list. Open a context menu.

A flashing icon indicates unread
messages.
Cancel an active function without Return to the previous page.

inputting data.
Select the corresponding item Confirm the requested action

(e.g., database update). (e.g., removing a flight plan
A check mark confirms selection. waypoint)
Move the cursor back a single space Input a specified value.

at a time.
Zoom Control & Scale Directional Keys

Change the current magnification by Increment or decrement setting
tapping In or Out. values by tapping these directional
keys. Tap and hold to increase or
decrease the value continuously.

System at a Glance
FUNCTION KEYS
Toggle keys turn a specific function on or
off. The current state of the function is
indicated below the key label.
On Off
APP ICONS
Home Page Icons 1

Tapping one of these icons
opens the corresponding
application. Some apps
provide additional icons
for accessing functions on
subpages (e.g., System,
Utilities).
Optional Weather Menu Icons

Additional icons are available
when certain optional
features are installed and the
associated functions are
enabled (e.g., Music, Phone,
SXM Weather).
1 Actual icons dependent upon model type and configuration.

System at a Glance
Menus
Menus group related controls into an expandable pane, allowing access to multiple
functions on a single page. Depending on the number of available functions, a menu
may comprise more than one pane.
POP-UP MENUS
Pop-up menus open to the
default or previously selected
value.
Default or Current Setting
SLIDE OVER MENUS

These menus slide out from the bottom or sides of the display when an object or
menu item is selected on the underlying page.
Underlying Page Hidden
Tapping the underlying page

closes the menu.
LISTS
Scrollable lists group control keys related to a single function (e.g., selectable range
options). Toggle keys either enable or disable list items.
Scroll Bar
In some cases, Settings or Range keys provide

access to selectable setting options.
When scrolling, all keys in the list are inactive.

System at a Glance
Tabs
Tabs group information into individual panes. Content includes scrolling lists, data
fields, function keys, or a combination of controls.
Tabs are located along the left and right sides of a pane.
Active
Tab
Inactive
Tabs
Inactive
Tabs
Keyboards
The navigator employs multiple keyboard types to serve specific settings and
functions.
GTN 750Xi Series

Numeric keypads open on a single pane.
Enter keys always

appear near the bottom
of the display.
Numeric
ABC
QWERTY

System at a Glance
GTN 650Xi SERIES

Alphanumeric keyboards comprise multiple keysets that are accessible by way of
swipe or key selection.
ABC keysets, GTN 650Xi Series
Selectable Keysets
An indicator shows which keyset is active.

Keys A through M are active by default.
Active Keyset
For convenience, GTN 650Xi Series navigators provide a slider, allowing you to
quickly select a group of five keys at any given time.
Slider, GTN 650Xi Series Swiping the key selector

left or right scrolls through
all available keys.
Active
Selection
Key Selector
Alphanumeric keyboards are customizable. You may select a keyboard type from
the System Setup app. For more about this option, read Keyboard Type in section 2.

System at a Glance
Control Knobs
Outer Inner
Dual Concentric Knob Volume/Squelch Knob

Inner and outer control knobs offer A single volume knob controls
an alternative method for selecting audio volume for the selected
and modifying data without the COM radio, NAV receiver, and/or
use of touch keys. external audio input devices
(e.g., remote audio panel).
Depending on configuration, pushing these knobs momentarily performs additional

XPDR, COM, and/or NAV related functions.
VOLUME/SQUELCH KNOB FUNCTIONS
• Adjusting COM radio volume1

Knob Turn
• Adjusting NAV radio volume2
• Disabling the COM automatic squelch function1

Knob Push
• Enabling/disabling the ident tone for the NAV radio2
DUAL CONCENTRIC KNOB FUNCTIONS
• Moving cursor forward or backward within data field

Outer Knob
• Selecting a page shortcut
Turn
• Tuning major frequency digits1
• Modifying individual characters in data entry field

Inner Knob • Scrolling lists
Turn • Tuning minor frequency digits1
• Zooming map displays
• Entering current or specified numerical value

Knob Push • Toggling between radio and page navigation functions1
• Initiating active/standby frequency flip-flop1
1
GTN 635Xi/GTN 650Xi/GTN 750Xi only. 2 GTN 650Xi/GTN 750Xi only.

System at a Glance
Page Navigation Labels

A locater bar works in conjunction with the outer control knob, providing quick
access to the indicated page. Selectable page options are dependent upon
configuration.
Locater More Page Options
Shortcut Labels Active Page
Turning the outer knob clockwise A cyan background and border

or counter-clockwise moves the indicate active page and knob
locater through available page focus. Directional arrows show
options. when more options are available.
Customizable Page Slots

GTN Xi Series navigators allow you
to customize up to seven slots on
the locater bar.
First and last slots are dedicated
page shortcuts. Depending on
unit type, slot 1 may open Map1
or Default Navigation features2.
Slot 9, the last slot, opens the
Nearest Airport menu.
1 For more about customizable page slots,
GTN 750Xi Series only.
2 GTN 650Xi Series only. read Page Shortcuts in section 2.

System at a Glance
Knob Function Indicators

Icons to the right of the bar indicate available knob functions. Indications include,
but are not limited to:
Map Active Flight Plan Active
Available functions: Available functions:

• Map zoom • Flight plan scrolling
• Set knob focus to COM • Set knob focus to COM
standby frequency standby frequency
Home Page Active
Available functions:
• Multiple pane scrolling
(GTN 650Xi Series only)
• Set knob focus to COM
standby frequency
Dual Concentric Knob Shortcuts

GTN 650Xi/750Xi
For convenience, a three-way toggle function allows you to
access radio controls quickly via knob push. A cyan border
indicates changes in knob focus. This shortcut is useful when
transitioning through the different control modes.
Customization options allow you to set knob functionality
according to preference. By default:
• Pushing once enables standby COM frequency tuning.
• Pushing twice enables standby NAV frequency tuning.
• Pushing again returns to page navigation mode.
On some dual GTN Xi installations, more complex knob functions allow you to tune
radio frequencies on both units from a single navigator. For more about the remote
radio control feature, read Remote Radio Control in section 2.

System at a Glance
When GTN is not in page navigation mode, the available dual concentric knob
functions annunciate at the bottom of the display.
COM Standby Frequency Active Numeric Keypad Active

• Set knob focus to NAV • Numeric data entry
standby frequency
• Frequency tuning
Waypoint Identifier Direct To

Keypad Active Window Active

• Waypoint identifier • Direct-to waypoint editing
entry • Activate direct-to course
Dual concentric knob control is set to Page Navigation by default. You may change
this setting so that COM standby frequency control is the default knob function.
For steps, read Revert Knob Function to Radio Control in section 2.

System at a Glance
Screenshots
FEATURE REQUIREMENTS
• SD card in the FAT32 format, with memory capacity between 8 GB and 32 GB
Save images to an SD card at any time using Screenshot.

1. Verify that an SD card is present in the slot.
2. Go to the page of interest.
3. Push and hold the dual concentric knob.
4. With the knob depressed, push and release the Home key.
A camera icon momentarily shows in the annunciator bar indicating whether or not
the image is captured.
Screenshot Successful Screenshot Failed

Image automatically saves to Failures can occur if the SD card is:
the print folder in the SD card • Full
root directory.
• Not present or fully seated
To view saved images, remove
• Corrupt and needs reformatting
the SD card and open the print
folder on a computer. • Damaged
For more about proper SD card installation, read SD Card Slot.

System at a Glance
Color Conventions
Red
• Warning conditions
Yellow
• Cautionary conditions
Green
• Safe operating conditions
• Engaged modes
• Active COM frequency
White
• Scales and markings
• Current data and values
Magenta
• GPS data
• Active flight plan legs
Cyan
• Selectable references
• Glide range and best glide airport indications
• Standby frequencies
Gray
• Missing or expired data
• Product unavailable
Blue
• Water

System at a Glance
Compatible Equipment
Line Replaceable Units
OPTIONAL LRUs The system consists of multiple
LRUs, which are installed behind
ADC the instrument panel or in a
AHRS separate avionics bay. Their
modular design aids system
Autopilot maintenance and unit replacement.
DME Optional LRUs may include
Flight Stream 210/510 compatible equipment from either
Garmin or a third party
G3X Touch manufacturer. These vary by unit
G5 and installation type (VFR or IFR).
G500/G600 Some LRUs provide features that
require registration and/or
G500(H)/G600/G700 TXi enablement prior to activation.
GAD 42 Adapter Compatible LRUs are not limited to
GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Datalink the devices shown here. Check unit
software version for compatibility.
GDL 88/GTX 345 ADS-B Transceiver
GI 275
GMA 35/350
GMX 200
GSR 56 Satellite Datalink
GTX Transponders
MX20
Radar Altimeter
Remote GTN
Stormscope
TAS/TCAS
OPTIONAL INTERFACES
TCAS II
Airborne Weather Radar
(GTN 750Xi Series only)

2 Get Started
POWER UP ................................................................................................................2-2
DATABASES...............................................................................................................2-9
CONNECTIVITY.................................................................................................... 2-31
COM........................................................................................................................... 2-37
NAV ............................................................................................................................ 2-59
AUDIO PANEL....................................................................................................... 2-62
XPDR ......................................................................................................................... 2-72
ADS-B ALTITUDE REPORTING..................................................................... 2-78
PILOT SETTINGS.................................................................................................. 2-81
STATUS INDICATIONS ..................................................................................... 2-98
LOGS....................................................................................................................... 2-111
Get Started
Power Up
The unit receives power directly from the aircraft’s electrical system. Upon power-up,
the bezel key backlight momentarily illuminates. System failure annunciations
typically disappear within the first 30 seconds after power-up.
Splash Page
Databases automatically
update during power up when
newer database versions are
available.
The splash page shows the
transfer status of each new
database for the unit and any
configured LRUs using the
Database SYNC function.
Remaining on this page allows
the unit and all compatible
LRUs to automatically restart
and complete database
activation.
“Checking for Databases...” annunciates as the unit checks

for available database updates.
You may advance to another page during

this process by tapping Continue. However,
a manual system restart will be required to
activate databases at a later time.
GTN Xi allows multiple methods for updating databases. For more about the update
methods available with your system, read Database Updates.

Get Started
Database Start-up Page

Start-up pages present the unit
software versions and the name
and status of all installed
databases.
From here you may:
• View available databases:
Tap Databases.
• Advance to the next page:
Tap Continue.
WI-FI SETUP ACCESS

If a Flight Stream 510 wireless transceiver is present, the
WiFi Info key appears in the control bar. Tapping this key
opens a setup page. Read Set Up Wi-Fi for instructions.
FUEL SETUP ACCESS

Fuel settings may be accessible from the start-up page
depending on configuration.
If databases require attention (e.g., an expired or mismatched
database exists), the Fuel Setup key appears in the control
bar. Tapping this key opens a menu of fuel setup options.
Read Preset Fuel Quantities for instructions.

Get Started
Remote Database Confirmation

GTN Xi software v20.20 or later and any one of the following:
• Second GTN Xi Series navigator
• GDU TXi1
• GI 275
GTN Xi software v20.2x: SD cards containing databases must be removed from the second
GTN Xi Series navigator and/or GDU TXi unit(s).
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
Available for the following installations only.
• Dual GTN Xi
• GTN Xi/GDU TXi1
• GTN Xi/GI 2752
Start-up Page, Primary GTN Xi
Confirm database information

for all configured GTN Xi,
GDU TXi, and/or GI 275 units
from the start-up page of the
primary GTN Xi.
A message informs you when
databases are up to date.
Note the date that the next
database is set to expire.
A check mark means that no databases require attention.
Access keys allow you to view database information for all configured GTN Xi,
GDU TXi, and GI 275 units in the system.1, 2
• View the available database updates for each unit: Tap Database Updates.
• View a list of databases for each configured unit: Tap View All Databases.
• Advance to the next page: Tap Continue.
1 Requires GDU TXi software v3.30 or later.

2
Applicable only to GTN Xi software v20.30 and later & GI 275 software v2.60 and later.

Get Started
HOW IT WORKS
Upon power up, database information for each configured GTN Xi and GDU TXi
in the system is sent to the primary GTN Xi for pilot acknowledgment. All other
capable LRUs automatically skip the database start-up page once it is determined
that no database issues exist.
• If the database of a configured LRU is corrupt or missing: The unit will display
its database list and indicate the database in question. Confirmation via the
primary GTN Xi will still occur for all other configured units if their databases
are present and not corrupt.
• If an SD card containing databases is installed in the LRU: Remote database
confirmation will not be available for that unit.
Read more about database conflicts and effective cycles in the Databases section.

Get Started
Preset Fuel Quantities

CAUTION
Ensure that estimated fuel quantity values are accurate before flight.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Consult the POH for aircraft-specific operating limitations
GTN Xi stores preset fuel

amounts for estimated full and
tab amounts. These settings
may not be editable if the unit
is interfaced with a digital fuel
computer.
Fuel setup keys reside on the
start-up page or the Instrument
Panel Self-Test page depending
on unit configuration.
Fuel on Board Fuel Flow

Specify the current fuel quantity. Set fuel flow amount.
Tapping this key opens a keypad. Tapping this key opens a keypad.
Preset keys for “full” and “tabs”
aid in fuel data entry.
Initial value automatically reduces
based on current fuel flow.

Get Started
FUEL CAPACITY ENTRY KEYS

Set Full/Tabs
Opens the Fuel Capacity Setup menu.
Select the appropriate data entry key and enter the
estimated fuel amounts.
Fuel Full Capacity: Specify the tank full amount.
Fuel Tab Capacity: Specify the tank tab amount.
These values vary according to aircraft type.
Full
Sets the fuel remaining value to the specified full amount.
Tabs
Sets the fuel remaining value to the specified tab amount.
FUEL CAPACITY UNITS

Fuel capacity units are set in the
System Units app.
From the Home page:

Tap System > Units > Fuel, and select the preferred units.

Get Started
Instrument Panel Self-Test

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Self-test page availability is dependent upon the dealer-installed configuration
To ensure proper communication with external equipment, specifically non-Garmin

EHSI or mechanical HSI/CDI, a continuous built-in test feature exercises the unit’s
processor, memory, external inputs, and outputs upon power up.
If configured, the results of

all external equipment checks
performed by the unit display
on the Instrument Panel
Self-Test page.
Review this list to ensure that
all CDI/HSI outputs and other
displayed data are correct for
the connected equipment.
Tapping Continue advances
to the next page.
If an instrument remains flagged after one minute, check the status of the
associated LRU, then contact a Garmin dealer for support.

Get Started
Databases
Databases are stored in the unit’s internal memory. To view update cycles, or to
purchase individual databases or database packages, go to flyGarmin.com.
SUPPORTED DATABASES
Bodies of water, geopolitical boundary, and road
Basemap
information
ChartView1 Jeppesen terminal procedures
FliteCharts AeroNav terminal procedures
Airport, NAVAID, waypoint, and airspace information
Navigation
(Garmin or Jeppesen)
Obstacles Obstacle and wire data
SafeTaxi Airport surface diagrams
Terrain Terrain elevation data
1 Optional third-party database.
Aviation Database Errors

Visit flyGarmin.com to report any
discrepancies in database
information. These may include
incorrect procedures, inaccurate
depictions of terrain, obstacles
and fixes, or errors with any other
screen element used for For information regarding third-party
navigation or communication navigation databases, go to
purposes. jeppesen.com.

Get Started
Database Effective Cycles

Most databases expire at regular intervals. Exceptions include Basemap and Terrain,
which neither expire nor update on a regular schedule.
The start-up page lists all

currently installed databases.
Review this list for current
database types, cycle numbers,
and expiration dates.
Yellow text denotes when a
database is:
• Not available
• Installed before its
effective date
• Missing date information
• Past its expiration date
DATABASE EFFECTIVE STATUS

Databases • Effective upon release
with no
effective date • Includes Basemap and Terrain
• Effective during a specific period

Databases
• Unit determines database status using the current date
with specified
and time from GPS
effective dates
• Automatic activation occurs on the effective date
Overwriting SD Card
Database Files
When database files are loaded to
the SD card, any previously loaded
database files of the same type
residing on the card are
overwritten. This includes loading
a database of a different coverage
area or data cycle than that
currently residing on the SD card.

Get Started
Database Conflicts
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
Applicable to the following installations only.
• Dual GTN Xi
• GTN Xi/GDU TXi 1
• GTN Xi/GI 275 2
Conflicts occur when the database of a configured GTN Xi, GDU TXi, or GI 275
is corrupt, missing, or past its expiration date.
When this happens:
• A caution indication appears on the start-up page of the primary GTN Xi.
Depending on the type of conflict, a selectable information key may appear
next to the database name.
• The database list displays on the appropriate LRU (remote confirmation is no
longer available for that unit).
• The database name appears in yellow on both the primary GTN Xi and the
associated LRU.
Resolve database conflicts when they occur.
DATABASE MISMATCH
Tapping Database Mismatch
displays all databases of that
particular type and their
associated LRUs. Expired or
corrupt databases appear in
yellow at the top of the list.
MISSING DATABASE INFORMATION

A message informs you when
database information from
the indicated LRU is missing.
This appears when an LRU is
not powered on during
start-up.
Always verify that all LRUs are online before tapping Continue.
1 Applicable only to GDU TXi software v3.30 and later.
2 Applicable only to GTN Xi software v20.30 and later & GI 275 software v2.60 and later.

Get Started
Active and Standby Databases

The navigator uses two types of databases. Both transfer to the unit’s internal
storage.1
Active Databases Standby Databases
• Databases currently in use by the • Databases that have not reached

system the effective date
• Databases that were installed prior
to the last update2
Database Info
WHERE TO FIND IT During normal operation, you can view
information about all active and standby
Home databases from the System Status page.
System
System Status
ACTIVE DATABASE LIST

Selecting Active displays
information about the
databases currently in use.
You can also access
copyright information
from here.
Tapping View Copyrights

displays copyright information
for all installed databases.
1 GTN Xi software earlier than v20.30: Standby databases remain on the SD card until they become effective.
2 Applicable only to GTN Xi software v20.30 and later.

Get Started
STANDBY DATABASE LIST

Selecting Standby displays
information about databases
that are not yet effective.
Previously installed databases
also appear here once an
update completes.1
GTN Xi notifies when no

standby databases are
available.
DATABASE NOT FOUND

Notifications for databases
not present or available also
display in the form of
system messages.
Review the Active Database

Info list to determine the
status of the indicated
database.
Database
Not Present
1
Applicable only to GTN Xi software v20.30 and later.

Get Started
Database Updates
NOTE
The navigator supports SD cards in the FAT32 format only, with capacities ranging
between 8 GB and 32 GB.
GTN Xi offers multiple methods for loading and updating databases. Do not attempt
any of these while in flight (on ground only).
• Load databases via SD card. Once loading completes, you may power off
the unit and remove the card.
• Transfer databases from a portable electronic device using
Database Concierge. This method requires the Garmin Pilot app on a
portable electronic device and Flight Stream 510.
GTN Xi prioritizes database transfers via SD card over all other available means of
transfer. Updates via Database Concierge have priority over database
synchronization with capable Garmin avionics (e.g., GDU TXi).

Get Started
Manual Updates
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Database Updates page available only when the aircraft is on the ground
Database Updates Page, GTN 750Xi

The Database Updates page
presents a list of all available
databases.
You can view this list during
power up by tapping the
Databases key on the
start-up page.
DATABASE UPDATES KEY

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available only with GTN Xi software v20.30 and later
While on ground, you can access the Database Updates

page at any time for review purposes or to perform
manual database transfers.
From the Home page:

Tap System > Status > Menu > Database Updates.
DATABASE SOURCE INDICATION

Connext Icon
A Connext icon indicates when a database is from Garmin Pilot via wireless transfer.
No indication means the database is either from an SD card or the unit’s internal
Standby storage.

Get Started
SELECT ALL DATABASES

Select individual databases for transfer, or choose Select All
if all listed databases require updating.
By default, this page displays

only the databases
recommended for update.
A message notifies you when

no such databases are
available.
After all selections are made, initiate the transfer process by

tapping Start.
Once the transfer process is

complete, the unit will
automatically restart if the
aircraft is still on ground.
A system restart is required
to complete database
installation.
Dual GTN Xi and GTN Xi/GDU TXi Installations

Once database installation is complete, remote confirmation is possible from the
primary GTN Xi Series navigator regardless of whether the SD card is present in
either the second GTN Xi Series navigator or the GDU TXi unit.1
1
GTN Xi software v20.2x and GDU TXi software v3.30: Removal of the SD card from the second
GTN Xi Series navigator and/or GDU TXi is required for remote database confirmation.

Get Started
SHOW ALL DATABASES

Tapping Show All displays a complete list of all databases.
This list may include

databases that are:
• Not yet effective
• Older than the
currently active
database(s)
• Unable to update
due to an error
ERROR INFORMATION
To determine the cause of a database error, tap Error Info.
An information window
provides details regarding
the state of the database.

Get Started
SELECT REGION
This key appears when two databases are of the same type and
cycle, but pertain to different regions.
To specify a database region:

Tap Select Region, then select
the appropriate menu option.
REVERT TO PREVIOUS DATABASE VERSION

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
Updating a database does not overwrite its previous version. Once the update
process completes, the previously installed version of the database transfers to the
unit’s internal Standby storage. In the event that an automatic update is undesirable,
you can revert to the previous version using the manual update feature.
Previous database versions

appear as non-recommended
databases in the standby list.
They remain available for
manual install until a newer
version transfers to the
internal Standby storage.
To revert to a previous database version:

1. Open the Database Updates page
(Home > System > Status > Menu > Database Updates).
2. Select the previous database version.
3. Tap Start.
The unit restores the previous database version and transfers the newer database to
the internal Standby storage. The unit automatically restarts once the swap is
complete.

Get Started
Automatic Updates
Updates occur during power up when a newer version of the database is available.
The same process occurs when you load a new database for the first time.
Indications on the splash page

show when an automatic
database transfer is in progress.
Message text varies according
to installation method.
Tapping Continue advances
to the next page. Databases
will continue to transfer in the
background as you use other
features. A manual system
restart will be required to
activate databases at a later
time.
A counter shows the total number of available databases

and the number of databases received by the unit.
Automatic updates occur

when:
• A newer database is
detected on the SD card or in
the unit’s internal Standby
storage
• A newer database is within
its effective dates
If enabled, the Database SYNC function
• A recommended database is
synchronizes databases across all capable
available for transfer from a Garmin avionics. A coordinated restart of
capable LRU via the each unit completes the installation. For
Database SYNC function more about database synchronization,
(e.g., GDU TXi) read Synchronize Databases Across
• The aircraft is on ground Multiple Units.

Get Started
DATABASE TRANSFER SEQUENCE

Databases transfer in three major steps:
Step 1: Small Databases Step 2: Charts Step 3: Terrain
Includes: Available ChartView or Available Terrain

• Navigation FliteCharts database. database.
• Basemap
• SafeTaxi
• Obstacle
• Airport Directory
Restart required to No restart required. Installation occurs during
complete installation. the next unit power cycle.
SYSTEM RESTART OPTIONS

A system restart is required to complete installation of all small databases and Terrain.
This occurs automatically when you remain on the splash page during the transfer
sequence.
If you choose to advance to another

page, two-step confirmation is
needed once database transfer is
complete. Tap Yes and then OK
to confirm the request and
complete installation.
Tapping No or Cancel aborts
installation. All transferred
databases remain available in the
unit’s internal Standby storage.
Updates are indicated in the list
of currently installed databases.
In the event that an automatic
database update is undesirable,
you can revert to the previous
database version from the
Database Updates page.1
Confirmation is required as active navigation data

will be lost during system restart.
1
GTN Xi software earlier than v20.30: An update option allows you to select individual databases and initiate
the transfer process. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the update.

Get Started
Load Databases from an SD Card

The unit stores all databases it receives in its internal storage. After a database
updates, the SD card is no longer required.
Install or update a database using an SD card:

1. Download a database onto an SD card.
2. Insert the SD card with the most recent database(s) into the card slot.
3. Power on the unit.
Splash Page
The unit detects when an

SD card with recommended
databases is present in the slot.
Updates occur automatically at
power up.
Terrain databases may require
up to 5 minutes for transfer.
Total transfer time depends on
the SD card type.
Tap Continue at any time to
advance to the next page.
A system restart is required to complete installation.

• If you remain on the splash page: No action is necessary.
The system automatically restarts once the update is complete.
• If you advance to another page during the transfer process:
A pop-up requests a system restart once the update is complete.
Tap Yes and confirm the request.
Once installation is complete, you may power off the unit and remove the SD card.
Updates are indicated in the list of currently installed databases.
You can transfer databases across all capable Garmin avionics via the
Database SYNC function. For more information, read Synchronize Databases Across
Multiple Units.

Get Started
Transfer Databases Using Database Concierge

Database Concierge allows wireless transfer of databases from a
portable electronic device while the aircraft is on ground.
• The aircraft is on ground and the avionics are powered on
• Garmin Pilot app on a portable electronic device
• Active Garmin Pilot subscription (for enabling Database Concierge)
• Flight Stream 510 wireless transceiver
A pilot selects and downloads databases inside the Garmin Pilot app. Transfers occur
once the Garmin Connext device establishes a wireless connection inside the aircraft.
Prompts to connect to a Wi-Fi network and database transfer indications appear on
both Garmin Pilot and GTN Xi.
Database Concierge Transfer Function

• Provides automatic updates for databases with effective dates
• Preloads databases that are not yet effective by placing them in the unit’s
internal Standby storage
• Displays database type, cycle, effective date, and transfer progress
• Allows you to initiate transfer from the Database Updates page via the
Start key
• Requires pilot confirmation
GTN Xi Installations with GDL 60 Wi-Fi/LTE Datalink

For information about transferring databases using Database Concierge, consult
GTN Xi Series Addendum for GDL 60.

Get Started
TRANSFER DATABASES VIA FLIGHT STREAM 510

1. Purchase database(s) from
flyGarmin.com.
2. Open Garmin Pilot and
follow the download
instructions.
3. Install wireless transceiver
into card slot.
4. Power on the unit.
5. Connect to Wi-Fi.
6. Follow the on-screen
prompts.
Database Concierge transfers

databases from Garmin Pilot to
Flight Stream 510. A progress
bar shows when this process is
complete.
GTN Xi either updates or
preloads databases based on
their effective date. A second
progress bar indicates upload
status.
Once database transfer is
complete, the unit prompts a
system restart.1 Updates are
intended to occur while the
aircraft is on ground.
Skip Database Transfer

Tapping Skip Transfer and Continue cancels any unfinished wireless transfers and
initiates the update process.
The unit activates any databases that completed transfer before the interruption.
Previously selected databases on an SD card or in the internal standby update as well.
The message “Transfers interrupted” displays if no databases are available.

Get Started
Synchronize Databases Across Multiple Units

The Database SYNC function minimizes database
maintenance by synchronizing active and standby
databases across all capable Garmin avionics.
• GTN Xi software v20.30 or later (background updates & coordinated LRU restart)
• Database SYNC function enabled on all participating LRUs
WHERE TO FIND IT Control for this function resides in the

System Status menu.
System
Home > System > System Status > Menu >
System Status Database SYNC
Menu
A pop-up informs you that

enabling Database SYNC may
overwrite any databases
currently in standby.
Toggling Database SYNC off
disables the Chart Streaming
function (if enabled).
Database SYNC Transfer Function

• Enables automatic database synchronization across all capable Garmin avionics1
• Background updates allow the use of features without having to wait for
individual LRUs to complete the update process2
• Coordinated automatic restart of all capable LRUs to complete installation2
• Prompts unit restart only when you advance beyond the splash page during
database transfer2
• Available for all supported databases3
• Includes active and standby databases
1 For a list of compatible LRUs, read Database SYNC Compatibility in this section.
2
Applicable only to GTN Xi software v20.30 and later.
3 Terrain database synchronization not available for units with GTN Xi software earlier than v20.30.
Dual GTN Xi Installations

To prevent crossfill errors after installing new databases, be sure to install matching
databases on both GTN Xi units and allow Database SYNC to complete before
departure.

Get Started
DATABASE SYNC COMPATIBILITY

GTN Xi provides one-way or two-way database transfers based on software
compatibility with the configured LRUs.
• One-way syncing means that GTN Xi can transfer databases to compatible
LRUs (it cannot receive database transfers)
• Two-way syncing means that GTN Xi can transfer databases to and from
compatible LRUs
GTN Xi SYNC
COMPATIBLE LRUs
SOFTWARE CAPABILITY
• GTN 650/750 v6.30 and later
• G500/600 v7.00 and later
v20.2x and earlier Two-way
• GPS 175/GNC 355/GNX 375 v3.10
and later
• G500/600 TXi v3.50 and later
Two-way • GTN 750/650 v6.73 and later
• GI 275 v2.60 and later
v20.30 and later • GTN 650/750 v6.30 through v6.72
• G500/600 v7.00 and later
One-way
• GPS 175/GNC 355/GNX 375 v3.10
and later

Get Started
SYNCHRONIZATION STATUS INDICATIONS

Splash Page, Primary GTN Xi
During the transfer process, all

sync-enabled displays pause
momentarily while databases
upload to the primary GTN Xi.
As each database uploads to
the unit, a counter informs you
of transfer status. Total number
of available databases excludes
chart databases.
Remaining on this page allows

all compatible LRUs to
automatically restart and
complete database activation.
Tapping Continue on the
primary GTN Xi advances each
configured display to the next
page. You can use features on
any configured LRU while
updates continue in the
background.
The unit waits for synchronization to complete across all

capable avionics before initiating an automatic restart.

Get Started
COORDINATED UNIT RESTART

A restart of all capable Garmin avionics is required to complete installation.
• If you remain on the splash page: No action is necessary. All capable LRUs
automatically restart once the update is complete.
• If you advance to another page during the transfer process:
A pop-up requests a system restart once the update is complete.
Tap Yes and confirm the request to complete installation for each unit.1
Start-up Page, Primary GTN Xi
A message on the primary

GTN Xi informs you when the
databases on all capable
avionics are up to date.
Once installation is complete,
all previously installed
databases transfer to each
unit’s internal Standby storage.
You may revert to a database’s previous version at any time. Go to the Database
Updates page on each configured unit to restore the database’s previous version.
This manual process must be performed on each individual unit. Synchronization is
not available when reverting to a database’s previous version.
For more information, read Revert to Previous Database Version.
1 GTN Xi software earlier than v20.30: Confirm the restart request on each LRU if necessary.

Get Started
SYNCHRONIZED DATABASE LIST

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
WHERE TO FIND IT You can view a list of the databases currently

synchronizing with other LRUs from the
System associated information tab.
System Status
Database SYNC
Status messages inform you

when:
• The unit is transmitting
or receiving databases
• The Database SYNC
function is disabled
• The LRU is offline
A progress bar shows when a database transfer is complete.

• A database is not
authorized for
synchronization
• A unit restart is required
• Database transfer is
complete
A message informs you when database synchronization

is not in progress.
If a particular LRU is not accepting a database, refer to the Database SYNC tab to
determine the possible cause.

Get Started
Stream Charts
Chart Streaming allows streaming of individual charts
on an as-needed basis until database sync is complete.
Toggling this function off has no effect on
Database SYNC.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available only when Database SYNC is active and a current chart database is available
WHERE TO FIND IT Control for this function resides in the System Status
menu.
System
Home > System > System Status > Menu >
System Status Database SYNC > Chart Streaming
Menu
Chart Streaming Function

• Enables automatic streaming of individual charts from the newest chart
database
• LRUs with chart streaming enabled display the most current chart information
• Current charts display on the Charts page; chart overlays are available for
display on Map
• Chart database effective date displays on the Charts page if database has
expired
• Previously installed chart database remains available in the unit’s internal
Standby storage1
• Available for both ChartView and FliteCharts
• No restart required
A typical chart database may take up to one hour to synchronize across multiple
LRUs. For 100 Mb/s enabled LRUs (e.g., GDU TXi, GI 275, GTN Xi), synchronization
may take up to 10 minutes.1
1
Available only with GTN Xi software v20.30 and later.

Get Started
CHART STREAMING STATUS ICONS & NOTATIONS

The following indications appear during the update process.
A spinning arrow appears on Textual annunciations at the

the Charts Home page icon when bottom of the Charts display
a new chart database is streaming. inform you of update status.
Chart Database Mismatches

Chart database update status annunciates on the start-up page. Spinning arrow icon
appears until any mismatches are resolved and synchronization is complete.
Database Mismatch
with GDU 1
Tapping Database Mismatch displays details about

mismatched databases and their associated LRUs.
For information about Charts page features, read Charts in section 3. For more
about database mismatches, read Database Conflicts in this section.

Get Started
Connectivity
Connext works via wireless connectivity links to provide
up-to-date, wireless information to and from the cockpit.
The Connext interface allows wireless communication with
Garmin Pilot from a portable electronic device.
WHERE TO FIND IT Available remote features and setup options

are dependent upon aircraft interfaces or
Home enablement, and the Garmin Connext
device (Flight Stream 210/510).
System
Connext Setup
CONNEXT FEATURES AT A GLANCE

FEATURE FS 210 FS 510
ADS-B In Traffic Data • •
AHRS Data from Built-in Sensor 1, 2 •
AHRS Data from Compatible Display • •
Connext Weather • •
Database Concierge •
FIS-B Weather and Flight Information • •
Flight Data Log Streaming •
Flight Plan Transfer • •
GPS/WAAS Position, Velocity & Time Information • •
GSR 56 Phone/SMS Text • •
Primary Flight Data • •
SiriusXM Audio Remote Control • •
SiriusXM Weather • •
1
Attitude data does not output to other installed avionics.
2 The internal AHRS sensor is only for use with a portable electronic device. All internal AHRS functions
are automatic and do not require pilot action.

Get Started
Wi-Fi Password
When setting up a Wi-Fi network, choose a password that meets the minimum
security requirements. Wi-Fi passwords must be no less than eight characters in
length.
A pop-up informs you that the

password is invalid if it is under
eight characters.
Tap OK and re-enter a new
password.
Weak Passwords
A password is considered weak if it is less than 16 characters in length and does not
contain at least one uppercase letter, one lowercase letter, one number, and one
symbol.
A pop-up requests confirmation if

the password does not meet the
minimum recommended password
length or strength.
To confirm the password, tap OK.
To cancel the entry and create a
new password, tap Cancel.

Get Started
Flight Stream 210/510 Setup

When Flight Stream 210/510 is present, GTN Xi supports wireless
pairing with up to 13 portable electronic devices via Garmin Pilot.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Unit allows pairing of up to 13 Bluetooth enabled devices, with two simultaneous
device connections
• Wi-Fi connectivity and database transfer feature applicable to Flight Stream 510 only
• Auto reconnect function is not available for Android devices
Flight Stream 210 Flight Stream 510

Wireless gateway installed in the Wireless transceiver installed in
aircraft. Allows data streaming via the GTN Xi unit’s SD card slot by
Bluetooth wireless technology. the pilot. Allows data streaming
via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth wireless
connectivity.
Connext Setup Options, Flight Stream 510

Device information and pairing
mode status are viewable in
the Connext Setup app.
Controls for enabling
Flight Stream features also
reside here. These include:
• Flight Plan Import
• Databases1
• Phone/SMS2
1 Applicable to Flight Stream 510 only. 2 Applicable to GSR 56 only.

Get Started
Set Up Bluetooth
Bluetooth device management options for Flight Stream 210/510 reside on the
Paired Devices page. Opening this page automatically initiates device pairing.
BLUETOOTH NAME
This key allows you to enter the name of the
Bluetooth enabled device. Use the keypad or
control knobs to enter the device name.
MANAGE PAIRED DEVICES

To view a list of all paired devices and their
connection status, tap Manage Paired Devices.
To enable automatic connection between the unit and a paired device at power up,
tap Auto Reconnect.
AUTO RECONNECT
Enables automatic connection between the unit and the paired device when the two
are within range.
REMOVE
Removing a device from the list means it is no longer paired with the unit. This action
requires pilot confirmation.
Be sure to remove pairing on both devices before attempting to pair them again.
CONNECTION STATUS
The device is configured and communicating properly.
The device is not available and is not configured or it is not

communicating properly.

Get Started
Import a Flight Plan

Allow automatic import of flight plans via Bluetooth
wireless technology. Once the transfer is complete, an
advisory message informs you that a new flight plan is
available for preview.
To view the flight plan, acknowledge the advisory and tap Preview.
It may be necessary to turn this function off if a portable device application makes
repeated erroneous attempts to send flight plans to the unit.
Set Up Wi-Fi
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Applicable to Flight Stream 510 only
Tapping WiFi Info opens an information page. This

feature is accessible from the Database Update and
start-up pages.
Information includes:
• Database Concierge
connection status
• Connected device name
• Database update availability
and instructions
• Wi-Fi SSID and password

Get Started
WI-FI INFO KEY STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS

Wi-Fi connection status annunciates on the key label when the information page is
not active.
Flight Stream 510 requires power up.
Wi-Fi is active, but the unit is waiting to connect with a

device.
Connection complete. Flight Stream 510 requires Garmin
Pilot to be opened in order for database transfer to
commence.
Garmin Pilot opened and streaming to unit.
CONNECT TO WI-FI
Follow the onscreen prompts when connecting to the Wi-Fi network.
1. Install Flight Stream 510.
2. Power on the unit. Observe Wi-Fi status changes from “Offline” to “Ready.”
3. Tap WiFi Info.
4. Enter the required SSID and password using the provided keypads.
5. Enable Wi-Fi setting on the portable device. Wi-Fi status changes to
“Open App” once pairing is complete.

Get Started
COM
AVAILABLE WITH:
GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi
COM Standby Control Panel

VHF COM transceiver controls are accessible via the
selectable standby (STBY) frequency window.
3 4
1 Frequency Entry Field 4 Transfer (Flip-Flop) Key
2 Find Key 5 Data Entry Keys
3 Monitor Key
From the COM Standby

control panel you can:
• Specify a standby frequency
• Swap active and standby
frequency values
• Enable monitor mode
• Access radio volume controls

Get Started
COM Volume Controls

Percent of Relative Volume Adjust radio volume with the small
Max Volume Indicator knob according to your preference.
The unit retains volume settings
over power cycles.
Open Squelch
Push the volume/squelch knob to override the automatic
squelch function. Push it again to return the squelch to
automatic operation.
“SQ” annunciates in the COM active frequency window
to show when the squelch is overridden (i.e., when the
squelch is open).
The automatic squelch function rejects many localized noise sources. Overriding this
function may be helpful when listening to a distant station or setting the volume
level.
Volume/Squelch Knob Adjustments

Knob focus is determined by radio selection. Selecting the
COM control sets the focus to the COM radio. Selecting the
NAV control sets it to the NAV radio.
When COM radio is active:
• Pushing the knob disables automatic squelch control.
• Turning the knob adjusts the COM volume percentage.
If NAV radio is active:
• Pushing this knob enables or disables the ident tone.
• Turning the knob adjusts the NAV volume percentage.

Get Started
COM Radio Setup

WHERE TO FIND IT COM radio customization options are accessible
via the System Setup app.
System
System Setup
COM/NAV
1 4
1 COM Channel Spacing Key 4 Reverse Frequency Lookup Key
2 Remote Radio Controls1 5 Knob Control Default Key
3 COM Sidetone Controls
1
Dual GTN Xi installations only.

Get Started
COM SETUP OPTIONS

From here you can:
• Set transceiver channel spacing
• Enable reverse frequency look-up
Channel Spacing functionality
8.33 kHz • Select the default knob control
25 kHz function
Reverse Frequency Lookup
• Enable remote radio frequency
Knob Control Default tuning via the control knob1
Page Navigation
• Enable remote radio tuning
COM Radio
Knob Control Radios1 indications1
Local • Adjust sidetone volume offset
Local & Remote
Tuning Indications1
Local
Local & Remote
COM Sidetone Volume
Link to COM VOL
Set offset value
1 Dual GTN Xi installations only.

Get Started
Set COM Channel Spacing

The unit supports channel tuning for both 8.33 kHz and 25 kHz channels within
radio-frequency range. Channel spacing is set to 25.0 kHz by default.
Tapping COM Channel Spacing toggles the

transceiver channel spacing between 8.33 kHz
and 25.0 kHz.
8.33 kHz 25.0 kHz
8.33 kHz step configuration COM radio operates in the

is available for European aviation voice band, between
operations. 118.000 and 136.975 MHz,
in 25.0 kHz steps.
If flying in a region where 8.33 kHz channel spacing is available, set the COM radio
to 8.33 kHz to prevent the loss of any stored or recently used frequencies.

Get Started
Revert Knob Function to Radio Control

You may change the default function of the dual concentric knob to accommodate
your workflow. Knob control is set to Page Navigation by default.
Tapping Knob Control Default changes the

default setting to COM Radio for standby
frequency control. Page navigation remains
accessible via knob push.
From the Home page:

Tap > System > Setup > COM/NAV > Knob Control Default.
Default knob function indicators change based on selection.
Page Navigation COM Radio
Tapping the key again returns the default setting to Page Navigation.
Access Remote Unit Radio Functions

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Knob Control Radios option available for dual GTN Xi installations only
• Remote Radio Control option available with GTN Xi software v20.10 and later
• Tuning indications option available with GTN Xi software v20.40 and later
Remote radio frequency tuning is available for dual GTN Xi installations.
SET KNOB FUNCTION FOR REMOTE RADIO CONTROL

The Knob Control Radios option allows you to access remote unit radio functions via
the dual concentric control knob.
Tapping Knob Control Radios toggles the knob

function between two control options.
Local Local & Remote

Limits knob tuning functionality to Sets knob tuning functionality to
local unit radios only. both local and remote navigators.

Get Started
SET DISPLAY OF REMOTE RADIO FREQUENCY

The Tuning Indications option allows you to control when the remote unit radio
frequency will display in the control bar.
Tapping Tuning Indications toggles the remote

radio frequency display between two control
options.
Local Local & Remote

Limits the display of the remote Allows the remote radio frequency
radio frequency to only when: to display during any of the
• The Radios page is active following:
• The remote radio is selected • The Radios page is active

via knob and the Knob • The remote radio is selected via
Control Radios function is knob
set to Local & Remote • The remote radio is manually
• The remote radio is tuned from a frequency pop-up
deselected via knob when
the Radios page is inactive
Setting the Tuning Indications option to Local & Remote may be useful in tandem
cockpits where the remote GTN Xi unit is out of view or beyond reach.
For information about remote unit radio functions, read Remote Radio Control
in this section.

Get Started
Enable Reverse Frequency Look-up

• Valid position data
• Active navigation database
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available only for the nearest stations in the database
Enabling this option displays the facility identifier and

frequency type for active and standby frequencies.
The unit verifies the displayed frequency against the
database at least once per minute.
Facility
Identifier
“+” denotes more than one type

associated with the frequency.
Frequency
Type
When frequency look-up

is active, COM displays:
• Nearest facility identifier
(if available)
• Multiple facility indication
When flying between airports that use
(if more than one)
the same frequency, it may take up to
• Frequency type 2 minutes for look-up information to
• Approach or Departure change after crossing the half way
indications (if applicable) point.

Get Started
Adjust Sidetone Volume Offset

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Availability dependent upon configuration
• Offset range: +/-25% of total COM audio volume range
Numeric If the unit is wired for audio

Offset Value output, set the sidetone volume
offset to the preferred level.
By default, the offset value is set
to zero percent.
The unit retains manual offset
Decrease Increase settings over power cycles.
Offset Offset
COM sidetone is audio spoken into the microphone that is played back in real time
over the headset. The offset setting determines sidetone volume for the COM
during radio transmission. Adjustments determine the amount that the sidetone
volume level is offset from the COM receiver volume or the configured sidetone
volume.
LINK TO COM VOLUME

Enabling this function allows you to adjust the
amount that the sidetone volume level is offset from
the COM receiver volume. These adjustments are
dynamic in that they vary with the COM receiver
volume level.
To adjust the offset from the COM receiver volume:

1. Enable Link to COM VOL.
2. Tap Offset and adjust as necessary.
To adjust the offset from the configured sidetone volume, disable Link to COM VOL
and then adjust the offset as necessary. These adjustments are fixed as they are
relative to the configured sidetone volume.

Get Started
Tuning & Monitoring

Communication frequencies are split
between two selectable windows.
Active
Frequency The upper window presents the active
COM radio frequency. This is the
frequency currently in use for transmit
Standby and receive operations.
Frequency
The lower window presents the standby
radio frequency. This frequency may be
set and activated at any time.
COM STATUS INDICATIONS

Status annunciations denote active functions, modes, and frequency types.
Receiving Automatic Active Transmitting

Transmission Squelch Radio ID
Overridden
Frequency Monitor
Lookup Mode
Result Active
Transmitting
Receiving transmission
Monitor mode active
Automatic squelch is overridden (i.e., squelch is open)
Active radio ID1
Reverse frequency information (sample text)
1
Dual GTN Xi installations only.

Get Started
Direct Tuning
You may enter a standby frequency using the data
entry keys on the COM Standby control panel or by
turning the control knob.
Tapping STBY opens the control panel. From here you
may specify a frequency or select one using the
provided search options.
The current standby frequency value displays in the

direct tuning field.
DATA ENTRY KEYS
Enter a new standby frequency using the

provided data entry keys or by turning and
pushing the control knob.
To cancel the entry and exit the control panel,
tap Back.
Entering the new frequency value

places it in standby.

Get Started
FREQUENCY AUTOFILL
Numeric characters autofill the first valid frequency
value based on each selected digit.
Autofill characters are muted and display from the
Matching cursor position to the right of the field.
Frequency
Selecting a digit that is not valid for the cursor

location results in no entry.
Invalid Selection
Attempting to enter a frequency

value after selecting an invalid
digit generates a pop-up
message.
Confirm the request by
selecting OK.
Simplified Frequency Entry

The direct tuning field allows you
the option of entering frequencies
without typing the leading and/or
trailing digits. For example:
To enter frequency 121.50, you
need only tap 2, 1, and 5.
The field autofills the leading
“1” and trailing “0.”

Get Started
KNOB TUNING
The dual concentric control knob allows you to enter a standby frequency without
opening the control panel. Pushing the knob toggles between radio and page
navigation functions.
The selected STBY If no action occurs, When the STBY COM

window turns cyan the selected STBY frequency is no longer
when the knob is window reverts to cyan selected, it reverts to
used to change the text after 3 seconds. white text.
STBY frequency. This indicates it can
be controlled by the
knob.

Get Started
Transfer Frequency to Active (Flip-Flop)

Before After The transfer (or flip-flop) function
allows you to swap the active and
standby frequency values.
This function is accessible multiple
ways.
ACTIVE FREQUENCY WINDOW

Tapping this window swaps the active frequency value
with the standby frequency displayed in the lower
window.
Tap once to swap the displayed frequency values. Tap
again to swap them back.
A transfer icon indicates that flip-flop functionality is
available.
XFER KEY
Tapping this key on the COM Standby control panel
performs the same function as tapping the COM active
frequency window.
Frequency Flip-Flop via Control Knob

Pushing and holding the control knob for 0.5 seconds
automatically flip-flops the active and standby frequency
values.
• “Hold for flip-flop” control label appears in the
annunciator bar
• Standby and active COM frequency values swap
Frequency Autofill & Transfer

If you initiate a transfer before completing frequency entry, the direct tuning field
autofills the remaining characters, enters the frequency into the standby field, then
swaps it with the active frequency.

Get Started
Remote Radio Control

• GTN Xi software v20.10 or later
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Dual GTN Xi installations only
• NAV radio options available only on GTN 650Xi/750Xi
Some dual GTN Xi installations allow you to tune radio frequencies on both units
from a single navigator. The Knob Control Radios setup option allows you to switch
between local control (local navigator only) and remote control (local and remote
navigators).
Radio ID Label An inverted radio label

differentiates COM/NAV 2 from
COM/NAV 1.
This label always appears for
Standby
Frequency COM/NAV 2 regardless of whether
it is the remote or local radio.
Tapping STBY opens the control

panel for the indicated radio.
From here you may tune the
indicated radio or access controls
for all radios by tapping the
Radios key.

Get Started
Radios are listed according to navigator (local/remote). Cyan denotes the current
radio selection. A frequency control key allows you to open the standby control panel
for the associated radio.
Tapping Back closes the list and returns to the previous view.
Selected Radio
Local Indication
Radios
Frequency
Control Key
Remote
Radios
Turning the volume knob adjusts the volume level for

the active radio only.
Changes in radio selection and

standby frequency are reflected in
the control bar.
Remote Radio Control Knob Access

When remote radio control is active, you may toggle between
multiple radios quickly via knob push. Knob focus indications
on the control bar and on the Radios page change to reflect
the current radio selection.
Available radio options are dependent upon unit type.
• COM only units switch between COM 1 and COM 2
• Units with COM and NAV radios scroll as follows:
local COM > local NAV > remote COM > remote NAV
Direct Tuning from the Radios Page:
Knob tuning adjustments and frequency transfers are

reflected in real time on the corresponding control key.

Get Started
LOAD FREQUENCY OPTIONS

You can load active or standby
frequency values to a COM or
NAV radio from a search tab or
waypoint information page
(i.e., Airport, VOR). Selecting a
frequency from one of these
locations opens a pop-up.
Select the Active or Standby
key for the appropriate radio.
Monitor Mode
Enabling monitor mode allows you to listen to the standby
frequency while the unit continues monitoring the active
COM channel.
When the COM active frequency receives a signal, the unit
automatically switches back to the active frequency. Once
activity on the COM active channel ceases, the unit returns
to listening to the standby frequency.
Monitor mode is useful when you

Tower Transmission want to listen to a recorded
(Active Frequency)
broadcast (e.g., ATIS) on the
standby channel, but still receive
ATIS Broadcast control tower transmissions on the
(Standby Frequency) active channel.

Get Started
Frequency Selection
The unit provides multiple options for finding and selecting a standby frequency from
the available database frequencies.
Search Tabs
The Find key provides access to multiple search tabs. Each tab
displays a list of selectable identifiers based on specific criteria.
Nearest
Lists up to 25 airports within a 200 NM radius
Airports
Nearest FSS List the distance, bearing, and frequency associated with the
& ARTCC specified facility name
Recent Lists up to 20 of the most recently tuned frequencies
Flight Plan Lists all frequencies contained in the active flight plan
User Lists up to 15 user-defined frequencies
TAB ENTRIES
Waypoint Bearing &

Identifier Distance
Each entry includes general
information about the
associated waypoint.
Frequency Key
MULTIPLE FREQUENCIES
Tap Multiple FREQ and select a frequency from
associated pop-up.
This key appears when more than one frequency is available at the indicated
identifier.
Applicable to functions displaying information only (Nearest Airports, FSS,
and ARTCC).

Get Started
Remote Frequency Selection

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
On units configured for remote frequency recall, user frequencies are selectable via a
remote switch.
• Pressing the switch once loads the next user frequency into the STBY window
• Pressing the switch repeatedly scrolls through the list of presets
• Some installations may have two dedicated recall switches: one to scroll up,
one to scroll down
• Selections do not activate until transfered to active
Emergency Frequency
Pressing and holding the volume knob provides a quick method for remotely tuning
the emergency frequency (121.50 MHz). This function also sets 121.50 MHz as the
active frequency. Remote COM Lock is not activated if using this method. This
feature is available any time the unit is on, regardless of GPS or display status.
Remote COM Lock

If configured, pressing and
holding the remote COM transfer
key for two seconds locks the
COM at 121.50 MHz, preventing If the radio loses communication with
further changes in frequency. A the system, the unit automatically
message informs you of the tunes to 121.50 MHz for transmit and
change in status. To unlock, press receive operations, regardless of the
and hold the remote key again. displayed frequency.

Get Started
Create User Frequencies

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Names may be up to seven characters in length
• Maximum number of 15 user frequencies
Create or edit user frequencies from the

Edit Frequency
Edit Frequency pop-up menu.
Name
Type name
Frequency
Specify Frequency
Save
Delete
Name Assign the frequency a unique identifier.

Frequency Specify a frequency value.
Save Add the frequency to the user frequency list.
Delete Remove the selected user frequency from the list.

Appears only for existing entries.

Get Started
ADD A USER FREQUENCY

From the COM Standby page:
1. Tap Find > Select the User tab.
2. Tap Add User Frequency.
3. Specify the frequency name and value.
4. Tap Enter.
A pop-up message informs you

when the user frequency list is full.
EDIT USER FREQUENCY

Tapping the Edit key for an
existing entry opens the same
pop-up. From here you may
modify the user frequency name
and value.
Tapping Enter stores all changes.
User Edit Key

Frequency
Tapping Delete removes the

selected user frequency from the
list. A pop-up message requests
confirmation.

Get Started
COM Alert
If the radio fails:
• Red “X” displays over the COM radio control
• Advisory message alerts
• COM control page is not available
COM radio fail annunciations are designed to be immediately recognizable.

If a failure occurs while the control page is active, the display automatically returns
to the previous page.
For information regarding pilot response to a COM radio failure, consult the AFMS.
Stuck Microphone
The COM transmitter automatically times out after 30 seconds of continuous
broadcasting. This may occur when:
• Push-to-talk key on the microphone is stuck or accidentally left in the keyed
position
• Push-to-talk function continues to transmit after releasing the key
The advisory message “COM push-to-talk is stuck” alerts for as long as the
condition exists.

Get Started
NAV
AVAILABLE WITH:
GTN 650Xi/750Xi
Frequency Tuning & Selection

Navigation frequency tuning, transfer, and selection
functions are identical to those used for communication
frequencies.
Direct Tuning
Frequency Identifier You may enter a standby NAV frequency

from Morse Code using the data entry keys on the NAV
Standby control panel or by turning the
dual-concentric control knob.
GTN Xi automatically decodes Morse
code and displays the Ident for the active
frequency above it.
The reverse frequency lookup identifier
displays below the frequency value.
Frequency Identifier Frequency lookup results are based on
Based on GPS GPS position and database information.
Position
GTN 650Xi SERIES

Due to spatial considerations, only one frequency control may display at a time.
COM is the default frequency control option.

Get Started
STANDBY NAV FREQUENCY ENTRY
Active NAV To change the standby frequency:

Frequency
1. Push the dual concentric control knob
repeatedly until the standby NAV frequency
window is activated.
2. Rotate the inner and outer knobs or tap
STBY and enter the frequency using the
data entry keys.
Upon selection, the standby frequency window
remains active for approximately 30 seconds.
Standby NAV You can tap XFER to assign the standby value
Frequency as the active frequency, or select the active NAV
frequency window to flip/flop values.
Navigation frequencies
include:
• Glideslope
• Localizer
• VOR
Search Tabs
The Find key provides access to multiple search tabs.
Each tab displays a list of selectable identifiers based
on specific criteria.

Get Started
IDENT
IDENT Active When the standby NAV frequency window is
Indication active, pushing the volume knob activates the
NAV IDENT function.
• “ID” annunciates in the active NAV
frequency window
• Morse code tones are audible
Volume Knob Adjustments

Turning the volume knob
while the NAV frequency
window is activated
adjusts the radio’s
volume percentage.
NAV Alert
If the radio fails:
• Red “X” displays over the NAV radio control
• NAV control page is not available
NAV radio fail annunciations are designed to be immediately recognizable.

to the previous view.
Use an alternate method of navigation in response to a NAV radio failure.

Get Started
Audio Panel
AVAILABLE WITH:
GTN 725Xi/750Xi
Audio Panel Controls

Audio panel controls are accessible via the Audio Panel
key. This key is unavailable if the unit is not configured for
audio or intercom LRUs, such as GMA 35.

Get Started
PLAYBACK CONTROLS
The voice recorder feature records all audio heard on any mic-enabled COM radio
selected for transmission. Playback is heard by anyone listening on the selected
radios. The clearance recorder can record up to 2.5 minutes of COM audio.
Tap Playback Controls to:

• Set volume level of recordings
• Play, pause, and cycle through
recordings
CABIN SPEAKER CONTROL AND VOLUME

When cabin speakers are active, tap Speaker Volume to set the volume level.
HIGH SENSE
Prior to an ILS approach, tap High Sense for high marker sensitivity.

Get Started
Mic Setup
MIC selection can be set in the MIC window or
on the Audio Panel page.
Tap MIC to toggle between MIC 1 and MIC 2.
Under MIC Selection, select which COM you

want as your MIC selection. The selected MIC
is automatically monitored as indicated by the
green numbers in the MON field.
PASSENGER ADDRESS
Tap Passenger Address to toggle the passenger address system on and off.
SPLIT MODE
Active:
• Pilot uses one radio for MIC audio while the copilot uses a different radio
• Pilot and copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios
• Pilot can still listen to individually selected radios
• Pilot and copilot may talk and listen independently to the radios or PA
• Crew Intercom key is available allowing pilot and copilot to talk to each other
Inactive:
• Crew Intercom key is removed
• Selections are limited to Monitored Radios and MIC Selection

Get Started
3D Audio
When enabled, 3D audio allows you to focus on and understand one source at a
time. Depending on the selected COM channel, audio can be heard from your left,
in front of you, or from your right.
To hear 3D audio, set stereo/mono headphones to the stereo position.
MARKER Audio
The GMA 35 marker beacon receiver uses an audio indicator to alert you when the
aircraft passes over a marker beacon transmitter. When a green bar displays on the
MRKR Audio key, the audio from the receiver can be heard on the headsets.
Tap MRKR Volume to set the volume level of the alert.
The GMA 35 marker beacon receiver and indicators are part of the ILS system.
The marker beacon lamps operate independently of any audio selection and cannot
be turned off. The GMA 35 can drive external marker lamps if required and also
provides an autopilot middle marker sense output.
Marker beacon annunciations alternate between the standard and blinking symbol
at the blink interval noted.
STANDARD BLINKING MARKER BLINK

SYMBOL SYMBOL TYPE INTERVAL
Inner 250 ms
Middle 333 ms
Outer 750 ms

Get Started
Intercom
AVAILABLE WITH:
GTN 725Xi/750Xi
Intercom Modes
Intercom controls are accessible via the Intercom key.
There are different modes of operation to control
communication, music, and the telephone in the aircraft.
Tap the arrow between

the intercom recipients.
When the arrow is green,
it indicates communication
is active between the
recipients.
You can allow the copilot to hear what passengers hear.

Tap Menu > Group Co-Pilot with Passenger.
• Split mode is unavailable
• Copilot intercom/audio controlled by passenger
This is not recommended for multi-crew aircraft.

Get Started
Intercom Setup
Setup controls allow you to access:
• Communication modes between pilot, copilot, and passenger
• Distribution and mute options for two music interfaces
• Distribution and volume of phone calls
Passengers cannot transmit over the active COM radio, even if equipped with a
PTT key.
VOLUME AND SQUELCH ADJUSTMENTS
NOTE
Installations that utilize GMA 35 discretes must have the pilot squelch set to manual and
100% volume to allow installers to configure the GMA 35 discretes.
Volume and squelch may be set separately for the pilot, copilot, and passenger
intercoms.
To set volume and squelch levels, tap Pilot VOL/SQ, Co-Pilot VOL/SQ, or
Passenger VOL/SQ.
Directional keys increase or decrease volume and squelch.
Tapping Auto Squelch allows the unit to set squelch level automatically. Toggle this
function off for manual adjustments.
Music Setup
The GMA 35 provides two music interfaces. Select Music 1 or Music 2 to set:
• Who hears music
• When to mute music
• Music volume
At every power cycle, the “Mute music during radio” selection is active.

Get Started
Telephone Setup
NOTE
When using the GSR 56 Iridium phone system, Garmin recommends activating audio only
during phone calls.
The GMA 35 provides a 2-way telephone interface and depends on the state of the
telephone distribution. Telephone communication is much like using the intercom,
allowing both parties to talk at once.
Tap Telephone to set:
• The recipients of a telephone call
• The volume of the telephone call
Telephone audio distribution is retained across power cycles for the passengers. Pilot
and copilot telephone distribution deactivates after a power cycle.
Bluetooth Audio
The GMA 35c provides an audio connection to a portable device via Bluetooth
wireless technology.
Tap Bluetooth to set:
• Who can hear the Bluetooth enabled device
• When to mute audio
• Volume level

Get Started
Telligence Voice Command

• Compatible audio panel
Garmin's Telligence Voice Command voice recognition feature allows the pilot and
copilot to control the GTN Xi connected to a required GMA 35/350 using spoken
commands. To activate Voice Recognition, push and hold the Push-to-Command
(PTC) switch and speak a command. Release the PTC switch and the GTN Xi and/or
the audio panel responds with a positive acknowledgment chime.
A negative acknowledgment tone plays if a command is not understood or the GMA
and/or GTN Xi is unable to complete the request. Repeat the command by using the
PTC switch, or by manually using the GTN Xi touchscreen. In the event of any
abnormal voice recognition operation, the front panel controls and touchscreen may
be used to override voice recognition and manually control the unit.
If Telligence Voice Command malfunctions and needs disabling, remove power from
the GMA audio panel. This forces the audio panel into the fail-safe mode. You can
communicate using the COM 2 radio only.
PASS/FAIL INDICATIONS
AUDIBLE TONE DEFINITIONS
Pass
Ascending Command recognized and executed.
(low to high) Example: “Show Map page” is spoken and moving
map displays
Fail
Descending Command unrecognizable or invalid.
(high to low) Example: “Show Map page” is spoken and the
page does not change

Get Started
Voice Command Setup

To enable voice recognition, tap System > Voice Commands > Voice Commands.
VOICE COMMAND HISTORY

Tap Command History to view a list of recently spoken commands.
For a list of available voice recognition commands, consult Telligence Voice

Command Guide.

Get Started
Audio Panel Alert

If the audio panel fails:
• Red “X” displays over all audio panel-related
controls
• Audio panel, intercom, and Telligence Voice
Command functions are not available
Audio panel fail annunciations are designed to be immediately recognizable.

If a failure occurs while a control page is active, the display automatically returns
For information regarding pilot response to a GMA 35 audio panel failure, consult
the AFMS.

Get Started
XPDR
XPDR Control Panel
Transponder controls are accessible via the XPDR key.
This key is unavailable when the control panel is active.
4
2
1 Squawk Code Entry Field 3 XPDR Mode Selection Keys
2 Squawk Code Entry Keys 4 VFR Key
The XPDR key becomes

available when you:
• Enter a squawk code
• Open the XPDR menu
• View a message
• Select the Mode key
• Leave the control panel

Get Started
XPDR Setup
Tap Menu to access the transponder setup
XPDR Menu
options. From here you can:
Data Field
• Change the display of data
PRESS ALT
FLT ID • Enable 1090 ES ADS-B Out
ADS‐B Out functionality (if configured)
Flight ID • Assign a unique flight ID
Specify flight ID
(if configurable)
Enable ADS-B Out Transmissions

Tapping ADS-B Out allows the transmission of ADS-B
Out messages and position information.
Assign a Flight ID
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
If the flight ID is editable, tap Flight ID

and assign a unique identifier.
Flight IDs are alphanumeric (upper-case only) and have an eight character limit.
The active flight ID displays by default.

Get Started
XPDR Modes
Tapping Mode opens a menu of the available transponder modes. Options include
Standby, On, and Altitude Reporting.
MODE OPTIONS
• Transponder does not reply to interrogations or transmit
ADS-B Out
Standby • Bluetooth wireless functions remain operational
• Unit continues to receive ADS-B In information, but is
not a TIS-B participant
• Transponder replies to interrogations. Replies do not
include pressure altitude
• Reply (R) symbol on the display indicates the
On
transponder is responding
• Transmitted ADS-B Out does not include pressure
altitude
• Transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations
Altitude
• Reply (R) symbol indicates the transponder is
Reporting
responding
• Transmitted ADS-B Out includes pressure altitude
During Altitude Reporting mode, all aircraft air/ground state transmissions are
handled via the transponder and require no pilot action. Always use this mode while
in the air and on the ground, unless otherwise requested by ATC.

Get Started
Squawk Code Keys

SPECIAL SQUAWK CODES Eight squawk code entry keys (0 – 7)
provide access to all ATCRBS codes.
1200 Default VFR code (USA) Tapping one of these keys begins
7500 Hijacking the code selection sequence.
7600 Loss of communications Use the Backspace key or outer
control knob to move the cursor.
7700 Emergency
Digits that are not yet entered appear as underscores.

Activate the new code by tapping Enter. To cancel the
code entry and exit the page, tap Cancel.
Active squawk codes remain in use until a new code is

entered.
VFR
Tapping this key once sets the squawk code to the
preprogrammed VFR code.
This code is factory set to 1200, but may be changed
during configuration.
XPDR Key
Active Transponder Tapping the XPDR key activates
Transponder Mode (On)
the IDENT function for 18 seconds.
This signal distinguishes the
transponder from others on the air
traffic controller’s screen.
Tapping this key when another
Active Squawk page is active immediately opens
Code
the control panel.

Get Started
TRANSPONDER STATUS INDICATIONS

IDENT Standby Mode
• Reply active • Standby mode

• IDENT function active • Current squawk code
• No change to (inactive)
transponder code
IDENT with New Squawk Code Altitude Reporting Mode
• Reply active • Altitude reporting mode

• Transponder code • Reply active
modified • Identify function active
• VFR squawk code
(active)
Reply active
IDENT function active
Transponder in operation
Altitude Reporting
Standby
Tap to initiate the IDENT function (code unmodified)
Tap to accept modified code and initiate IDENT function

Get Started
XPDR Alert
If the transponder fails:
• Red “X” displays over the IDENT key
• XPDR control page is not available
Transponder fail annunciations are designed to be immediately recognizable.

For information regarding pilot response to a transponder failure, consult the AFMS.

Get Started
ADS-B Altitude Reporting

• GDL 88
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Display and control functionality dependent upon GDL 88 configuration
ADS-B Control Panel

ADS-B Out controls are accessible via the ADS-B key.
The location of this key varies by unit type.
When interfaced to a GDL 88 transceiver, GTN Xi allows control over some aspects of
the ADS-B Out message and provides position information to the GDL 88.
Not all installations allow pilot control of ADS-B Out transmissions.
GDL 88 Features
• Remote-mount ADS-B
transceiver
• Transmits ADS-B Out
messages to ATC and other
aircraft
• Communicates ADS-B In
data to panel-mounted
avionics for the display of For more information, consult GDL 88
traffic and weather ADS-B Transceiver Pilot's Guide.

Get Started
ADS-B Key
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Functionality dependent upon GDL 88 configuration
Transponder Depending on the configuration of your

Mode (ALT) GDL 88, tapping the ADS-B key:
• Reports GDL 88 altitude reporting
status
OR
Squawk Code • Allows on/off control of the GDL 88’s
(as reported by GDL 88) altitude reporting function
“ALT” indicates that the unit is in altitude

reporting mode. This indication corresponds
to the function status annunciation on the
control panel.
Control Panel
Annunciation
Enable Anonymous Mode

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Availability dependent upon GDL 88 configuration
During anonymous mode, the unit replaces identifying information in the ADS-B Out
message with a temporary randomized number for privacy while providing position
information. Instead of a flight ID, the unit transmits the call sign “VFR.”
Tap ADS-B > Anonymous.

The key label changes from “Off” to “Armed.”
Tapping Anonymous again toggles the mode off.

Get Started
Assign a Flight ID
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Availability dependent upon GDL 88 configuration
If the flight ID is editable, tap Flight ID and assign a

unique identifier. The key is not selectable (read-only)
when the ID is received from the GDL 88.
Flight IDs are alphanumeric (upper-case only) and have an eight character limit.
The active flight ID displays by default.
GDL 88 Alert
If the GDL 88 fails:
• Red “X” displays over the ADS-B key
• ADS-B reporting functions are not available
Failure annunciations are designed to be immediately recognizable. If a failure

occurs while the control page is active, the display automatically returns to the
previous view.
For information regarding pilot response to ADS-B failures, consult the AFMS.

Get Started
Pilot Settings
Unit customization options are accessible via the System
menu. For details about COM/NAV radio settings and
Connext Setup options, refer to the respective section.
Setup Alerts
• Set CDI scale and capture type • Set airspace & arrival alerts
• Specify nearest airport runway
criteria
• Set time format & local offset
• Select a new start-up page
• Select a keyboard type
• Enable crossfill functionality
• Access NAV radio settings Audio
(GTN 650Xi/750Xi only) • Adjust click volume
• Access COM radio settings • Select HTAWS/HTerrain
(GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi only) voice alerts1
Units Backlight
• Set the display units • Adjust display brightness
User Fields Page Shortcuts

• Select user fields 1
• Customize page shortcuts
for knob access
1
Availability dependent upon unit configuration.

Get Started
Other setup options allow you to monitor time in flight and

create custom reminder messages. These settings reside in
the system Utilities.
Flight Timers Alerts

• Set departure & trip timers • Set custom reminder
• Set a generic timer for general messages and when they
timing needs display
CDI Scale
WHERE TO FIND IT Set the scale for the course deviation indicator.
Scale values represent full scale deflection for the
Home CDI to either side.
System Options: • 0.30 NM • 1.00 NM • 2.00 NM • Auto
Setup
Scale selections are reflected in the annunciator bar.
Auto Setting Annunciation Manual Setting Annunciation

Get Started
CDI scale is set to “Auto” (default). At the default setting, the scale sets to
2.0 NM during the en route phase of flight.
Aircraft is within 31 NM of the destination airport (i.e., terminal area).
The scale linearly ramps down to 1.0 NM over a distance of 1 NM.
Aircraft is leaving the departure airport. The scale is set to 1.0 NM once the
aircraft is over 30 NM from the departure airport. It begins to gradually ramp up to
2 NM when the flight phase changes from terminal (TERM) to en route (ENR).
During GPS approach operations, the scale gradually transitions down to an angular
scale.
Aircraft is 2.0 NM before the final approach fix. Scaling tightens from 1.0 NM to
the angular full-scale deflection defined for the approach (typically 2.0º).
Selecting a lower value (0.3 NM or 1.0 NM) prevents the selection of higher scale
settings during ANY phase of flight. Example: If you select 1.0 NM, the unit uses this
setting for en route and terminal phases, and ramps down further during approach.
Horizontal Alarm Limits

Horizontal alarm limits (HAL) are used to compare against GPS position integrity.
These protection limits follow the CDI scale, unless the corresponding flight phase
requires a lower HAL. For example, the selected scale setting is 1.0 NM, but full-scale
deflection during approach still follows the approach scale setting (0.30 NM).
FLIGHT HORIZONTAL
CDI SCALE
PHASE ALARM LIMIT
Approach 0.30 NM or Auto 0.30 NM
Terminal 1.00 NM or Auto 1.00 NM
En Route 2.00 NM or Auto 2.00 NM
Oceanic Auto 2.00 NM

Get Started
ILS CDI Capture

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Automatic switching not available for aircraft equipped with a KAP 140/KFC 225
autopilot
Tapping this key sets the manner in which ILS

CDI capture occurs: automatically or manually
This function may not be available in certain
installations.
Auto Switch Manual Selection
GTN Xi automatically switches the Allows you to manually switch

external CDI from GPS to VLOC the external CDI connection
on ILS approach. using the CDI key.
Read more about ILS approaches in the Procedures section.
Startup Page
WHERE TO FIND IT Customize the default display page. This option
is available in the System Setup app.
Home
Tap Startup Page and select from the menu of
System available page options.
Setup
Page Options:
• Charts1 • Connext Weather • DALT/TAS/Winds • Default NAV2
• Emergency • FIS-B Weather • Flight Plan • Flight Timers • Fuel Planning
• Home (default) • Map • Nearest Airport • Procedure • Radar • SiriusXM
• Stormscope • Terrain • Traffic • Trip Planning • VCALC • VNAV
• Waypoint Info - Airport • Waypoint Info - VOR • Weather
1 GTN 750Xi Series only. 2 GTN 650Xi Series only.

Get Started
Keyboard Type
WHERE TO FIND IT Select a preferred keyboard type for use during
alphanumeric data entry operations. This option
Home is available in the System Setup app.
System
Setup
Tapping this key opens a menu of available

keyboard types. Options and layout vary
according to display size.
GTN Xi SERIES
KEYBOARD TYPE
650 750
Alphabetical (ABC) • •
U.S. standard (QWERTY) • •
Slider •

Get Started
Nearest Airport Runway Criteria

Specify runway criteria to determine which airports appear
on the Nearest Airport page.
WHERE TO FIND IT Customization options are accessible via the

System Setup app.
System
Setup
Nearest Airport
To avoid nuisance alerts during an approach, separate airport runway settings may
be configured for the TAWS/HTAWS alerting function. Contact your installer for
information about these settings.
Nearest airport runway criteria do not affect the best glide airport indicator. Contact
a Garmin dealer to adjust runway criteria for this specific feature.
RUNWAY SURFACE
Tap Runway Surface and then select
Runway Surface Options the runway surface type.
• Any • Hard Only Selecting “Any” allows all surface types
• Hard/Soft • Water to appear in the nearest airport list and
be considered for use by Terrain.
MINIMUM RUNWAY LENGTH

Specify a minimum runway length to:
• Exclude airports with shorter runways from the nearest airport list
• Inform the terrain function of which airports are available for use, so that
terrain alerts do not generate when landing at one of these airports
Typing “0” allows runways of any length to appear in the nearest airport list and be
considered for use by Terrain.
INCLUDE USER AIRPORTS

You can include user-defined airports in your
nearest airport search. Deselecting this key excludes
user airports from the search criteria.

Get Started
Clocks & Timers

Timers
Monitor time in flight using three available timer types.
WHERE TO FIND IT Timer settings are accessible via the Utilities

menu page. Toggle between timer types using
Home the provided display key.
Utilities
Flight Timers
Clock/Generic Timer Trip/Departure Timers
Stopwatch style counter. Measure elapsed airborne time

Count up or count down. since the last ground-to-air
Specify countdown time using transition. Set timer to start at
the preset function. unit power up or once the
aircraft is in air.
Controls: Controls:
• Direction (Up, Down) • Criteria (Power On, In Air)
• Start • Stop • Timer Preset • Reset Timer
• Reset Timer
Clock
WHERE TO FIND IT Specify the time format and local offset. Settings
are available in the System Setup app.
Home
Format options include Local 12 hour,
System Local 24 hour, and UTC.
Setup
If a 12 hour or 24 hour clock is selected:

Tap Local Offset > Specify the appropriate offset value from UTC.

Get Started
Page Shortcuts
A knob shortcut option allows you to customize up to seven
slots on the locater bar.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available shortcut options are dependent upon unit type and configuration
• You may assign each page to only one knob slot on GTN Xi; duplicating a page
shortcut in a second slot will turn off the existing shortcut slot
Tap a slot key and assign a page to that slot. Verify

shortcut operation once complete.
Slots one and nine are reserved for navigation purposes.
They are not editable.
Page Options:
Not all options may be available.
APT Airport Info NAV Default Navigation4
CHK Checklist NRST Nearest Airport5
1
CHRT Charts PROC Procedure
2 SiriusXM Weather2
CNXT Connext Weather SXM
E6B DALT/TAS/Winds TERR Terrain
EMRG Emergency TIME Flight Timers
2
FIS FIS-B Weather TRFC Traffic2
FPL Active Flight Plan TRIP Trip Planning
FUEL Fuel Planning VOR VOR Info
2 Radar1, 2
LTNG Stormscope WXR
MAP Map3 OFF Do not display shortcut
RESTORE DEFAULTS
Tapping Restore Defaults returns all slots to their
default settings.
This option resides in the setup menu.
1
GTN 750Xi Series only. 2 Dependent upon unit configuration.
3 Assigned to slot 1 by default (GTN 750Xi Series only).
4 Assigned to slot 1 by default (GTN 650Xi Series only). 5 Assigned to slot 9 by default.

Get Started
Alerts Settings
Receive alert messages when nearing your destination
and/or entering a specific airspace type.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Alert altitudes are dependent upon aircraft and airspace altitudes and the
pilot-specified altitude buffer value
Arrival Alerts
Arrival alerts generate a message when the aircraft is within a specified proximity of
the destination. Distance units are based on the System Units setting.
ENABLE AN ARRIVAL ALERT

Tap Arrival > Proximity, then enter a distance value.
Airspace Alerts
Airspace alerts generate a message and filtering of the Nearest Airspace list. They rely
on three-dimensional data (altitude, latitude, and longitude) to avoid nuisance alerts.
Control keys allow you to select which airspace

boundaries generate an alert annunciation upon entry.
Alert boundaries for controlled airspace are

Airspace Alert Options
sectorized to provide complete information on
Class B/TMA/AWY any nearby airspace.
Class C/CTA
Alert settings do not alter the depiction of
Class A/D
airspace, nor do they change Smart Airspace
Restricted
settings on Map.
MOA (Military)
Other With the exception of Altitude Buffer,
Altitude Buffer airspace alert options are on/off only.
Specify buffer
value
Airspace alerts for Prohibited airspace

cannot be disabled.

Get Started
Unit Selections
Customize the display unit settings. Tapping a parameter key
opens a menu of the available unit types.
PARAMETER SETTINGS
Altitude/Vertical • Feet (ft/fpm) • Meters (m/mps)
Speed
• Nautical Miles (NM/kt) • Statute Miles (sm/mph)
Distance/Speed
• Kilometers (km/kph)
• Gallons (gal) • Liters (lt)
Fuel • Imperial Gallons (Ig) • Pounds (lb)
• Kilograms (kg)
Magnetic • Specify number of degrees for east or west (ºE, ºW)
Variation • Available only when “User (ºU)” is the active NAV angle
• Magnetic (º) • User (ºU)
NAV Angle
• True (ºT) • External1
• LAT/LON DD.Dº • UTM
• LAT/LON DDºMM.M' • Swiss Grid
Position Format
• LAT/LON DDºMM'SS" • Irish Grid
• MGRS • British National Grid
• Inches in Mercury (in) • Millibars (mb)
Pressure
• Hectopascals (hPa)
Temperature • Celsius (ºC) • Fahrenheit (ºF)
1 Availability dependent upon configuration.
SPECIFY UNIT TYPE

1. Review the current unit selections.
2. Tap the applicable parameter key.
3. Select a unit type.

Get Started
User Selected NAV Angle

NOTE
When changing NAV angle, be aware that the DTK for an approach does not change on
the active flight plan until you reload the approach.
Selected NAV angle units are applied to all angular values.

Options:
Magnetic External
Corrects all track, course, and Synchronizes GTN Xi NAV angle

heading information to the with the local MFD. Availability is
magnetic variation computed by dependent upon configuration.
the GPS receiver.
True User
References all information to Allows you to manually set a

true north. magnetic variation value between
0º and 179º E or W.
Position Formats
The selected format is used in all locations where position information is available.
Format detail is as follows:
MGRS UTM
100 km Square Identifier Latitude Band
Grid Designator Easting Value Grid Zone Easting Value
Northing Value Northing Value

Get Started
REGIONAL POSITION FORMATS

By default, GTN Xi displays lat/lon for any positions outside the grid region.
British National Grid Irish National Grid

Grid Designator Easting Value Grid Designator Easting Value
Northing Value Northing Value
Swiss National Grid
Easting Value
Northing Value

Get Started
Click Volume
Your GTN Xi is wired for audio output. Set the click volume to
the preferred level.
Click Volume Control

Percent of Volume displays as a percentage
Max Volume of the maximum volume, with 0%
being muted and 100% being
maximum volume.
Decrease Increase
Volume Volume
HTAWS/HTerrain Voice Alert Options

• HTAWS or HTerrain alerting
Optional voice callouts may be available for units configured for HTAWS/HTerrain
alerting.
From the Home page:

Tap System > Voice Callouts > Altitude Callouts, and select the desired voice
callout(s).
Configurable Voice Callout Availability

• From 500 ft down to 100 ft above terrain in 100-foot increments when
HTAWS/HTerrain is present and GSL above terrain is used to generate callouts
(no radar altimeter necessary)
• From 50 ft down to 10 ft above terrain in 10-foot increments when a radar
altimeter is present and supplying the height above terrain to generate callouts

Get Started
Display Brightness Control

Depending on configuration, display brightness is controlled
using inputs from the built in photocell, aircraft dimmer bus,
or both.
Automatic Brightness Control
Backlight Manual Offset Dimming is limited to prevent

Intensity Level Indicator on-screen indications from
becoming unreadable. The built
in photocell automatically
controls display brightness based
on ambient light levels.
During automatic control, you
may still adjust brightness using
the manual offset controls in the
Backlight page.
The unit retains manual offset
settings over power cycles.
Decrease Increase
Backlight Backlight
Manual Brightness Control

Optionally, the unit is configurable to use an aircraft dimming bus for display
brightness control. Upon reaching minimum input level, display brightness reverts to
the photocell. This prevents the display from going black in the event of a dimmer
input failure.
Installer configured curves determine the amount of change in brightness that

occurs in response to a control adjustment.
If brightness control is not satisfactory, contact a Garmin dealer to adjust the
lighting curves.

Get Started
Scheduled Messages
Create custom reminder messages and set when they will
display. Allows one time, periodic, and event-based message
types.
WHERE TO FIND IT Active reminders appear at the top of

the scheduled message list. This list is
Home accessible via the Utilities menu page.
Utilities Examples: • “Call FBO” • “Close flight
Scheduled Messages plan” • “Switch fuel tanks”
CREATE A REMINDER MESSAGE

1. Tap Create Scheduled Message.
2. Specify the message type, content, and countdown timer value.
Message Types
TYPE DISPLAYS...
When the timer expires, or following each power cycle until
One time
message deletion.
After a specified duration of time. Countdown repeats once
Periodic
the message displays.
According to a specified date and time. Message timer not
Event
applicable.
Modifying Scheduled Messages

Once created, these messages may be modified at any time. Selecting a scheduled
message opens an options menu.
EDIT MESSAGE
This function is accessible from either the Scheduled Messages page or the system
message list.
RESET TIMER
Restarts the countdown timer.
DELETE MESSAGE
Confirming this request removes the selected message from the list.

Get Started
Crossfill
• Dual GTN or GTN and GNS
Enable the crossfilling of information between two GTN units or GTN and GNS.
Crossfill Features
• Enabling this function on one GTN automatically enables it on the other.
• Some types of data crossfill regardless of the current setting
GTN to GTN Data

When crossfilling between GTN and GTN Xi, certain annunciations (e.g., turn
anticipation) may appear different between navigators.
Alerts: System Setup:

• Alert pop-up acknowledgment • Date/Time convention
• Missed approach waypoint • Nearest airport criteria
popup acknowledgment • Units (Nav angle, Fuel,
• Altitude leg pop-up Temperature)
acknowledgment • COM channel spacing
External Sensors: • CDI Scale setting
• Synchro heading • ILS CDI Capture setting
• Transponder status and commands
Pilot Data:
• Flight Plan Catalog
• User-defined COM/NAV frequencies
• User waypoints
Includes active flight plan navigation data if you turn on the crossfill function.
If configured, a system message alerts you when the function is off (i.e., flight plans
are not crossfilling).
To enable or disable crossfilling:

Home > System > Setup > Crossfill > OK

Get Started
GTN to GNS Data

When crossfilled from GTN to GNS, duplicate waypoint names, or names exceeding
six characters in length, are shortened. A “+” sign replaces certain characters while
leaving significant characters to aid in identification (e.g., USR003 becomes US+003).
GTN to GNS GNS to GTN
Active flight plans User waypoints

Active direct to
User waypoints
To enable crossfilling:
Home > System > Setup > GNS Crossfill Settings > Auto GNS Crossfill

Get Started
Status Indications
Alert Types
The unit generates annunciations in response to various conditions that may occur.
These abbreviated messages include:
• Warnings
• Cautions
• Function and mode advisories
WARNINGS & CAUTIONS

Warnings require immediate attention. Cautions indicate the presence of an
abnormal condition that may require pilot action. A warning may follow a caution if
no attempt is made to correct the condition (e.g., altering the aircraft’s path to avoid
the alerted terrain or obstacle).
FUNCTION & MODE ADVISORIES

Advisories provide status and operating information.
System advisories. These display on a dedicated message list. Depending on the
number of advisories, this list may be scrollable.
Function or mode specific advisories. These appear as unobstructed
annunciations in the annunciator bar.
For a complete list of all system-related advisories, refer to section 8.

Get Started
Alert Annunciations
Alert annunciations are abbreviated messages that indicate an alerted function or
mode. The color of the annunciation depends on the alert type.
• Warnings display in white text on red
ALERT COLORS
background
WARNING • Cautions display in black text on amber
CAUTION background
ADVISORY • Function or mode specific advisories
display in black text on white background
When an alert is triggered, the annunciation flashes by alternating text and

background colors. It turns solid after five seconds. All annunciations remain active
(solid) until the condition is resolved or no longer a threat.
ANNUNCIATION LOCATION
Alerts and informational advisories annunciate along the bottom of the screen.
Alerts, Inhibits, Flight GPS Signal CDI Procedures Waypoint

& Test Mode Phase & Demo Source & COM/NAV
Advisories Mode Advisories
Annunciator Bar
Pop-up Alerts
A pop-up window may display if a warning or caution relating to terrain or traffic
occurs. These pop-ups only appear if the alerted function’s associated page is not
active.
For information on ways to coordinate pop-up alerts on a multiple GTN Xi or

GTN Xi/GDU TXi system, read Pop-up Alert Display Setting.

Get Started
Each pop-up alert provides:

Pop-up Alert Priority
• Threat indication
In the event of simultaneous alerts,
• Alert annunciation
pop-up windows display in the
following order: • Alert inhibit or mute option
1. Terrain alerts depending on threat and system
configuration
2. Traffic alerts
• Control for closing the pop-up
window
• Direct access to the associated page
GTN 750Xi Series
3 4
GTN 650Xi Series
2
5
3 4
Terrain Pop-up Alert Layout
1 Enlarged Page View 4 Go to Terrain Page Key
2 Threat Indication 5 Alert Inhibit Key
3 Close Pop-up Window Key

Get Started
GTN 750Xi Series
3 4
GTN 650Xi Series
1 4
5 3
Traffic Pop-up Alert Layout
1 Enlarged Page View 4 Go to Traffic Page Key
2 Threat Indication 5 Mute Alert Key1
3 Close Pop-up Window Key
To open the indicated page, tap Go to <Page>.

To acknowledge the alert and return to previous page view, tap Close.
For information about the terrain alert inhibit function, read Alert Inhibit in
section 5. For information about the traffic alert mute function, read Aural Alerts
in this section.
1 ADS-B traffic only.

Get Started
POP-UP ALERT DISPLAY SETTING

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Pop-up alert display setting available only with GTN Xi v20.40 and later
Depending on configuration, pop-up alerts may appear on one pilot display and one
copilot display (if present).1 Display priority is based on the available Garmin LRUs in
the cockpit.
1. Pilot/copilot TXi MFD
2. Center TXi MFD
3. Pilot/copilot GTN Xi2
Closing a pop-up window on one display closes it on all configured LRUs.
You may assign the GTN Xi position (pilot/copilot) for

displaying pop-up alerts when the alerted function's
associated page is not active.
In dual GTN Xi systems with no TXi MFD:

• Selecting the same Pop-up Priority setting on each GTN Xi unit allows the
pop-up alert to display only on GTN Xi 1
• Selecting a different Pop-up Priority setting on each GTN Xi allows the
pop-up alert to display on both GTN Xi units
In dual GTN Xi systems with TXi MFD, the Pop-up Priority setting follows the same
logic except that the pop-up alert displays on the highest priority LRU.
Pilot is the default Pop-up Priority setting.
To change the pop-up alert display setting:

Home > System > Alerts, and select the preferred LRU position.
1
Available only with TXi software v3.60 and later. 2 Defined by the Pop-up Priority setting.

Get Started
Aural Alerts
Some alerts are accompanied by an aural voice message. Voice gender is configured
during installation. To determine which alerts provide aural indications, refer to the
applicable alerts table(s) in section 5.
MUTE ALERT
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available only with GTX 345 and ADS-B software v3.20 and later
Tapping Mute Alert silences the active traffic alert. This

key is available on the traffic alert pop-up.
The mute alert function is applicable only to the active
aural alert. It does not mute future alerts.

Get Started
System Status
View information specific to the unit and its software.
Refer here when contacting customer service.
SYSTEM INFO DATABASE INFO

• Serial number Select the appropriate tab to view
• System ID information about active and standby
• Main software version databases and the synchronization
status of databases across all capable
• GPS/WAAS software version Garmin avionics.
• COM board software version Read more about database info tabs
(GTN 635Xi, 650Xi, 750Xi only) in the Databases section.
• NAV board software version
(GTN 650Xi, 750Xi)

Get Started
GPS Status
Monitor GPS receiver performance, establish a baseline for
normal system operation, and troubleshoot weak or missing
signal issues.
This page provides a visual reference of GPS receiver functions, including:

• Current satellite coverage • GPS solution and receiver status
• Phase of flight • Position accuracy
• Present position
(latitude and longitude)
SKY VIEW DISPLAY

• Depicts satellites currently in view as well as their
respective positions
• Outer circle represents the horizon
(with north at the top of the circle)
• Inner circle represents 45° above the horizon
• Center point shows the position directly overhead

Get Started
SIGNAL STRENGTH INDICATIONS

A graph shows GPS signal strength for
Satellite SVIDs
up to 15 satellites. As the GPS receiver
Each bar is labeled with the SVID locks onto satellites, a signal strength
of the corresponding satellite. bar appears for each satellite in view.
Numbers vary according to Graph symbols depict the progress of
satellite type. satellite acquisition. Some data may not
• GPS: 1 to 31 display until the unit has acquired
• SBAS: 120 to 138 enough satellites for a fix.
SYMBOL CONDITION
Not present Receiver is searching for the indicated satellites.
Gray bar, empty Satellite located.
Gray bar, solid Satellite located, receiver is collecting data.
Yellow bar, solid Satellite located, but FDE excludes it for being a faulty
satellite.
Cyan bar, solid Data collected, but receiver is not using satellite in the
position solution.
Green bar, solid Data collected, satellite in use in the current position
solution.
D (inside bar) Differential corrections are in use (e.g., WAAS).
If the unit has not been in operation for more than six months, acquiring satellite
data to establish almanac and satellite orbit information may take 5 to 10 minutes.

Get Started
POSITION ACCURACY FIELDS

Information fields indicate the
LABEL POSITION DATA accuracy of the position fix.
EPU Estimated Position Uncertainty HFOM and VFOM values
HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision represent 95% confidence
levels in horizontal and vertical
HFOM Horizontal Figure of Merit
accuracy.
VFOM Vertical Figure of Merit Lower values mean higher
EPU is the horizontal position error estimated by the accuracy. Higher values are the
fault detection and exclusion (FDE) algorithm, in feet least accurate.
or meters.
NOTE
Under FAR parts 91, 121, 125, and 135, the FDE availability prediction program must be
used prior to all oceanic or remote area flights using GTN Xi as a primary means of
navigation.
Circle of Uncertainty
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available only when the aircraft is on ground
• Displays only on Map
Circle of
Uncertainty
• Depicts area surrounding the ownship when GPS
cannot accurately determine aircraft location
• Expands as GPS horizontal accuracy degrades
• Shrinks as accuracy improves
• Translucent with minor shading so as not to
obstruct other features

Get Started
SBAS Providers
NOTE
Operating with SBAS active outside of the service area may cause elevated EPU values to
display on the status page. Regardless of the EPU value displayed, the LOI annunciation
is the controlling indication for determining the integrity of the GPS navigation solution.
SBAS supports wide area or regional augmentation through the

use of additional satellite broadcast messages.
Tap this key and select from the list of providers.
PROVIDER SERVICE AREAS

EGNOS Most of Europe and parts of North Africa.
GAGAN India only.
MSAS Japan only.
WAAS Alaska, Canada, the 48 contiguous states,

and most of Central America.
GPS Status Annunciations

Once the GPS receiver determines the aircraft’s position, the unit displays position,
altitude, track, and ground speed data. GPS status annunciates under the following
conditions.
ANNUNCIATION CONDITION
GPS receiver uses last known position and satellite orbital
Acquiring data (collected continuously from satellites) to determine
which satellites should be in view.
3D navigation mode. GPS receiver computes altitude using
3D Nav
satellite data.
3D navigation mode. Differential corrections from SBAS
3D Diff Nav
provider are in use.
Satellite coverage is insufficient to pass built-in integrity
LOI
monitoring tests.

Get Started
GPS Alerts
The following alert conditions can affect GPS accuracy.
INDICATIONS FAULT TYPE CONDITION

Integrity of the GPS position does
not meet the requirements for the
Yellow “LOI”
Loss of Integrity current phase of flight. Occurs
annunciation.
before the final approach fix
(if an approach is active).
Aircraft is after the final approach
fix and GPS integrity does not meet
the active approach requirements.
Insufficient number of satellites
supporting aircraft position (i.e.,
Unit invalidates active more than 5 seconds pass without
course guidance. adequate satellites to compute a
Loss of Navigation
Annunciation is position).
specific to cause.
GPS sensor detects an excessive
position error or failure that cannot
be excluded within the time to
alert.
On-board hardware failure.
Yellow “No GPS
Position”
Unit cannot determine a GPS
annunciation. Loss of Position
position solution.
Ownship icon not
present
For information about managing limited navigation features, read Dead Reckoning
in section 3.

Get Started
LRU Status
Devices that interface to the system via Ethernet display
product information and connection status on the
External LRUs list.
The device is configured and The device is not available and

communicating properly. is not configured or it is not
communicating properly.
Some interfaced equipment

provide controls for product
registration, enablement, or
viewing detailed status
information.
To access these features,
tap More Info.

Get Started
Logs
The data logging function is capable of storing approximately
100 hours of flight data in the unit’s internal memory. This
information is available for export to an SD card for later
analysis.
For external data logging:
• SD card
For data streaming:
• A flyGarmin user account
• Flight Stream 510 wireless transceiver for flight data streaming
• Flight Stream 510 and GDU TXi EIS for engine data streaming
For database system ID logging:
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• External data logging stops when the SD card is full
Flight Data Log Functions

• Records log files automatically while the unit is powered up, including various
parameters related to aircraft flight instruments
• Overwrites oldest file when the internal log reaches capacity
• Exports to the “logs” folder on the SD card
• Streams logged flight and engine data to Garmin Pilot
WAAS Diagnostic Log Functions
• Records log files automatically while the unit is powered up
• Overwrites oldest file when the internal log reaches capacity
• Exports to the “logs” folder on the SD card
Database System ID Log Functions
• Records System IDs for installed databases
• Exports to the root directory of the SD card

Get Started
Data Logging at a Glance

Upon power up, GTN Xi begins logging flight data automatically, storing the data in
its internal memory.
DATA LOGGING WITH FLIGHT STREAM 510

To automatically upload data to flyGarmin.com, install Flight Stream into GTN Xi
or GDU TXi.
GDU TXi
GTN Xi
If Flight Stream is present in GDU TXi:

• GDU TXi streams data to Garmin Pilot via Flight Stream1
If Flight Stream is present in GTN Xi:

• GDU TXi transfers logs to GTN Xi, which then streams the data to
Garmin Pilot via Flight Stream1
• GTN Xi is the preferred location for Flight Stream installation
1
Pilot setup required.

Get Started
EXPORTING DATA TO AN SD CARD

To export data logs to an SD card, insert the card into GTN Xi.
If an SD card is present in
GTN Xi:
Use the export function to
write GTN Xi data to the
SD card.
What happens if there’s a

power interruption?
Data logging stops if power is lost.
All data recorded up to that point
remains stored in the internal
memory. Data is not recorded for
the duration of the outage. When
GTN Xi reboots, data logging
automatically resumes with a new Read more about this method in
log file. Exporting Data Logs to an SD Card.

Get Started
File Naming Conventions

Log file names provide a useful reference to aid data analysis. They include:
• Log start date and time
• Identifier of the nearest waypoint at the indicated start time
log_YYMMDD_HHMMSS_WPT.csv
Year Hour Nearest Waypoint

Month Minute Identifier
Day Second (at start of log)
Files with the name “log_000101_0000XX_____.csv” do not contain a valid date

and time stamp. These logs may include data recorded during installation.

Get Started
Exporting Data Logs to an SD Card

NOTE
Do not eject the SD card while the export function is in progress. Wait until the selected
log key is available before ejecting the card.
WHERE TO FIND IT Export a flight data log to an SD card for later analysis.
Home 1. Insert an SD card.

2. Tap Utilities > Logs.
Utilities
3. Select WAAS Diagnostic Log or
Logs
Flight Data Log.
If no log files are present, these keys are not available.
During export, the selected log key is

unavailable (gray). It becomes available once
export is complete.
The key label changes to indicate
export in progress.
Once the files are exported onto an

What if I forget to insert my
SD card, you may transfer the log files
SD card before flight?
to your personal logbook on
Internal flight data logging occurs flyGarmin.com.
regardless of whether an SD card
is present. After your flight, you
may insert a card and download
log files using the
Flight Data Log command.
With the aircraft safely on ground:
1. Power off unit.
2. Insert card.
3. Power on unit.
Duration varies depending on the
4. Tap Utilities > Logs > number of files present. For lengthy
Flight Data Log. transfers, it may be necessary to run
Wait for the export to complete the engine or operate on ground
before ejecting the SD card. power until the export is complete.

Get Started
TRANSFER SD CARD DATA TO YOUR ONLINE LOGBOOK

The Logbook tab on flyGarmin.com provides functions for creating and viewing
multiple logbook entries.
flyGarmin Navigation Tabs
To create a logbook:
1. Sign in to your flyGarmin.com account.
2. Select Logbook > Setup.
3. Select Add Aircraft Type.
4. Provide all necessary aircraft type details, then select Save Aircraft Type.
5. Provide all necessary settings and pilot information, then select Save Settings.
To upload flight logs to your logbook:

1. Select Logbook > Entries > Upload Flight Logs.
2. Select and upload log files according to the onscreen instructions.

Get Started
Data Logging with Flight Stream 510

The unit automatically streams logged flight and engine data to
Garmin Pilot when Flight Stream 510 is present and paired to a
supported phone or tablet.
Data logs upload to your

flyGarmin user account
when your phone or tablet
connects to the Internet.
flyGarmin.com
Logged flight and Your portable device

engine data stream downloads the data
to Garmin Pilot. Garmin Pilot App upon connecting to
Flight Stream 510.
This includes any

previous flights not
already downloaded.
What happens if I forget to bring my tablet on the flight?

No need to worry. During flight, GTN Xi records log data to the internal storage. The
next time you fly with your tablet, the data will stream to Garmin Pilot. This includes
all previously recorded flights. The device downloads the data upon connecting to
Flight Stream 510.

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

3 Navigation
MAP...............................................................................................................................3-4
CHARTS.................................................................................................................... 3-48
WAYPOINTS........................................................................................................... 3-54
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN....................................................................................... 3-75
DIRECT TO........................................................................................................... 3-116
PROCEDURES.................................................................................................... 3-124
Navigation
NAVIGATION
APPS & FUNCTIONS
Selections vary based on features and optional equipment installed with

Garmin avionics.
Map Charts
• Display moving map • View terminal procedures &
• Adjust detail level airport surface diagrams
• Customize map overlay
features
• Edit user fields
• Graphically edit a flight plan
• Select a CDI source
(GTN 750Xi only)
Waypoint Info Nearest

• Search waypoints • View nearest waypoints,
• Create & store user waypoints airspaces, or facilities

Navigation
Flight Plan Procedures

• Create & edit a flight plan • Load & activate procedures
• View active leg status • Activate a missed approach
• Catalog & manage saved
flight plans
• Specify a parallel course
offset
• Import a flight plan
GTN 650Xi SERIES
Direct To Default NAV

• Set a direct course to any • Configure user fields
waypoint • Enable OBS mode
• Generate a custom hold • Select a CDI source
• Generate a search-and-rescue (GTN 650Xi only)
pattern

Navigation
Map
To increase situational awareness, Map depicts the aircraft’s
current position relative to land, aeronautical, weather, and
traffic information.
• Active GPS source (aircraft position symbol)
• Active weather subscription (Connext & SiriusXM only)
• FIS-B and GDL 88 or GTX 345 (FIS-B Weather)
• GDL 69/69A SiriusXM receiver (SiriusXM Weather)
• GDL 69, GDL 88, GTX 345, or GSR 56, with appropriate weather service subscription
(NEXRAD/PRECIP overlay)
• GSR 56 Iridium satellite transceiver (Connext Weather)
• WX-series Stormscope receiver (Stormscope lightning data)
• Valid heading source (Radar, Stormscope & Traffic)
• Matching chart databases (dual GTN/crossfill configurations only)
• Traffic system
GTN 750Xi Series only:
• GWX 68/70/75/80 or ARINC 708 connected radar (airborne weather radar overlay)
• Valid charts database with effective database cycle; aircraft to be airborne (ChartView,
FliteCharts)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• NEXRAD/PRECIP, Radar, and Terrain overlay functions are mutually exclusive; enabling
one automatically disables the other
• Radar, Stormscope, and Traffic overlays do not display if user navigation angles are
active

Navigation
6 5
7
8
3
2
1
11
9 10
Default Map Features
Ownship Icon
1
Depicts current aircraft position and orientation.
Track Vector
2
Current ground track indication.
Basemap
3
Presents a graphical depiction of land and water data.
User Field
4
Customizable data field appearing in each corner of the map.
NAV Range Ring

5 Displays current direction of travel on a rotating compass.
Orientation: Magnetic north
Map Range Indicator

6 Displays current map range in the upper left quadrant of the range ring
(i.e., the distance from the aircraft to the range ring).
North Indicator
7
Indicates True north.

Navigation
Map Orientation Label

8
Reflects the selected map orientation.
Map Overlay Icons

9 Indicates status of overlays at the current map range.
Includes: obstacles, power lines, precipitation, terrain, and traffic
Zoom Scale
10
Displays the current magnification level.
CDI & GPS Nav Status Indicator

Lower bar presents a sliding lateral deviation indicator. Upper bar
11
presents from, to, and next waypoints and active leg status
annunciations.
FEATURE LABELS
To maintain readability, map feature labels remain uniform at all zoom levels.
TRAFFIC UNITS
System Units selections do not affect the display of traffic on Map.
LAND AND WATER DEPICTIONS

Land and water data are for general reference only. Data accuracy is not suitable for
use as a primary navigation source. The information is intended to supplement and
not replace official government charts and notices.

Navigation
DATA DRAWING ORDER

The electronic map draws data in order of priority, from highest (1) to lowest (36),
with higher priority features drawn atop those of lower priority.
LEVEL FEATURE LEVEL FEATURE
1 Traffic 19 County Warning

2 Ownship 20 PIREPs
3 Flight Plan 21 AIREPs
4 TAWS Alerts 22 City Forecast
1
5 Weather Radar 23 Surface Analysis
1
6 Charts 24 Airspace
7 Stormscope 25 Waypoints
8 Obstacles 26 Airways
9 Fuel Range Ring 27 Turbulence
10 TFRs 28 Icing Potential
11 Freezing Levels 29 Echo Tops
12 Cell Movement 30 NEXRAD
13 Lightning 31 Cloud Tops
14 METARs 32 IR Satellite
15 Winds Aloft 33 SafeTaxi
16 SIGMETs 34 Terrain
17 AIRMETs 35 Basemap
18 Cyclone Warning 36 Topo
1
GTN 750Xi Series only.

Navigation
Map Setup
Overlay data controls reside in the
Map Setup Tabs Map menu. Selections are organized
Map into six groups.
Aviation Changes to an overlay setting take effect
Airspace immediately.
Land
Traffic
Weather
RESTORE DEFAULTS
Map Setup Menu
Located in the bottom of each list, this
Orientation key restores all original factory settings
North Up for the active group tab.
Track Up
Heading Up
North Up Above
Set range
Visual APPR Selector
Set selector range
Auto Zoom 1
Auto Zoom Min
Set range
Auto Zoom Max
Set range
Track Vector Length
Set length
Altitude Constraints
Select label display
Glide Range Ring Shared Map Settings
Select ring type Changes to the following map settings
NAV Range Ring also take effect on the configured
Fuel Range Ring 1 datalink weather app(s). You may adjust
Fuel Reserve Time 2 these settings from the appropriate
Set duration Map Setup tab.
TOPO Scale 1 • North Up Above range setting
Point Obstacle Range (Map tab)
Set display range • Runway Extensions and waypoint
HOT Line Range display range settings (Aviation tab)
Set display range • Road Detail, City Detail,
Chart Color Scheme State/Province Names, and
Selected ALT Range Arc 1 River/Lake Detail (Land tab)
Restore Defaults
1
On/off functionality only. 2 Dependent upon Fuel Range Ring selection.

Navigation
Map Display Orientation

Set the orientation of the map display.
Tap Menu > Map Setup > Orientation, and select from the following options.
North Up Track Up Heading Up
Orients map to True Orients map to current Orients map to current

north aircraft GPS track aircraft heading
(requires heading data
source interface)
Map orientation label changes to reflect the selected orientation.
Ownship Icon
Position & Orientation
• The tip represents actual
aircraft location
• Symbol type is dependent
upon configuration North Up is useful when zoomed out to
• This feature is absent if a GPS view the entire route or a frontal system
source is not available on a NEXRAD display.
North Up Above
Sets the range at which map orientation changes to North Up.
Using the North Up Above feature causes the screen to switch at certain zoom
levels. This is useful as a shortcut to quickly increase situational awareness.

Navigation
Visual Approach
Sets the distance from the
destination airport at which the
Visual Approach selector key
becomes active.
Visual Approach
Key

Navigation
Auto Zoom
Automatically adjusts Map to display the next waypoint in flight plan at the closest
possible map range.
Automatic functionality is
overridden during manual zoom
interactions. It resumes when:
• Another waypoint is in
sequence
• Aircraft transitions from on
ground to airborne
• Auto zoom range matches
manual override range
Auto zoom presents SafeTaxi data while aircraft is on

ground.
Local Auto Zoom

(Rotorcraft Only)
Rotorcraft use a local auto zoom
function where auto zoom will
remain at the 1500 ft zoom scale
until the helicopter is above Set minimum and maximum values to
400 ft GSL or 40 kts. best meet operational needs.

Navigation
Track Vector
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Indication absent when aircraft velocity is < 30 kt
Indicates the current ground track.

Arrow tip represents aircraft
position at the specified time
interval (if the aircraft maintains
current ground track during that
time).
Track vector length options display as a dashed line and arrow extending from the
aircraft icon, showing current track and distance the aircraft will travel in the
selected time.
If the track vector is placed over a point on the map, and no data is entered into the
system, the unit indicates a wind-corrected GPS track to that point. This is useful for
intercepting airways and radials, making small but positive lateral corrections during
approaches, and in setting up for arrivals in the terminal area.
Displays altitude constraint labels
within the flight plan.
The active constraint is the
altitude to which VNAV is
currently providing guidance.

Navigation
Glide Range Ring

FIXED WING AIRCRAFT ONLY
• For best glide performance, the aircraft must be configured in accordance with
AFM/POH guidance
OPTIONAL COMPONENTS
• Glide Range Ring wind compensation requires datalink winds or a compatible PFD
Identifies map region and

features within gliding distance. A
cyan border indicates where the
projected glide descent reaches
50 ft above terrain.
The Glide Range Ring is an

estimate based on the best glide
speed and glide ratio published for
the aircraft. For more information,
consult the AFM/POH.
This overlay receives wind information from the ADAHRS (if present). It does not require an ADAHRS
unit for operation.
The Glide Range Ring depicts the

Glide Range Ring Options estimated glide range down to
Off 50 ft AGL. It does not show
beyond 50 ft AGL where the
Ring Only
aircraft reaches the ground.
Gli de Only
Data updates occur approximately
Ring and Gli de every 5 seconds.

Navigation
Ring Only Ring and Glide
Glide Range Best Glide

Ring Airport Indicator
Enable Glide Range Ring to stay aware of all airports within gliding distance.
This is extremely helpful should you experience engine failure.
Glide Only Best Glide Airport Indicator

Cyan arrows point toward the best
glide airport at any given time.
Best glide airport selection is based
on distance from current location,
runway length, and weather (if
available). Airports beyond the
range ring are not considered for
routing.
To enable, tap Glide Range Ring and select

Ring and Glide or Glide Only.

Navigation
“No Wind Data” Indicator

This indication appears when FMS
winds and datalink winds aloft are
either unavailable or invalid.
The Glide Range Ring does not
adjust to account for current winds
when the indicator is present.

Navigation
NEAREST AIRPORT GLIDE INDICATIONS

Airports with the “Glide” designation are within line-of-sight of the aircraft and
reachable on glide.
The calculated
best glide
airports appear
Best Glide at the top of
Airports
the list.
An icon denotes which airports are reachable

on glide. Select the identifier to view airport
information, including available runways.
Any airports within glide range

that do not meet the pilot-specified
nearest airport runway criteria may
also appear in the list. GTN Xi
highlights the offending criteria
setting (runway length or surface
type) in the APPR/RWY column.
Surface type and runway length indications on

GTN 650Xi.
A message appears at the top

of the list when no airports are
within glide range.
Specify nearest airport runway criteria in the System Setup app. For more about
these settings, read Nearest Airport Runway Criteria in section 2.

Navigation
NAV Range Ring

Provides a more precise indication of distance between the aircraft and map objects.
On Setting Enhanced Setting
Fuel Range Ring

• A Garmin EIS
• Third-party fuel systems
• Estimates the remaining

range at the current fuel
consumption rate and
ground speed.
• Calculations are based on
the pilot-specified fuel
quantity in the fuel
computer
• Dashed green circle
indicates selected range to
reserve fuel
Range to Empty Range to Reserve
Fuel • Solid yellow circle indicates
total endurance range

Navigation
TOPO Scale
Displays a topographical
elevation scale. To remove the
scale, toggle TOPO Scale off.
Scale Location
Chart Color Scheme

GTN 750Xi SERIES
Toggles chart color scheme between day and night modes.
Day Night

Navigation
Selected Altitude Range Arc

• A Garmin Display Unit
Represents location at which the

aircraft is expected to reach
selected altitude.

Navigation
Aviation Selections
Setup options allow you to customize the
Aviation Menu display of aeronautical information.
Heliports • Enable heliports and TFRs
SafeTaxi Diagrams • Specify airway types and range values
Runway Extensions
Intersection Range • Customize the display of SafeTaxi and
NDB Range waypoint data
VOR Range • Display runway extensions for a
VRP Range destination airport
User Waypoint
Range With the exception of Heliports and TFRs,
Airway Range all Aviation tab selections provide on/off
TFR and range setting options.
Restore Defaults
The runway feature extends the runway’s centerline out 5 NM from the runway
threshold. This is useful when setting up for a visual approach, especially at airports
with parallel runways or low visibility.

Navigation
AVIATION DATA SYMBOLS

Non-towered, Non-towered,
non-serviced airport1 serviced airport1
Towered, Towered,
non-serviced airport1 serviced airport1
Soft surface, Soft surface,

non-serviced airport serviced airport
Restricted (private) airport Unknown airport
Heliport ILS/DME or DME only
Intersection LOM
NDB TACAN
VOR VOR/DME
VORTAC VRP
User airport User waypoint
Runway extension ATK
Fly-over waypoint2
1
Symbol depicts orientation of longest runway.
2 Available with GTN Xi software v20.30 and later.

Navigation
SafeTaxi
SafeTaxi provides greater map
detail and higher image
resolution at lower zoom levels.
Zoomed Out Feature labels denote:
• Runways
• Taxiways
• Airport landmarks
Zoomed In
SafeTaxi Features
• Airport diagram overlay that includes hot spot information
• Aircraft position relative to taxiways, runways, and airport landmarks
• Selectable range options
SAFETAXI DATA SYMBOLS
Runway Taxiway
Helipad Construction Area
Airport Beacon Unpaved Parking

Navigation
HOT SPOTS
SafeTaxi hot spots identify
locations on an airport surface
where positional confusion or
runway incursions are likely to
occur. These known problem
areas require heightened
attention by pilots.
Selecting the border of a hot

spot displays a brief summary of
the indicated hazard and an
information key.
Tapping this key provides

additional location information.
Numbering corresponds to a list
on the airport diagram.
The following airport features may be

deemed hot spots by aviation
authorities.
• Intersecting taxiways and runways
• Complex ramp areas
• Directional limitations
• Limited wing-tip clearance
• Overflight risk

Navigation
CONSTRUCTION SPOTS
There are no expanded detail
keys or notes associated with
construction areas.
Construction Area Border
Airspace Selections
Filter airspace data according to
Airspace Menu altitude. The control for enabling
smart airspace functionality also
Airspace Label Range
resides here.
Smart Airspace
Show Airspaces With the exception of Smart
Select filter Airspace, all Airspace tab selections
Class B/TMA/AWY Range provide on/off and range setting
Class C/CTA Range options.
Class A/D Range
Restricted Range
MOA (Military) Range
Other Range
Restore Defaults

Navigation
Smart Airspace
Garmin’s Smart Airspace feature automatically de-emphasizes non-pertinent airspace
away from the aircraft’s current altitude.
Smart Airspace off When an airspace’s vertical proximity

to the aircraft is >1,000 ft:
• Its boundary becomes
transparent
• All associated altitude labels
turn gray
This range increases linearly to
2,000 ft as the aircraft ascends
to 10,000 ft.
Smart Airspace on
SMART AIRSPACE CRITERIA
AIRSPACE
AIRCRAFT
PROXIMITY TO
ALTITUDE
AIRCRAFT1
Sea level >1,000 ft
>10,000 ft 2,000 ft
1 Vertical distance above and below aircraft
altitude.
Non-pertinent
Airspace
AIRSPACE DATA SYMBOLS

Class B Altitude
Class C/CTA
Label (ceiling/floor)
Class C Altitude
Class D
Label (ceiling/floor)
Class D Altitude
Restricted/Prohibited
Label (ceiling only)
TFR MIL
Class B/TMA Other/ADIZ

Navigation
Land Selections
Filter the display of land features according
Land Menu
to detail level.
Road Detail With the exception of State Province Names,
City Detail all Land tab selections provide detail setting
State/Province Names options.
River/Lake Detail
Restore Defaults
LAND DATA SYMBOLS
Railroad National Highway
River/Lake Freeway
State/Province Border Small City
Local Road Medium City
Local Highway Large City

Navigation
Traffic & Weather Selections

TRAFFIC
Filter traffic data according to type.
Traffic Menu
Other selections include on/off and
Traffic Range range setting options.
Traffic Type
All Traffic
Alerts & Advisories
Alerts Only
WEATHER
Setup options are available for all
Datalink Weather Menu active weather services.
Weather Source • Specify a datalink weather
SiriusXM source
Cell Movement • Toggle individual weather
METAR products on/off
Echo Tops
Lightning
Cloud Tops
FIS‐B
METAR
Lightning
Connext
METAR
Lightning
IR Satellite
Connext
Settings

Navigation
Map Interactions
Basic Interactions
Typical map interactions include zoom, pan, and object selection.
PAN & ZOOM

Panning allows movement of the map in any direction without change to the current
zoom setting. Zooming adjusts the current magnification level between pre-defined
range parameters.
Before flight, consider which map scales are best for achieving the desired level of
detail and map information.
Generally, use smaller map scales in and around terminal areas and whenever
precise navigation is required (e.g., airway or radial intercepts).
During cruise flight, increase the map scale to better balance navigation, situational
awareness, and decision making.
OBJECT SELECTION
Tapping any object or location on the map displays a map pointer and an information
banner.
MAP POINTER
This symbol indicates point of contact on the map. A gray circle
highlights any selected waypoint or obstacle.

Navigation
MAP INFO
Available information and controls are dependent upon object or location type and
proximity to other objects.
Selecting an airport icon displays the airport’s highest field elevation. A map pointer
icon corresponds with the touch point on the map.
Selected Airport
An information page access key
displays when you select a
waypoint, airspace, airport,
airport surface hot spot, or TFR.
DATA FIELDS CONTROLS

• Pan mode annunciation • Map Pointer/Create Waypoint
• Bearing and distance from current • Graphical Edit
aircraft position to map pointer • Next (for stacked objects)
• Location elevation • Associated information page
• Maximum altitude AGL and MSL access key (if applicable)
for obstacles
STACKED OBJECTS
To move the selector through each object in proximity of the
map pointer, select an object and tap Next.
Overlapping objects may

be difficult to identify at
a given zoom level.
Stack
Active
Selection

Navigation
AIRSPACE INFO
Selected
Airspace
When selected, active airspace
boundaries change color.
Tapping Airspace Info opens
the associated information page.
Data fields display information

specific to the selected airspace.
GTN 650Xi SERIES
Tapping Preview displays the
airspace boundary and a 2D map
of the surrounding area.
DATA FIELDS CONTROLS

• Airspace name and type icon • Frequencies: View a list of all
• ATC entity responsible for the related radio frequencies
airspace, if applicable
• Floor and ceiling altitudes
• Proximity to airspace
• Airspace boundary on a 2D map

Navigation
Graphical Flight Plan Editing

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Parallel track offsets do not apply to the temporary flight plan
Graphical editing allows quick changes to the active flight

plan from the map display.
Map provides identifier keys for

selecting waypoints that are
stacked or in close proximity.
If the displayed options are not
preferred, tap away or select
Cancel.
TEMPORARY FLIGHT PLAN BANNER

An information banner displays waypoint selections made during graphical edit
mode. All selections become active once you tap Done.
Lists up to five waypoint identifiers
Ellipse indicates additional waypoints
Initial waypoint in flight plan always appears first
Tapping Undo reverses the last edit. You may undo up to nine
of the most recent actions.
On the map, dragging and releasing the leg away from any
waypoints removes it from the temporary flight plan.
To exit edit mode without saving changes, tap Cancel.

Navigation
ADD WAYPOINT TO AN EXISTING LEG
Existing Leg
You can edit, add, or omit flight

plan legs by tapping or dragging
your finger directly on the map.
Selected Waypoint
1. Tap any location on the
map.
2. Tap Graphical Edit.

Navigation
3. Tap and drag the leg to a

new waypoint or airway,
then release.
New Route
The temporary flight plan adjusts
to show the new route.
If no other edits are necessary,
tap Done.
The new waypoint now appears

in the active flight plan.

Navigation
Active Leg
Active route identifiers also appear
on the GPS NAV status indicator.
If configured, a user field shows
active route identifiers on Map.
Delete any existing flight plan before attempting to graphically edit a direct-to
waypoint. Map does not allow the addition of an intermediate waypoint between
the current position and a direct-to waypoint unless the waypoint is in the flight
plan.

Navigation
REMOVE WAYPOINT FROM FLIGHT PLAN

You can tap and drag any leg
to another waypoint or airway,
or release it away from any
waypoint if an alternate
destination is not preferred.
CREATE LEGS WITHOUT AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
If an active flight plan does not exist, you can graphically create one without ever
leaving Map.
1. Tap any location on the map > Graphical Edit.
2. Begin tapping waypoints to add them to the temporary flight plan.
3. Tap Done.

Navigation
Map Overlays
Overlay data controls reside in the
Overlay Selections Map menu. Changes to an overlay
• TOPO • Charts setting take effect immediately.
• Terrain • Stormscope NEXRAD and Terrain overlays are
• Traffic • Airways mutually exclusive. Enabling one
automatically disables the other.
• NEXRAD • Radar
Overlay Controls
Control keys enable the specified overlay function only
and do not activate interfaced equipment. Control keys
remain active even in the absence of required data.
Overlay controls reside in the Map menu.
TOPO
• Overlays topographical data
and ground elevation scale
• Depictions are similar to a
VFR sectional
• Selectable topographical
elevation scale available

Navigation
TERRAIN
• Overlays terrain map data
• Color shading depicts
terrain elevation relative to
the aircraft’s altitude
TRAFFIC
• Overlays traffic information
• Filter selection on the Traffic
page determines altitude
range
• Feature optional
NEXRAD
• Overlays datalink
precipitation weather
information
• Options dependent upon
weather data source

Navigation
CHARTS
• Overlays geo-referenced chart
information
• Approach chart for the active
flight plan in the navigator
• Airport surface chart if
nearest airport is within
200 NM and no approach
is active
• Depicts planview area only;
excludes inset information
(e.g., missed approach
Arrival and departure chart overlays are not
available. procedure view)
NOTE
In the case of a dual GTN/crossfill configuration, the chart database on each unit must be
of the same type and version in order for the correct chart to display on Map.
STORMSCOPE
• Overlays Stormscope
lightning information

Navigation
AIRWAYS
• Overlays the selected airway
type(s) with identifier labels
• Options include: low, high,
all, or off (none)
• High altitude airways are
green, low altitude airways
are gray
RADAR
• Overlays airborne weather
radar information
• Depictions are identical to
those on the Weather Radar
display
• Excludes WATCH shading

Navigation
Overlay Status Icons

Icons indicate which overlays are present at the current map range. A crossed out
icon means the overlay is active, but data is unavailable due to a failure, test, or
standby condition (where relevant).
The absence of an overlay icon means one of two possible conditions:
1. Overlay not present at the current detail level or zoom setting.
2. Overlay control is off.
Obstacle Power Line
Stormscope Lightning Traffic
Terrain Data not available

Navigation
User Fields
User fields allow you to customize the display of data
in each corner of the map. Tap Change User Fields
to access available options.
In configuration mode:
• All four data fields change
to selectable keys
• All other map elements
are inactive
Tap a key and select from the
available data types.
USER FIELD TYPES

Options are organized into three selectable menu tabs:
Data Function Page
Lists available data fields Lists available controls. Lists available page
(e.g., distance, bearing, access keys. These keys
desired track). provide direct access to
the specified page.

Navigation
Data Tab Options:

Available field types and their corresponding labels are as follows:
ACTV WPT Active waypoint MSA Minimum safe altitude
AGL Above ground level NAV/COM Active NAV/COM frequency4, 7
BRG Bearing to waypoint OAT (static) Outside static air temperature
Distance/bearing from
D/B APT destination airport (i.e., the OAT (total) Outside total air temperature
straight line distance)
DIS Distance to waypoint Position Current position (lat/lon)
Distance to destination Height above ground as
DIS to
(i.e., the distance along RAD ALT indicated by the radar
Dest
the flight plan) altimeter3
DTK Desired track TKE Track angle error
ESA En route safe altitude TRK Track
ETA Estimated time of arrival Time Current time
ETA at Dest ETA at destination Time Current time with seconds
Time to
ETE Estimated time en route Time to top of descent
TOD
ETE to Dest ETE to destination Trip Timer Timer display
1 Tuned VOR/LOC information4, 5, 6
FLT ID Flight ID VOR/LOC
Fuel Flow Total fuel flow2 VSR Vertical speed required
GS GPS ground speed Wind Wind speed and direction8
GSL GPS Altitude XTK Cross track error
Generic
Timer display OFF Do not display data field
Timer
Wind User Field

Selecting Wind displays current wind speed and direction on Map.
Wind data display when true airspeed is 30 kts and higher. A white
arrow indicates wind direction relative to the map orientation.
“Wind Calm” annunciates in place of wind data when calculated

winds are less than or equal to 2.5 kts.
“Destination” refers to the missed approach point (if an approach is loaded)

or the final airport in the flight plan.
1
Available when a transponder or GDL 88 is present. 2 Available when a fuel sensor is present.
3
Available when a radar altimeter is present. 4 Label information dependent upon active frequency selection.
5 Tuned LOC shows airport and runway. Tuned VOR shows bearing and distance to waypoint.
6 7 8
GTN 650Xi and GTN 750Xi units only. GTN 650Xi only. Available only for display on Map.

Navigation
Function Tab Options:

CDI key OBS/Suspend/Unsuspend key
DIS/BRG WPT key On Scene mode key
Flap Override key 1 MIC PA Mode toggle key3

Generic timer controls Playback key3
GPWS Inhibit key1 TAWS/HTAWS Inhibit key
G/S Inhibit key1 Weather radar controls3
HTAWS RP Mode key2 OFF
Page Tab Options:

• Active Flight Plan • Approach • Arrival • Backlight • Charts3 • Checklist
• Connext Weather • Default Navigation4 • Departure • FIS-B Weather
• Fuel Planning • Map • Nearest • Nearest Airport • Procedures
• Scheduled Messages • Services • SiriusXM Weather • Stormscope • Terrain
• Traffic • Trip Planning • Utilities • User Frequencies • VCALC • VNAV
• Waypoint Information • Weather • Weather Radar3 • OFF
TOPO SCALE & USER FIELDS

GTN 650Xi SERIES
When active, the topographic scale replaces the bottom left user field.
To view this field, turn off TOPO Scale (tap Menu > Map Setup > TOPO Scale).
TOPO scale off TOPO scale on
User Field Absent
1 Available when TAWS-A is active. 2 Available when HTAWS is active.

3
GTN 750Xi Series units only. 4 GTN 650Xi Series units only.

Navigation
TURN OFF USER FIELDS

Selecting “OFF” removes the corresponding user field
from the map page.
User Fields
Absent
RESTORE DEFAULTS
Tapping this key returns all fields to their default settings.
Default User Fields

• DIS - Distance
• GS - Ground Speed
• DTK - Desired Track
• TRK - Track
• BRG - Bearing1
• ETE - Estimated time en route1 User fields are useful during time
sensitive and work load intense phases
1
GTN 650Xi Series only. of flight.

Navigation
Non-map User Fields

Depending on configuration, user fields may be available for
display in the control bar. You can access these fields from
the System menu.
Home > System > User Fields
The layout and number of fields vary according to unit type and configuration.
GTN 650Xi SERIES
GTN 625Xi GTN 635Xi/650Xi

User fields appear along the right edge
of the display on GTN 650Xi Series units.
You can also configure user fields for display on the

Default Navigation page. Options are identical to those
available on Map.
Home > Default NAV > Menu > Configure User Fields
Tap Map to view and configure

user fields on moving map.
Bottom row user fields allow Data tab selections only.

Navigation
GTN 750Xi SERIES
GTN 725Xi
User fields appear along
the top edge of
GTN 750Xi Series units.
GTN 750Xi
GTN 750Xi with Audio Panel & Transponder

User fields are not
available when
audio panel and
transponder
controls are present.

Navigation
Map Detail
Changes to the map detail level take effect immediately. There are four levels from
which to choose.
FEATURE FULL HIGH MEDIUM LOW

Small Cities •
Medium Cities •
Large Cities •
Freeways •
Highways •
Roads •
Railroads •
Basemap Labels •
VORs • •
NDBs • •
Line Obstacles • •
Point Obstacles • •
Airspaces that are not
• •
prohibited or restricted
Waypoints • • •
SafeTaxi • • •
Restricted Airspaces • • •
Prohibited Airspaces • • •
Airways • • • •
Active Flight Plan • • • •
Present • Removed

Navigation
Charts
Charts provides terminal procedures and airport surface
diagrams.
• A current and valid chart database
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Geo-referencing is not available for some arrival and departure charts
• FliteCharts and ChartView databases are optional and mutually exclusive
Chart Window Selection Controls
1 2
1 Chart 4 Chart Type Selection Keys
2 Airports Selection Key 5 Airport Info Key
3 Charts Selection Key 6 Position Unavailable Icon

Navigation
CHARTVIEW INFORMATION SECTIONS
Header
Planview
Profile
Minimums
CHART STATUS
Active chart status displays at the bottom of the Charts display.
Charts are in the process of updating.

Charts are up to date.
Database is out of date.
Database is installed before it is current.

Navigation
Chart Setup
Tap Menu to access setup selections.
Charts Menu
From here you can:
Chart Information 1
• View individual chart sections
All
Header (ChartView only)
Plan
Profile • Change the chart’s color scheme for
Minimums day or night viewing
Chart Color Scheme
Day
Night
Displays individual sections of a chart in the ChartView

Chart database only. Options include:
Information 1 • All • Header • Planview
• Profile • Minimums
Toggles chart color scheme between day and night modes.
Invert Colors • Day mode displays black on white background
• Night mode displays inverse white on black background
1
ChartView only.

Navigation
Chart Selection
To select a chart:
1. Tap Airports.
2. Enter an airport identifier.
3. Choose from the available chart types.
CHART TYPES
Approach
All approach charts associated with the selected airport.
Charts are listed according to level of precision and
approach type. Runways are listed in numerical order.
Arrival
Arrival procedure instructions.
Arrival charts are listed in alphabetical order.
Departure
Departure route descriptions, including takeoff minimums
and obstacle notes.
Information
Airport surface charts, alternate minimums, rate of climb
and descent tables, inoperative components or visual aids
tables, hot spots, land and hold-short operations, and other
destination specific flight data.
Upon selecting a chart type, you have the following options.

• Choose a specific chart: Tap the associated menu key and choose from the
list of available charts.
• View airport waypoint information: Tap Airport Info.
• Zoom the chart display in or out: Tap In or Out.

Navigation
AUTOMATIC CHART SELECTION

Automatic chart selection occurs every time the Charts page is opened. The type of
chart selected is determined by aircraft status and content from the active flight plan.
This function does not override manual chart selections unless a change occurs
during one of the following conditions.
CONDITION CHART DISPLAY DEFAULT

No flight plan or destination airport is
Nearest airport diagram.
present.
Nearest airport diagram (regardless of
Aircraft is on the ground.
flight plan).
Flight plan is present, but approach is Airport surface chart for previous airport
not loaded. in flight plan.
Approach is loaded in the selected
Applicable approach chart.
GPS navigator.
No charts are available for a selected
“Chart not available for [airport ID].”
airport.

Navigation
Aircraft Position Icon

• Aircraft position is fully within chart boundaries
• FliteCharts or ChartView is active (airborne maneuvers only)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• SIDs and STARs do not support the display of aircraft position
• Not available for arrival and departure charts
• Displays only within the planview area of geo-referenced approach charts
Aircraft position displays on airport diagrams and approach charts when the current
position is known.
POSITION UNAVAILABLE INDICATION

A fault icon appears in the bottom right corner when:
• Aircraft position data is not available
• Selected chart does not contain geo-referenced data
• Selected chart layer is not All or Planview
OFF SCALE AREA

Some charts contain supplemental information within
the planview. These areas are considered off scale as
they are not geographically accurate.
Aircraft position depictions in off scale areas should
be judged relative to the geo-referenced information
within the planview only.

Navigation
Waypoints
There are two types of waypoints: database and user
Database waypoints (i.e., waypoints contained

in the navigation database) are organized into
the following groups.
• Airport (APT)
• Intersection (INT)
• Very High Frequency Omni-directional
Range (VOR)
• Visual Reporting Point (VRP)
• Non-Directional Beacon (NDB)
The Airport page is a great place to start when performing an approach brief,
checking weather, or considering a diversion.
You also have the ability to define any point in space and store
it. Unlike database waypoints, these “user” waypoints are
editable.

Navigation
Waypoint Information
Dedicated information pages provide waypoint search
functions and details not available on Map.
• FIS-B (viewing NOTAMs)
• Navigation database containing VRP waypoint data
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• FIS-B transmits distant and FDC NOTAMs within 100 NM of radio station position
Intersection, VOR, VRP, and NDB information pages have a uniform layout.
10
1 9
2 8
3 7
4
6
5
VOR Information Page
1 Waypoint Identifier Key 6 Map Preview
2 Location Information 7 Station Declination
3 Class Information 8 Nearest NAVAID information
4 Frequency Selection Key 9 Waypoint coordinates
5 Waypoint Map Symbol 10 Waypoint Distance & Bearing

Navigation
Common Page Features

Data Fields Waypoint Identifier
• Distance and bearing from This key provides access to

current aircraft position multiple waypoint search options.
• Latitude and longitude These include the FastFind
feature and multiple search tabs.
• Applicable city, state,
country and/or region
(e.g., “NW USA”)
• Identifier and type icon
MAP PREVIEW WINDOW

A 2D map of the surrounding area (includes SafeTaxi airport depictions).
GTN 650Xi SERIES

Tapping Preview displays the
waypoint location on a dedicated
map page.
As you approach an airport, use the map preview function to orient yourself
for such things as pattern entry or runway alignment.

Navigation
Waypoint Specific Page Features

The following features are unique to the corresponding waypoint.
Airport
Selectable tabs:
Info: Airport location, elevation, time zone, and fuel availability.
Procedures: Available approach procedures.
Runways: Identifiers, size, surface type, and traffic pattern
direction.
Tapping Runway opens a list of
available runways.
Frequencies: Available communication and localizer

frequencies. The “c” symbol denotes frequencies that function
as the CTAF.
View additional frequency information by tapping
More Information, if available.
WX Data: Applicable METARs, city forecasts, and TAF weather
information.
NOTAMs: Applicable distant and FDC NOTAMs.
VRPs: Nearest VRPs.
Intersection
Data fields:
• Nearest VOR (identifier, type icon, bearing, and distance)
Very High Frequency Omni-directional Range

Frequency: Loads the indicated value as the COM or NAV
frequency.
Data fields:
• Frequency
• Nearest airport (identifier, type icon, bearing, and distance)
• Station declination
• VOR class
Visual Reporting Point
Data fields:
• Nearest VRP (identifier, type icon, bearing, and distance)

Navigation
Non-Directional Beacon
Data fields:
• Frequency
• Nearest airport (identifier, type icon, bearing, and distance)
• Marker description
User Waypoint
Selectable functions:
Edit: Opens the Create User Waypoint page for editing
purposes.
View List: Displays a list of all user waypoint identifiers.
Delete: Removes the selected user waypoint from the list.
Delete All: Removes all user waypoints from the list.
All deletions require user confirmation.
User waypoints in the active flight plan cannot be
edited or deleted.
Data fields:
• Reference position or nearest waypoint (identifier, type icon,
radial, and distance), whichever is applicable
• Number of waypoints used out of 1,000
The User WPT page is the only page that allows you to view an entire list of all user
waypoints created and saved in the database.

Navigation
Waypoint Selection
The Waypoint Identifier key provides access
to different waypoint search options.
Enter a specific identifier or select one from the
available search tabs.
Waypoint Autofill
Autofilled As you type the identifier name,
Character alphanumeric characters autofill
based on the first alphabetical
match in the navigation database.
Autofill characters are cyan and
display from the cursor position to
the right of the field.
Identifier Waypoint
Name Icon Matching waypoint entries
typically change with the addition
of each typed character.
“No matches found” and “Duplicates found” annunciate when applicable.

Navigation
FastFind Predictive Waypoint Entry

FastFind predicts a waypoint based on the
characters you select. As you type, the key label
changes to reflect the identifier of the nearest
matching entry.
Tap to select the predicted waypoint and open
the corresponding information page.
Because it relies on your GPS position, FastFind can make predictions based on a
single key press.
Nearest
Matching
Waypoint
If no matches are found, “No suggestion” annunciates and the key is not selectable.
FastFind
Not Available
FastFind & Flight Plan

For convenience, use FastFind
when creating your flight plan.
GTN will search for waypoints
closest to the current GPS
position.
• If inserting a waypoint in the
middle of the flight plan,
GTN searches for waypoints
between the next and
previous waypoints.
• If adding a waypoint to the
end, GTN searches for FastFind is a convenient shortcut when
waypoints closest to the last you are adding waypoints to a flight plan
waypoint in the flight plan. or trying to find a waypoint in a hurry.

Navigation
Search Tabs
The Find key provides access to multiple search tabs.
Each tab displays a list of

selectable identifiers based on
specific criteria. These include:
• Recent
• Nearest
• Flight Plan
• User
• Search Name
• Search City
Waypoint Each entry includes general

Identifier Type Icon information about the
associated waypoint.
Bearing & Distance
RECENT
Lists up to 20 of the most recently viewed waypoints.
NEAREST
Lists up to 25 waypoints within a 200 NM radius.
Tap Filter and select from the available filter options. Only
waypoints belonging to the selected class appear in the list.
To list all classes, select All.

Navigation
FLIGHT PLAN
Lists all waypoints contained in the active flight plan.
USER
Lists up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints.
SEARCH BY NAME/CITY
Search By Name Search By City

Lists all airports, NDBs, and VORs Lists all airports, NDBs, and VORs
associated with the specified found in proximity of the city.
facility name.
Tap Search Facility Name to Tap Search City Name to
begin search. begin search.

Navigation
Create User Waypoints

Create and store up to 1,000 user defined waypoints.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Duplicate user waypoint identifiers are not allowed
• Names may be up to six characters in length
• Comment may be up to 25 characters
• Maximum waypoint limit: 1,000
WHERE TO FIND IT You may access this page from the following
applications:
Home
• Waypoint Info
Waypoint Info
• Map
Create WPT
MAP POINTER/CREATE WAYPOINT KEY

Tapping any location on Map that is not an existing
waypoint displays this page access key.

Navigation
USER WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER

Assign a unique identifier or keep the unit generated identifier. If an identifier is
already in use, the three digit number increments automatically upon opening the
page.
User Waypoint User Airport

By default, the identifier format is Identifier format is “A” followed by
“USR” followed by a sequential a sequential three digit number.
three digit number.
User waypoints are helpful when ATC requests that you fly one radial to intercept
another. While the point is often defined by an intersection in the navigation
database, this is not always the case. The Create User Waypoint function allows you
to define the new intersection and insert it into the flight plan in advance, as
opposed to using the NAV radio to tune each VOR and specify the radials to fly
inbound and outbound.

Navigation
Define Waypoint Criteria

Active user waypoints already existing in
Create Waypoint Options
a flight plan are not editable.
User Identifier When creating a user waypoint, you
Specify identifier have the option to:
Airport
Specify elevation • Assign a unique identifier
Comment • Set the waypoint as temporary
Type comment • Enter a comment
Position
• Set waypoint position
Radial/Radial
Radial/Distance • Specify elevation (user airports only)
LAT/LON
• Edit the waypoint graphically
Graphical Edit
Temporary
Create
User Identifier Assign a unique identifier.

Airport Label the user waypoint as a user airport
Comment Type a comment regarding the new waypoint.
Position Set the waypoint position.
Open a preview map for graphical editing purposes. User
Graphical Edit waypoint icon remains stationary as you move the
surrounding map to the new location.
Temporary Assign the waypoint a temporary status. Identifier remains

available until the next unit power cycle.
Elevation Specify the elevation of the user airport. Available only when
the Airport key is active.
Add the new identifier to the used waypoints list. The
Create associated information page opens automatically for viewing
and editing purposes.

Navigation
COMMENT FORMAT
Default comments display in a specific format for each reference type.
LAT/LON Radial/Distance
<LAT> <LON> <Waypoint><Radial> / <Distance>
Radial/Radial
<Waypoint 1><Radial 1> / <Waypoint 2><Radial 2>
POSITION TYPE
Set the waypoint position type using one of the following options.
Radial/Radial Radial/Distance LAT/LON
Specify a waypoint and Specify the reference Specify the point’s

radial for each of the two waypoint, radial, and latitude and longitude.
reference points. distance.
MARK WAYPOINTS
Installations equipped with an external Mark on Target (MOT) switch allow
immediate user waypoint creation by marking the point in space at which the switch
is activated.
These waypoints contain a unique identifier with a sequential three digit number
(“MOT###”) that increments with every push of the MOT switch. If the number
exceeds 999, the counter resets and begins to overwrite identifiers at the beginning
of the list.
Upon marking a target with an MOT switch, the waypoint may be obscured by the
ownship and not readily visible. In such cases, you may verify waypoint creation by
changing the map zoom level or viewing the User Waypoints page.

Navigation
Create a User Waypoint

OPEN CREATE USER WAYPOINT PAGE
From Map:
Home > Map > select any non-waypoint location > Map Pointer/Create Waypoint
From Waypoint Info:

Home > Waypoint Info > Create Waypoint
ASSIGN POSITION VALUES

From the Create User Waypoint page:
1. Tap Position > LAT/LON > Latitude/Longitude > specify the waypoint’s
coordinates > Create.
OR
1. Hold and drag the basemap until the user waypoint icon appears over the
desired location.
2. Tap Create.
MODIFY DEFAULT SETTINGS

Modify default settings as necessary.
• Create a custom identifier: Tap User Identifier and enter a new one.
• Add a comment: Tap Comment and enter the appropriate text.
• If the waypoint is an airport: Tap Airport > Elevation, then specify the
number of feet.
• If the waypoint is for temporary use: Tap Temporary.
Once all modifications are complete, tap Create.

Navigation
Edit an Existing User Waypoint

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• User waypoints that are part of a flight plan or direct course are not editable
ACCESS USER WAYPOINT EDIT OPTIONS

You can access the edit function multiple ways.
From the dedicated information page:

Home > Waypoint Info > User WPT > specify an identifier, or tap View List and
select an identifier from the used waypoints list > Edit
From the Nearest page:

Home > Nearest > User WPT > select an identifier from the list (e.g., USR001) >
Edit
From the Active FPL page:

Home > Flight Plan > select the identifier from the flight plan > Waypoint Info >
Edit
MODIFY POSITION VALUES

From the Edit WPT page, you can modify a user waypoint’s position one of two ways:
1. Tap Position > LAT/LON > Latitude/Longitude > specify the waypoint’s
coordinates > Save.
OR
1. Hold and drag the basemap until the user waypoint icon appears over the
desired location.
2. Tap Save.

Navigation
Delete User Waypoints

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• User waypoints that are part of a flight plan or direct course cannot be deleted
You can delete a user waypoint from its

information page:
1. Select the user waypoint, then tap
Delete.
2. Confirm the request.
DELETE ALL USER WAYPOINTS

From the User Waypoints list, you can delete all user
waypoints or filter the list and delete only a certain type.
This list is accessible from the information page.
1. Tap View List > Menu.

2. Tap Filter and select the
type of user waypoints you
wish to delete. Options
include All, Basic, and
Airport.
3. Tap Delete All.

Navigation
Import User Waypoints

The Import Waypoints key appears when the unit detects
a user waypoint on the datacard.
NOTE
The import function overwrites any existing user waypoint of the same name.
FUNCTIONAL LIMITATIONS
• User waypoint file size must not exceed 8 GB
CREATE USER WAYPOINT FILE

You may create a list of new user waypoints using any spreadsheet program. Read
User Waypoint File Considerations for limitations and formatting specifications.
Organize columns as follows.
A B C D
Waypoint Name Comment Latitude Longitude
User Waypoint File

Navigation
User Waypoint File Considerations

• Limit one waypoint per row
• Names may be up to six characters in length
• Comments may be up to 25 characters
• All letters must be upper case
• Latitude: two digits left of decimal; up to nine digits right of decimal
• Longitude: three digits left of decimal; up to eight digits right of decimal
• (-) indicates southern latitudes (column C) or western longitudes
• Express latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees
Save the file in the .csv format under the name “user.csv.” Change the file extension
to “.wpt” before copying the file to a blank SD card.
IMPORT USER WAYPOINTS

1. Ensure that the unit power is off.
2. Insert datacard containing user waypoints.
3. Power on unit.
4. From the Home page, tap Waypoint Info > Import Waypoints.
5. Acknowledge the pop-up message.
The import function executes in the background. Once the import is complete, an
advisory message informs you of the following:
“User waypoints were imported successfully.”
The waypoints are now available for use. You may power down the unit and remove
the SD card.
If an imported waypoint is within 0.0001 degree (latitude and longitude) of an

existing user waypoint, the existing waypoint and name will remain in use.

Navigation
Nearest
View a list of the nearest waypoints, frequencies, or facilities
within 200 NM of the aircraft’s position.
From the Home page:

1. Tap Nearest and then select a waypoint or frequency icon.
2. Scroll through the list of entries.
Information varies according to the selected waypoint or frequency type. Nearest

waypoints provide an identifier key for accessing the associated information page.
Nearest Airport
• identifier • symbol • distance • bearing • approach type
• length of longest runway
Nearest Intersection
• identifier • symbol • distance • bearing
Nearest Very High Frequency

Omni-directional Range
• identifier • symbol • distance • bearing • frequency
Nearest Visual Reporting Point

Nearest Non-Directional Beacon

• identifier • symbol • distance • bearing • frequency
Nearest User Waypoint


Navigation
Nearest Airspace
• identifier • symbol • proximity
Nearest Air Route Traffic Control Center

• facility name • distance • bearing • frequency
• high/low altitude filter indication1
Nearest Flight Service Station

• facility name • distance • bearing • frequency
(“RX” denotes receive-only frequencies)
Nearest Weather Frequency

• facility name • distance • bearing
• frequency of nearest ATIS, ASOS, AWOS, and VOR
ENTRY LIMITS
The number of entries
ENTRY
NEAREST LIST displayed varies
LIMIT according to item type.
ARTCC, FSS 05 Entries are ordered from
Airspace 20 closest to farthest.
Airport, Intersection, VOR, VRP,
25
NDB, User, Weather FREQ
UPDATE INTERVALS
With the exception of nearest airspace, all lists update every 30 seconds. The nearest
airspace list updates once per second.
MULTIPLE FREQUENCIES
This key displays when more than one frequency is
available at the indicated range.
Applicable to functions displaying information only
(ARTCC, FSS, and WX FREQ).
1
Available with GTN Xi software v20.40 and later.

Navigation
ARTCC FILTER
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
Select an altitude filter to display ARTCC frequencies.

Tapping Filter opens a menu of available filter options.
Low: Show low altitude

frequencies only.
High: Show high altitude
frequencies only.
All: Show low and high altitude
frequencies.
Auto: Switch automatically
between high and low based on
aircraft altitude.

Navigation
Active Flight Plan

Current flight plan information displays as a scrolling list on
the Active Flight Plan (FPL) app.
• Active flight plan
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Displays up to 99 waypoints for an active flight plan
2 1
3 8
5 7
Active Flight Plan
Selectable Data Field

1 5 Current Waypoint
Columns
2 Waypoint Identifier Column 6 Waypoint Type Icon
3 Procedure Header 7 Leg Data
4 Active Leg Indicator 8 Airport Info Key

Navigation
AUTO SCROLL
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Toggle on/off functionality available only with GTN Xi software v20.40 and later
When enabled, this function automatically scrolls the

flight plan to the active leg after 10 seconds of inactivity.
When disabled, the flight plan remains at the last scrolled
location. This function is active by default.
You can disable automatic scrolling from the Active Flight Plan menu.
From the Home page:

Tap Flight Plan > Menu > Auto Scroll.

Navigation
WAYPOINT COLOR
A waypoint’s color indicates
FLIGHT PLAN STATUS COLOR whether it is active, past, future,
Active Magenta or a transition.
Past & Future White
Transition Gray
Transition
Waypoint
Transition Waypoints
Certain procedures require a transition waypoint to complete the procedure;
however, that waypoint may not be navigable due to the geometry of the
procedure. In such cases, the waypoint will be gray to indicate that it is a transition.
No special pilot actions are required to navigate these procedures.
GTN Xi Installations with GNS, GPS 175/GNC 355/GNX 375, or GTN

When interfaced with a non-GTN Xi Garmin navigator, differences between the
two navigators may result in minor discrepancies in the active flight plan, course
depictions, and turn annunciations, even while the Crossfill function is active. In
such cases, use GTN Xi as the primary navigator.
If the discrepancy is affecting pilot workload, disable crossfilling and delete the
flight plan from the non-GTN Xi navigator.

Navigation
AIRPORT INFO
Procedure Airport Info For convenience, airport
Header Key information is directly
accessible from the
procedure header. This
includes airports specified
in active approaches,
arrivals, and departures.
Tap Airport Info to open
the corresponding
information page.
FIX TYPE INDICATIONS

When applicable, labels indicate
LABEL FIX TYPE the fix type associated with an
iaf Initial Approach Fix identifier.
faf Final Approach Fix
map Missed Approach Point
mahp Missed Approach Hold Point
-p Parallel Track (no fix)

Navigation
ACTIVE LEG STATUS INDICATIONS

Magenta symbols denote active leg status on from/to/next waypoint
indications. Fix type symbols (e.g., FAF, MAP) correspond with labels
appearing on the flight plan.
IAF Arc Left
Holding Pattern
FAF
(Right Turns)
Holding Pattern
MAP
(Left Turns)
MAHP Active Leg Arrow
Parallel Track Direct To
Arc Right

Navigation
Create a Flight Plan

NOTE
The unit cannot verify the accuracy of cataloged flight plans with modified procedures.
There are three methods for creating a new flight plan.
CREATE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE

1. Tap Flight Plan.
2. Delete the existing flight plan if necessary (Menu > Delete).
3. Tap Add Waypoint.
4. Select an identifier using the provided search options.
5. Repeat steps 3 - 4 for each waypoint in the route.
CREATE FROM MAP

Build a flight plan by selecting waypoints directly on the map using Map’s
Graphical Flight Plan mode.
CREATE FROM THE FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG

1. Tap Flight Plan > Menu > Catalog.
2. Scroll to the end of the flight plan list.
3. Tap Create New Catalog Route > Add Waypoint.
4. Add waypoints using the provided search options.
5. Tap Menu > Preview > Store or ACTV (Activate).
As a general practice, never save flight plans with modified procedures in the
catalog.

Navigation
Airway Options
Selecting an airway from the active flight plan
Airway Options
opens a menu. You may elect to:
Collapse All Airways
• Collapse all legs of the airway
Select Airway
• Select a new airway
Remove Airway
• Remove an airway from the flight plan
Collapse All Airways

Airways automatically display as flight plan legs. A single airway may contain
numerous legs. Airways without an active leg collapse for simplification.
This does not affect airway legs shown on the external navigator(s).
Airway Indication All airways

begin with an
indicator field
and end with
an exit
Expanded Airway identifier.
Detail
To hide all waypoints along an airway, but not the airway’s exit waypoint, tap
Collapse All Airways.
Airway Collapsed
Indication
Airway Collapsed
Indication

Navigation
Sort Airways
Preview of a sorted airway waypoint list.
A toggle key allows you
to sort the airway
waypoint list alphabetically
or by distance.
This option is available
once you select an airway.
The sort function is useful when you are searching for an exit point from the airway.

Navigation
En Route Vertical Navigation

Create a vertical navigation (VNAV) path with multiple
altitude constraints in the flight plan.
WARNING
airport.
• Enablement by the installer
• Baro-corrected altitude source
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
The following flight plan waypoints do not allow altitude constraints:
• Legs containing headings
• Legs that terminate at an altitude (e.g., a climb to 1,800 ft before making a turn and
proceeding direct to fix)
Storing a flight plan in the catalog removes its altitude constraints.
WHERE TO FIND IT The vertical navigation (VNAV) feature provides vertical

profile guidance during the descent phase of flight.
Home Guidance is based on altitude constraints associated
with lateral waypoints in the active flight plan.
Utilities
VNAV This feature is also accessible via the Active Flight Plan
menu (Home > Flight Plan > Menu > VNAV).
Annunciations display within 60 seconds of the top or bottom of descent.

A “Vertical Track” aural message plays at 60 seconds from the top of descent.
VNAV Functions
• Presents vertical path guidance along the descent as either a line joining two
waypoints with specified altitudes or a desired linear vertical path (i.e., the
vertical angle from the specified waypoint or altitude)
• Integrates vertical waypoints into the active flight plan
• Supports both manual and autopilot coupling
For installation details related to en route vertical navigation, consult the AFMS.

Navigation
Define a VNAV Profile

Active vertical navigation profile
information displays on the VNAV
Profile page. From here you can:
• Enable en route vertical
guidance
• Specify a target vertical
speed and flight path angle
• View active constraint data
• Set a default FPA
(in the VNAV Profile menu)
VS Target and FPA may be unavailable if:

• The selected altitude is set higher than the Active VNAV Constraint
OR
• The aircraft is more than 50 NM from the top of descent
Dual PFD Installations with Selected Side Enabled1

GTN Xi uses baro-corrected altitude data from the selected TXi PFD (pilot or copilot)
to provide VNAV guidance.
If the baro setting is out of sync between the two displays, the non-selected PFD will
show incorrect vertical deviation data relative to its baro setting, while GTN Xi
continues to provide correct vertical deviation data in reference to the baro setting
on the selected PFD.
Transponder Data Priority

If configured with a Garmin transponder, GTN Xi sends data displayed on the
crew-selected PFD to the transponder.
In dual PFD installations without Selected Side capability, GTN Xi prioritizes data
transfers as follows:
• Data displaying on the Pilot PFD is sent to transponder 1
• Data displaying on the Copilot PFD is sent to transponder 2
For information about Selected Side functionality, consult G500(H)/G600/G700 TXi
Pilot's Guide.
1 Selected Side is available only with GTN Xi software v20.40 and later and GDU TXi software v3.60
and later.

Navigation
ENABLE VNAV GUIDANCE
From the Home page:

Tap Flight Plan > Menu > VNAV > VNAV Enabled.
Tapping VNAV again toggles the function off.
Disabling vertical
navigation:
• Invalidates required vertical
speed, time to TOD/BOD,
and vertical deviation data
• Removes vertical deviation
and required vertical speed VNAV automatically re-enables when
indications from the PFD you initiate a direct course.

Navigation
Altitude constraints are either entered manually into the active flight plan, or
automatically retrieved from the published altitudes in the navigation database.
GTN automatically uses altitudes loaded with arrival and approach procedures
(up to and including the FAF) for computing vertical deviation guidance.
Altitude constraints loaded from the database are jet altitudes. Some adjustment
may be necessary for other types of aircraft. For the adjustment procedure, refer to
the published chart.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT INDICATIONS

When the VNAV function is
COLOR DEFINITIONS active, altitudes may be
White Altitude is for reference only. accompanied by one or two
altitude restriction bars. The
GTN honors the constraint for
position of the value (above
Cyan vertical guidance when the
or below the bar, or between
VNAV function is active.
two bars) denotes the required
aircraft altitude relative to that
constraint.
Dual values annunciate when the aircraft needs to cross between two altitudes.
Constraint values display in MSL or flight level (FL). Constraints at airports may be
specified as MSL or AGL.
Examples:
Cross at or Above 5,000 ft Cross at or Below 5,000 ft
Cross at 5,000 ft Cross Between 5,000 ft and 6,000 ft

Navigation
ALTITUDE TYPES
Database Constraint
Altitude is retrieved from the navigation database and
designated for use in determining vertical guidance.
Pilot-specified Constraint
Pencil icon indicates manual designation or manual data
entry.
Invalid Altitude Constraint
GTN cannot use the altitude to determine vertical guidance.
Estimated Crossing Altitude

For reference only.
System calculated estimate of aircraft altitude as it passes
over the navigation point. Absence of bar(s) indicates it is
not a potential constraint.
Published Reference Altitude
For reference only.
Altitude is retrieved from the navigation database, but not
for use in determining vertical guidance. Bar above and/or
below the value indicates constraint type.
Altitude Constraint
Data Priority
GTN prioritizes altitude constraint
data for each navigation point and
displays it in the ALT column of the
active flight plan.
1. GTN honored constraints
(includes invalid constraints)
2. Reference-only estimated
crossing altitudes
3. Published reference altitudes
4. Empty (no altitude data)

Navigation
INVALID ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS

An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to exceed the maximum flight
path angle (6° downward) or maximum vertical speed (-4,000 fpm)
• It results in a TOD behind the aircraft's current position
• It is within a leg type that does not support altitude constraints
• It is added to a waypoint past the FAF
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT OPTIONS

Once added to the flight plan, an altitude constraint may be modified or deleted
using the controls in the VNAV Options menu. Select a value in the ALT column to
display available options.
• Opens a list of available constraint types

Type
• Options: At, At or Above, At or Below, and Between
• Opens a keypad. Specify an altitude value for the selected
Altitude Data constraint type
Entry
• Unit options: MSL, AGL, and Flight Level
Revert • Returns a modified altitude constraint to its original published
Constraint value
• Removes the VNAV designation from the altitude
• Value remains displayed for reference purposes. It is no longer
Remove used to compute vertical guidance
Constraint
• Removing the VNAV designation from an altitude may
invalidate other displayed altitudes or cause them to change
after recalculation

Navigation
Designate a waypoint altitude for use with vertical guidance:

1. Select a waypoint altitude constraint.
2. Tap Save.
Enter or modify an altitude constraint:

1. Select an altitude constraint.
2. Tap Type and select the constraint type.
3. Select the altitude data key.
4. Enter an altitude constraint value using the keypad.
5. Select altitude units.
6. Tap Enter to accept the altitude.
7. Tap Save.
Delete an altitude constraint:

2. Tap Remove Constraint.
3. Tap OK.
Return a modified altitude constraint to its original database value:

1. Select an altitude constraint containing the pencil icon.
2. Tap Revert Constraint.
3. Tap OK.

Navigation
VNAV Direct To
This function creates a vertical navigation path from the
aircraft’s current position and altitude to a selected
waypoint’s location and altitude.
By removing any VNAV constraints between the aircraft and selected waypoint, it
allows you to fly the lateral flight plan in a continuous descent and reach the
waypoint at the specified altitude.
ACTIVATE VNAV DIRECT TO

2. Tap VNAV Direct To.
Transition to Approach
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Function availability dependent upon installer configuration
VNAV responds differently based on approach type.
VNAV APPROACH RESPONSE

• Vertical path attempts a smooth transition from en
Transition to route to approach vertical guidance
Approach
enabled • Aircraft intercepts with approach guidance from below
the glidepath/glideslope
Transition to • En route VNAV terminates at the waypoint prior to the
Approach not FAF on approaches with vertical guidance
enabled • En route VNAV terminates at the FAF (LNAV only)
For more information about the transition to approach function, consult the AFMS.

Navigation
Temperature Compensated Altitude

NOTE
GTN and TXi displays use a single destination airport temperature for calculating
compensated altitudes. Changing the temperature on one of these units automatically
recalculates the value across all connected GTNs and GDUs.
• Active flight plan contains an approach
• GDU 700( )/1060 for access via PFD Minimums menu
Calculate loaded approach altitudes based on the pilot-specified destination

temperature. Once you enter the destination temperature, GTN increases the
approach altitudes accordingly.
SETTING TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE

Controls for setting temperature compensation are accessible from two places:
• Active Flight Plan menu
• Minimums menu (PFD only)
Temperature compensated
approach plate altitude restrictions
are shown with a corresponding
snowflake icon for each adjusted
altitude on the active flight plan.
To toggle function on or off, tap
Temperature Compensation.
ACTIVATE TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE

From the active flight plan:
Tap Menu > Temperature COMP > Temperature Compensation >
TEMP at DEST, and specify the destination airport temperature.
The temperature compensated FAF altitude annunciates in magenta.
Approach plate altitude restrictions update on the active flight plan as indicated by
their corresponding snowflake icons.
Changing the flight plan destination turns off and resets active temperature
compensation. Flying an approach at a different airport requires you to reactivate
the feature and enter a temperature for the new destination.

Navigation
OBS
The Omni Bearing Selector (OBS) allows you to select between
manual or automatic sequencing of waypoints.
When active, this function allows you to set the

desired course To/From a waypoint using the
provided controls or with an external OBS
selector on HSI or CDI.
1. Tap OBS.
2. Specify a heading course.
OBS Mode
CDI indicates the OBS heading.
The mode displays on the
annunciator bar.
The unit retains the active To
waypoint as a navigation
reference even after passing
the waypoint (i.e., prevents
sequencing to the next
waypoint).
Tapping the key again resumes
automatic sequencing of
waypoints (normal mode).
SUSPEND/UNSUSPEND
SUSP UNSUSP
This key displays for leg types that This key displays for legs that
do not support OBS. auto suspend (e.g., leg holds,
missed approaches).

Navigation
Dead Reckoning
WARNING
Do not use projected position data as the only means of navigation.
Points About Dead Reckoning

• Provides limited navigation using the last known position and speed following
the loss of GPS navigation while on an active flight plan
• Becomes active after a loss of GPS position while navigating using an active
flight plan
• Allowed only during en route and oceanic phases of flight
When dead reckoning mode is active:

• System flags all external outputs dependent upon GPS position data
• Map reports “No GPS Position”; overlays are not available
• “DR” appears over the ownship icon
• DR mode annunciation replaces phase of flight
• Terrain functionality is not available
• Traffic and Stormscope data display on their respective pages only
• CDI is not available
Dead Reckoning Mode, GTN 650Xi

Dead reckoning
mode ends once
GPS position is
restored.

Navigation
Parallel Track
Create a parallel course offset relative to the current
flight plan. Setup controls provide offset distance and
direction setting (left of track or right of track).
• An active flight plan
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Function not available when Direct-to is active
• Graphical editing of the active leg cancels the parallel track function
• Offset range: 1 NM to 99 NM
• Large offset values combined with certain leg types (e.g., approach) or leg geometries
(i.e., changes in track >120º) do not support parallel track
Once activated, a new track line appears to the

TRACK COLOR
left or right of the original course line at the
Offset Magenta specified distance. The aircraft navigates to the
Original Gray offset track with external CDI/HSI guidance
now driven from the parallel track.
A graphical depiction overlays

on the map.
Corresponding fix symbols on the flight plan

indicate when the active leg is on a parallel track.
Active route identifiers also appear on the

GPS NAV Status bar.

Navigation
To
WPT
Offset
ack To
al Tr WPT
igin
Or
Offset Distance
ack
From l l el Tr
a
WPT Par
Offset
From
WPT
ACTIVATE A PARALLEL TRACK

1. Tap Menu > Parallel Track.
2. Tap Offset and specify a distance between
1 NM and 99 NM.
3. Tap Direction and select left of track or
right of track.
4. Tap Activate.
To deactivate parallel track, tap Menu > Remove PTK.

Navigation
Invert Flight Plan

Reverse the active flight plan and use it for navigation guidance back to your original
departure point. Inverting the flight plan does not affect the original version stored in
the catalog.
Be aware that inverting a flight plan removes all ATKs.
INVERT THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

Tap Menu > Invert.
Edit Data Fields

This function allows you to change the data type for
any flight plan column. By default, flight plan displays:
• ALT • DTK • DIS
Selections are identical for each

DATA FIELD SELECTIONS
data field.
ALT Altitude Constraint GTN 750Xi SERIES
CUM Cumulative Distance Data field columns are arranged in
DIS Distance numerical order (1 - 3).
DTK Desired Track
ESA En Route Safe Altitude
ETA Est. Time of Arrival
ETE Est. Time En Route
CHANGE DATA FIELD TYPE

1. Tap Menu > Edit Data Fields.
2. Tap any column/field and select a data type.
To restore data fields to their default settings, tap Restore Defaults.

Navigation
Flight Plan Catalog

Create, activate, edit, copy, and delete flight plans within
the catalog.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Stores up to 99 flight plans with a maximum of 100 waypoints each
Departure Destination
WPT WPT
Each catalog entry includes
the identifiers of the
departure and destination
waypoints. These comprise
the route identifier.
Comment
GTN 750Xi SERIES
Route Identifier
In addition to the route
identifier, these units display
the route distance and en
route safe altitude.
Distance
En Route Safe Altitude

Navigation
Catalog Route Options

Selecting a flight plan opens a menu. Changes to
Route Options
the active flight plan take effect immediately.
Activate
• Activate the selected flight plan
Invert & Activate
(replacing the active flight plan)
Preview
Edit • Reverse and activate the selected flight plan
Copy • Preview a selected flight plan
Delete • Make changes to a flight plan
• Copy the flight plan and modify it to create
a similar one
• Remove individual or multiple flight plans
ACTIVATE
Activating a stored flight plan overwrites the active flight plan.
INVERT & ACTIVATE

Reverse and activate the selected flight plan for guidance back to your original
departure point. The inverted flight plan is a copy. Changes do not affect the original
flight plan, which remains stored in the catalog.
Remember: Inverting a flight plan removes all ATKs.
PREVIEW
View the flight plan route as
it will appear on Map and on
Active Flight Plan.
Options include Store and
Activate.

Navigation
EDIT
Modify the selected flight plan on the Edit Catalog Flight Plan page.
COPY
Create a copy of the selected flight plan. A copy may be used as a starting point for
creating a similar flight plan. Select the copy and tap Edit to make modifications.
DELETE A FLIGHT PLAN

Deleting the active flight plan does not delete the stored flight plan in the catalog.
From the FPL menu:

1. Tap Menu > Delete.
From the catalog:

1. Select a flight plan.
2. Tap Delete.
3. Confirm the request to delete all waypoints.
DELETE ALL CATALOGED FLIGHT PLANS

To remove all flight plans from the catalog:
1. Open the catalog.
2. Tap Menu > Delete All.
3. Confirm the request to clear the catalog.
4. Tap Delete Pending.
5. Confirm the request to remove all flight plans pending preview.

Navigation
Flight Plan Waypoint Options

Selecting a waypoint identifier opens a menu.
Options Menu Changes to the active flight plan take effect
Activate Leg immediately.
Insert Before • Change the active leg
Insert After • Insert a new waypoint into a flight plan
Along Track
• Add a temporary route fix (ATK)
Hold at Waypoint
View Charts • Add a holding pattern to an existing waypoint
Load Procedure • Add an airway or procedure
Load SAR
• Add a search and rescue pattern
Waypoint Info
Load Airway • View waypoint information and related charts
Remove • Remove a selected waypoint
Designate any TO waypoint as the active flight plan leg.

Activate Leg
Requires an active catalog flight plan.
Insert Before Insert a new waypoint before the selected waypoint.
Insert After Insert a new waypoint after the selected waypoint.
Specify an along track offset value before or after the selected
Along Track
waypoint.
Create a user-defined hold at the selected waypoint. Specify
Hold at
hold parameters and preview holding patterns from a dedicated
Waypoint
menu page.
View Charts Open the Charts page for the selected airport or procedure.
Open the Procedures app to specify a departure, arrival,
or approach for loading. Available controls are dependent upon
Load
the relative position of the aircraft to the active flight plan.
Procedure
Options may include: • Activate Approach
• Vectors to Final • Activate Missed Approach
Assign an airway and exit waypoint to the selected entry
Load Airway
waypoint (e.g., intersection, VOR).
Open the Search and Rescue function to create and add an
Load SAR
SAR pattern after the selected waypoint.
Waypoint Info Open the dedicated information page for the selected waypoint.
Remove the selected waypoint or hold from the active flight
Remove
plan.
You may also set a direct course to any existing waypoint in the active flight plan.
Select an identifier and tap the Direct To key. Details about Direct To features are
provided in the respective section.

Navigation
Import a Flight Plan

NOTE
Flight plan format on GTN differs from that used by GNS 400W/500W Series navigators.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
Flight plans over 99 waypoints in length are truncated. As a result, the last waypoint in the
imported flight plan may not be the destination airport.
Import Options
You can import flight plans wirelessly from Garmin Pilot or from an SD card. Once
imported, they may be previewed and then stored in the catalog or activated.
IMPORT USING CONNEXT

On your portable device: Select the option to transfer the flight plan(s) to GTN.
On GTN: The MSG key flashes, alerting you that a new message is active.
1. Tap MSG and read the “Flight Plan Import” message.
2. Tap New FPL to preview the flight plan.
• For a single flight plan, the preview page opens.
• For multiple flight plans, the catalog opens.
Selecting a cataloged flight plan that is “Pending Preview” opens a slide-out menu.
To view the flight plan, tap Preview. To delete it without viewing, tap Delete.
IMPORT FROM A DATACARD

On your personal computer: Create the flight plan(s) using compatible flight
planning software. Save the file(s) to an SD card.
On GTN: After installing the datacard and applying power to the unit, go to the
Active Flight Plan page and open the catalog.
From the Flight Plan Catalog:

1. Tap Menu > Import.
2. Select a flight plan from the list of datacard files.
3. Tap Store or Activate.

Navigation
Potential Import Errors

Pop-up messages alert you when an import problem occurs.
Tapping Next advances through multiple error messages. Tapping OK acknowledges
the error and closes the popup.
The following errors can prevent GTN from successfully importing your flight plans.
Full catalog.
Delete any unnecessary catalog entries and try again.
Flight plan contains errors.

Any airways, procedures, or non-user waypoints not found in the database will result
in an error. GTN replaces these with locked (lockd) waypoints, which must be
resolved prior to activation.
Flight plan exceeds the waypoint limit.

GTN truncates the flight plan to the correct length; however, you should be aware
that waypoints are missing from the end of the flight plan, including the destination
waypoint.
Along Track Offsets

An along track (ATK) represents a temporary lateral position (or checkpoint) relative
to an existing waypoint in the flight plan. Offset distance values range between
1 NM and 200 NM, and may be specified in 1 NM increments.
Unlike database waypoints, ATKs indicate a temporary route fix in the flight plan.
When replacing a loaded departure or arrival, there may be an option to keep an
applicable ATK from the original procedure. In such cases, the ATK's lateral position
may change when you load the new procedure. Always check the resulting route
after loading the new procedure.1
You may insert multiple ATKs into the flight plan.
ATKs appear in flight plan route depictions on Active Flight Plan and Map.
Inserting an ATK before the selected waypoint results

in a negative offset value. Inserting it after results in
a positive value.
1 GTN Xi software earlier than v20.40: Once created, ATK position remains fixed until deleted by the pilot.
Changes to the flight plan do not update the ATK's position.

Navigation
CREATE AN ATK

1. Select a reference waypoint.
2. Tap Along Track and specify an offset distance.
3. Choose Before or After.
4. Tap Enter.
CREATE AN ATK FOR AN ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT

2. Tap Along Track and specify an offset distance.
3. Choose Before or After.
4. Tap Enter > Save.
MODIFY AN ATK OFFSET

Once set, offset distances are not editable.
To adjust an existing offset value:
1. Select the ATK from the flight plan.
2. Tap Delete.
3. Create a new ATK with the correct offset distance.

Navigation
User Holds
User holds suspend automatic waypoint sequencing until
they expire or are removed.
Tapping Hold at Waypoint displays available hold
options.
Hold at Waypoint Options

The controls on this page allow
you to:
• Specify course, direction,
and turn.
• Set leg length according to
distance or time.
• Set up an Expect Further
Clearance reminder.
• Preview how the defined
holding pattern will appear
on Map.
• Load the specified hold for
activation.
Course Specify the course angle.

Direction Select between Inbound or Outbound.
Turn Select between Left Turn or Right Turn.
Leg Type Select Time or Distance.
Leg Time Specify the leg time in minutes and seconds (MM:SS).
Leg Distance Specify the leg distance.
Expect Further Specify a time for the Expect Further Clearance reminder.
Clearance (EFC)
Load Hold Accept the specified hold parameters and return to the
previous window.
Preview View the defined holding pattern as it will appear on Map.

Available on GTN 650Xi Series units only.

Navigation
HOLD PREVIEW
A window displays the defined
holding pattern on a 2D map of the
surrounding area (includes SafeTaxi
depictions).
GTN 650Xi SERIES
Tapping Preview displays the hold
on a dedicated map page. You may
view and load the hold, or return to
the setup menu for more options.
CREATE & ACTIVATE A HOLD

1. Select a waypoint.
2. Tap Hold at Waypoint.
3. Specify hold parameters.
4. Tap Load Hold.
5. Select the hold from the active flight plan.
6. Tap Hold Activate.

Navigation
Search and Rescue Patterns

Create a search and rescue pattern for any off-route course.
Tapping Load SAR displays options for defining a search
and rescue pattern for the selected waypoint.
SAR Pattern Options

The controls on this page allow
you to:
• Select a pattern type.
• Specify an initial track angle
and spacing distance.
• Select the turn direction.
• Specify the number of legs.
• Load the specified pattern
after the selected waypoint.
• Load and immediately
activate the specified pattern.
SAR Pattern Select a pattern from the list of available types.

Initial Track Specify an initial track angle.
Initial Turn Select between Left or Right.
Direction
Leg Length Specify the leg length.
Track Spacing Specify the track spacing distance.
Leg Count Specify the number of legs.
Load Pattern Accept the specified pattern and return to the previous
window.
Load Pattern & Accept and activate the specified pattern.
Activate
Preview View the defined SAR pattern as it will appear on Map.

Available on GTN 650Xi Series units only.

Navigation
SAR PATTERN PREVIEW

A window displays the defined pattern
on a 2D map of the surrounding area
(includes SafeTaxi depictions).
GTN 650Xi SERIES
Tapping Preview displays the pattern
on a dedicated map page. You may
view and load the pattern, or return to
the setup menu for more options.
SAR PATTERN TYPES

Depending on configuration, not all pattern types may be available.
Parallel Track Sector Search
Expanding
Orbit
Square
CREATE & ACTIVATE A SEARCH AND RESCUE PATTERN

1. Select a waypoint.
2. Tap SAR Pattern and select a pattern type.
3. Review the displayed pattern information. Edit as necessary.
4. Tap Load Pattern & Activate.
SAR patterns automatically display as flight plan legs. A search pattern may contain
numerous legs.

Navigation
SAR Pattern SAR patterns

Indication begin with an
indicator field
and end with an
exit identifier.
Expanded To activate a
Pattern Detail pattern leg,
select the leg
and then tap
Activate Leg.
SAR Flight Plan Options

Selecting a search pattern indicator from the
Search & Rescue Options
active flight plan opens a menu. You may
Collapse Search Pattern elect to:
Insert Before
• Collapse all pattern legs
Select Pattern
• Insert a waypoint before the search
Remove Pattern
pattern
• Select a new pattern or modify the
existing one
• Remove the search pattern from the
active flight plan
Tapping Collapse Search Pattern hides all legs of the pattern except the exit leg.
SAR Collapsed
Indication
Exit Identifier
REMOVE A SEARCH AND RESCUE PATTERN

1. Select the SAR pattern identifier.
2. Tap Remove Pattern.

Navigation
Flight Plan Map Overlays

Leg Status Indications
LEG STATUS COLOR Active, next, and previous flight plan legs
overlay on Map and are display only.
Active Magenta
Next & Future White
Past or Inactive Gray
Status leg indications.
Next Leg(s)
Active Leg
Previous Leg(s)

Navigation
Along Track Offset Indications

The along track waypoint (ATK) symbol represents a temporary
lateral position (or checkpoint) relative to an existing waypoint in
the flight plan.
Waypoint ID Offset Distance
Identifier labels on Map

denote the adjacent
waypoint’s ID and offset
ATK Icon
distance from the
specified ATK.
Selecting an ATK displays
Abbreviated
Map Label its bearing and distance
in the info banner.
Unlike waypoints, ATKs indicate a temporary route fix in the flight plan.
ATK Identifier
Offset Detail
Waypoint

Navigation
Altitude Constraint Labels

Altitude constraint data display as text labels on Map. Units are typically feet or
meters depending on current altitude setting in the System Units app. They display as
flight level altitudes if specified as such on the navigator.
If excessive labels are

cluttering the map, this
Altitude feature may be turned off.
Constraint
Label
Altitude Constraint

Navigation
User Airport Symbol

A dedicated symbol indicates user created airport waypoints.
User airport indications display on

Active Flight Plan and Map.
Identifier Type
Symbol
Selected
User
Airport
User
Identifier
When selected, the user identifier annunciates in the info banner.

Navigation
Fly-over Waypoint Symbol

This symbol appears on instrument procedures when a waypoint is
coded as a fly-over in the navigation database.
GTN Xi automatically creates a course

that takes into account the waypoint
type: fly-over or fly-by.
Identifier Type Fly-over Map

Symbol Symbol
For information about fly-over and fly-by waypoints, consult the AIM.

Navigation
CDI
The CDI function selects data sent from the GPS or VLOC
receiver to the external CDI (or HSI).
Tapping the CDI key toggles between navigation sources.
If configured, this key resides in the control bar.
NOTE
Information provided by the onscreen CDI is based on GPS data. Do not use for primary
navigation.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• GPS phase of flight annunciations (e.g., LPV, ENR) are not applicable to the external
CDI/HSI when VLOC is active
For approaches not approved for GPS, select the VLOC receiver for display on the
external CDI/HSI. The selected source annunciates at the bottom of the display.
GPS Receiver VLOC Receiver
If the unit is not configured for a CDI key:

Tapping Activate GPS Missed Approach only resumes automatic waypoint
sequencing. To switch to GPS navigation, use your external source selection method
(this is typical of an EFIS system).
GTN 650Xi SERIES
CDI scales display on the Default Navigation page

(Home > Default NAV).
GTN 750Xi SERIES

CDI scales appear at the bottom of the map display. This indicator is not visible
during pan mode.

Navigation
GPS Nav Status Bar

• Active flight plan for from-to-next route information
This selectable indicator bar shows from-to-next route information when an active
flight plan exists. Indications change based on active leg status.
Tapping this bar provides direct access to the active flight plan.
No Flight Plan Exists

Underscores denote the absence of an active leg.
Active Route Display

Fields change to show active route identifiers and leg
types. Includes:
• From, to, and next waypoints
• Leg and waypoint types
• Identifier
GTN 650Xi SERIES
This indicator is a feature of the Default Navigation page

(Home > Default NAV).
GTN 750Xi SERIES
GPS Nav status indications appear at the bottom of the

map display as part of the CDI. This bar is not visible
during pan mode.

Navigation
Direct To
Set a course to any waypoint using Direct To.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Not all flight plan entries are selectable using Direct To (e.g., holds, course reversals)
• Available search and rescue patterns are dependent upon configuration
Direct To Basics
Pushing this bezel key opens a slide-out
window. Search tabs provide three
different methods of waypoint selection.
• Waypoint: Enter a specific waypoint
or find one using additional search
tabs.
• FPL: Select a waypoint from the active
flight plan.
• NRST APT: Select a nearby airport.
Underscores denote the absence of a

loaded course, hold, or search and rescue
pattern.
Direct To is useful for

quickly navigating to:
• New waypoints
• An existing waypoint in the
active flight plan
• Nearby airports
When navigating to a single waypoint
• Map waypoints (e.g., a nearby airport), the Direct To
• An off-route course function provides a quicker alternative
• User-defined holds to using the active flight plan.

Navigation
Direct To Search Tabs

WAYPOINT
Similar to an information page, but with
course and hold options. This tab is active
by default.
Selecting an identifier automatically
displays the following information about
the waypoint.
• Identifier and type icon
• Applicable city, state, country and/or
region (e.g., “NW USA”)
• Distance and bearing from current
aircraft position
• Waypoint coordinates
Select Waypoint/ Type an identifier or access multiple search tabs using the
Identifier Key Find function.
Course To Specify the course angle for the navigation path.
Hold Create, load, and activate a user-defined hold.
SAR Specify a search and rescue pattern.

Navigation
FPL & NRST APT

FPL and NRST APT tabs provide a list of selectable identifiers. These tabs have a
uniform layout.
Lists all waypoints contained in Lists up to 25 waypoints within

the active flight plan. a 200 NM radius. The closest
airport appears at the top of
the list.
Direct To Activation
Activating a direct course establishes a point-to-point line
from the aircraft’s present position to the selected
destination.
The unit provides course guidance until you remove the
direct-to waypoint, or replace it with a new direct course
or flight plan.
For convenience, you may activate a direct course using the

inner control knob.
After selecting a waypoint, push the knob to activate the
direct course.
The window closes and Map opens to show the active leg.

Navigation
ACTIVE FIX INDICATIONS

Upon activation, Map
automatically opens to show a
graphical representation of the
active direct-to leg.
GPS Nav Status Bar

GPS navigation status changes to show the active direct-to fix. Indication
includes the corresponding fix symbol and waypoint identifier.
Map User Field Active Flight Plan Indication

If configured, a user field shows Fix symbol and identifier display
the active waypoint identifier in the upper-left corner of the
on Map. flight plan.

Navigation
Navigating Direct To
While most direct-to operations follow the same basic steps, the method for
selecting a waypoint may vary.
DIRECT TO A NEW WAYPOINT

1. Push Direct To.
2. Select a waypoint identifier.
3. Tap Course and specify the course heading (if a specific course is necessary).
4. Activate the selection.
DIRECT TO A FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT

Direct To options are not available for
Flight Plan Waypoints all flight plan entries. Some entries
If a flight plan exists, waypoint include holds and course reversals
sequencing resumes once you which are not selectable using
reach the direct-to waypoint. If Direct To.
the waypoint is not in the flight
1. Push Direct To.
plan, the flight plan is no longer
active but remains available. 2. Select FPL tab.
3. Select a flight plan leg.
DIRECT TO THE NEAREST AIRPORT

1. Push Direct To.
2. Select NRST APT tab.
3. Select an airport.
DIRECT TO A MAP WAYPOINT

Apply a direct course to any location
MAPWPT on the map.
For map locations without an
1. Select a location on Map.
existing name, Direct To assigns
the “MAPWPT” identifier. 2. Push Direct To.
Bearing, distance, and map 3. Activate the selection.
coordinates display on the
Waypoint tab.
You can modify direct-to routes on Map using the Graphical Edit function the
same as you would a flight plan.

Navigation
DIRECT TO AN OFF-ROUTE COURSE

You may activate an off-route course using any of the described direct-to methods.
Activating an off-route direct course automatically deactivates the current leg of the
active flight plan.
Direct To &
Procedure Fixes
Approach guidance is not
available for procedure fixes. An
example would be activating a
direct course to a waypoint
between the final approach fix
and missed approach point. Upon
arriving at the waypoint, approach
guidance does not become active.
Remove a Direct Course

To cancel the current direct course, tap Remove.
Removing a direct course:

• Reactivates the original active flight plan
• Assigns the leg nearest to the aircraft’s position as the active leg
• Resumes waypoint sequencing
If no active flight plan exists, the aircraft continues on its current heading without
any navigation guidance.

Navigation
User Holds
Define a holding pattern for any direct-to waypoint.
Tapping Hold displays available Loading the specified hold

hold options. parameters returns you to the
Direct To window. The Hold key
label changes to reflect the
specified course angle.
CREATE & ACTIVATE A HOLD

From the Waypoint tab:
1. Tap Hold.
2. Specify hold parameters.
3. Tap Load Hold.
4. Activate the selection: Tap Hold Activate
or push the inner control knob.

Navigation
Search and Rescue Patterns

Create a search and rescue pattern for any direct-to waypoint.
Tapping SAR displays options Loading a pattern returns you

for defining a search and rescue to the Direct To window. The
pattern for the direct-to SAR key label changes to reflect
waypoint. the selected pattern type.
When you create a search and rescue pattern as part of an off-route direct course,
the function inserts the associated waypoints at the end of the en route portion of
the active flight plan.
CREATE & ACTIVATE A SEARCH AND RESCUE PATTERN

From the Waypoint tab:
1. Tap SAR > SAR Pattern, and select a pattern type.
2. Review the displayed pattern information.
3. Tap Load Pattern.
4. Activate the selection: Tap SAR Activate or push the
inner control knob.

Navigation
Procedures
Lateral and vertical guidance is available for visual and
GPS/RNAV approaches. The published instrument approach
procedures allow precision and non-precision approaches to
airports. These are directly accessible from the Procedures app.
• Baro-corrected altitude source (automatic sequencing of altitude leg types)
• In the absence of baro-corrected altitude data, altitude leg types require manual
sequencing
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Flight Plan allows only one of each procedure type to be loaded at a time; adding a
new procedure overwrites any existing procedure of the same type
LOAD A PROCEDURE
Select a procedure type, then
define the criteria for that
procedure on the
corresponding setup page.
By default, these keys display
underscores.
Upon completion, the specified

airport and procedure appear
on the associated key.
When loading a procedure, always remember to check the runway, transition, and
all waypoints.
COMMON PAGE CONTROLS

All procedure pages provide the following setup controls. For page specific controls,
refer to the appropriate procedure description.
Airport: Select an airport for the procedure.
Transition: Select a transition.
Runway: Select a runway for the selected airport.
Preview: View a 2D map of the surrounding area (includes SafeTaxi airport
depictions).

Navigation
Flight Procedure Basics

WARNING
airport.
NOTE
Advisory climb altitudes for SIDs may not match charted altitudes. Do not rely solely on
advisory altitudes.
• Always check the runway, transition, and waypoints for all procedures.
• Heading legs indicate in white as “HDG XXXº” on flight plans.
• The unit provides lateral and, when appropriate, vertical guidance for visual
and GPS/RNAV approaches.
• Use Map as an aid to situational awareness during ILS, VOR, NDB, and
non-precision localizer-based approaches. A magenta line depicts the active
leg (or the portion of the approach currently in use).
• Always use the appropriate radio navigational aid for primary approach
course guidance during non-GPS approaches.
• Check the annunciator bar for the current phase of flight.
• Many non-precision approaches have GPS overlays, improving accuracy so
that approaches do not require overflying a VOR or NDB.
• The unit guides you through complex overlay approaches, automatically
sequencing each leg up to the missed approach point.
• Fly approaches as published with the full transition using any published
feeder route or initial approach fix, or with a vectors-to-final transition.
• While not required under TSO-C146e, an optional baro-corrected altitude
source is recommended for automatic sequencing of altitude leg types.
When adding procedures to a flight plan:

Always verify the transition waypoints between each phase are correct. If using
VNAV Descent, verify that the altitudes for the selected procedure match the
charted or ATC cleared altitudes and are appropriate for the airframe type.
Map complements your printed approach plates by improving situational awareness

during the approach. It does not replace printed approach plates.
Always fly an approach as it appears on the approach plate.

Navigation
Roll Steering
When switching the CDI source
from GPS to VLOC during ILS,
VOR, NDB, and non-precision
localizer-based approaches, roll
steering terminates when
approach mode is selected on the
autopilot. It becomes available
once you initiate the missed
approach.
TO/FROM LEGS ON THE CDI
TO Legs FROM Legs
On these legs, the FROM/TO flag On these legs, the FROM/TO flag
on the CDI indicates “TO” and the on the CDI indicates “FROM” and
Distance field on the flight plan the Distance field on the flight plan
decreases as you navigate the leg. increases as you navigate the leg.
Most legs are this type. From legs are typically found on
procedure turns and on some missed
approach procedures.

Navigation
COMMON POINT PROCEDURES

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Common point procedures and deferred runway selection are available with GTN Xi
software v20.40 and later
You can choose the common point as the transition point for departures and arrivals.
The common point is generally identified as a transition fix that matches the name of
the arrival or departure.
Deferring Runway Selection

The option to defer runway selection is available for arrival procedures only.
When you defer runway selection:
• GTN Xi loads arrival waypoints up to and including the common route
segment, omitting the segment of the route that is part of the runway
transition
• Common route segments include waypoints and crossing constraints that
are common among all runway transitions (i.e., if a waypoint has different
altitude or speed constraints when landing north/south or east/west, the fix
is not part of a common route segment)
For steps on how to defer runway selection, read Arrivals in this section.

Navigation
Localizer or VOR-based Approaches

GTN automatically switches the external CDI output from GPS to VLOC as you
intercept the final approach course. When the ILS approach activates and the correct
ILS frequency activates in the VLOC window, the GTN automatically switches to
VLOC within 1.2 NM left or right of the final approach course. This switch can take
place anywhere from 2.0 to 15.0 NM from the FAF.
This illustration shows multiple locations along the approach path and the CDI selection
that you can expect: GPS or VLOC. The shaded area depicts where the automatic switch
from GPS to VLOC should occur.
2NM
GPS 15NM
MANUAL
VLOC 1.2NM
FAF VLOC
1.2NM
GPS
The automatic switch from GPS to VLOC is not immediate, but instead occurs
gradually to prevent abrupt CDI changes when coupled to an autopilot. The CDI
selection can also be changed manually by tapping CDI.
If you attempt to intercept the approach course at a distance less than 2.0 NM from
the FAF, tap CDI to manually switch from GPS to VLOC.

Navigation
GPS Flight Phase Annunciations

Flight Phase Check the annunciator bar for
(Caution) current phase of flight.
Map complements your printed approach plates by improving situational awareness

during the approach. It does not replace printed approach plates.
Always fly an approach as it appears on the approach plate.
Phase of flight annunciations are a direct indication of the current CDI behavior for
the selected navigation source. Under normal conditions, these annunciations are
green. They turn yellow when cautionary conditions exist.
A caution alerts you when the GPS/WAAS accuracy required for the displayed service
level has not been met within the last 30 seconds. This means that an approach
downgrade or failure may occur. Always monitor flight phase annunciations and
system messages for any change in status.
Not all annunciations are available for every navigator.
ANNUNCIATION FLIGHT PHASE

• 0.3 NM CDI scale
0.30 NM
• Based on pilot selection
• 1.0 NM CDI scale
1.00 NM
• Based on pilot selection
Departure
• Terminal level with departure procedure as the active
DPRT navigation
• System using non-precision approach integrity
• CDI full-scale deflection: 0.30 NM
Dead reckoning
DR
• CDI not available
En route
ENR • CDI full-scale deflection: 2.0 NM or current CDI scale
selection, whichever is smaller
Lateral Navigation Approach
LNAV
• Fly to published LNAV minimums
Lateral Navigation Approach with Advisory Vertical
LNAV+V Guidance
• Fly to published LNAV minimums

Navigation
ANNUNCIATION FLIGHT PHASE

Lateral and Vertical Navigation Approach
L/VNAV
• Fly to published LNAV/VNAV minimums
Low Altitude
• Aircraft’s estimated height is lower than the final
LOW ALT approach waypoint height by approximately 50 meters
• For LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP +V, or LPV approaches
• Not active when terrain alerting functions are operational
Localizer Performance Approach
LP
• Fly to published LP minimums
Localizer Performance Approach with Advisory Vertical
LP +V Guidance
• Fly to published LP minimums
Localizer Performance with Vertical Guidance
LPV Approach
• Fly to LPV minimums
Missed Approach
MAPR • System using missed approach integrity
• CDI full-scale deflection: ±0.30 NM
Oceanic
OCN
• CDI full-scale deflection: 2.0 NM
Terminal
TERM • CDI full-scale deflection: 2.0 NM or current CDI scale
selection, whichever is smaller
Visual Approach
• Vertical guidance based on advisory terrain avoidance
VISUAL
calculations
• CDI scaling is identical to LPV approaches

Navigation
Departures
Loading a Departure into Flight Plan
• Flight plans allow only one departure procedure at a time
• Loading a departure when one is already present will replace the existing entry
• Selecting a departure, transition waypoint, and runway defines the route
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Deferred runway selection not available for SIDs
• Vector-only departures may be excluded from some databases
PAGE SPECIFIC CONTROLS

Load Departure: Loads departure procedure into the active flight plan.
SELECT A DEPARTURE
From the Home page:

1. Tap PROC > Departure.
2. Confirm the selected airport. If necessary, tap Airport and choose an airport
using the provided search options.
3. Tap Departure and select a departure from the list.
4. Tap Transition and select a transition.1
5. Tap Runway and select a runway.2
6. Tap Preview, then review the departure diagram and sequence list.
7. Tap Load Departure, then scroll the flight plan to view all departure waypoints.
To change the departure:

Tap the existing flight plan departure and select a different one.
1
GTN Xi v20.40 and later: The common point may be selected as the transition point for departures.
2 GTN Xi software earlier than v20.40: Selected runways may display a “B” to denote parallel runways
at the
airport (e.g., “RW10B” means the selected runway is both 10L and 10R). GTN Xi software v20.40 and later
lists parallel runways individually.

Navigation
Flight Plan Departure Options

Selecting a departure on the flight plan opens
Departure Options
a menu. Changes to the active flight plan
View Charts take effect immediately.
Select Departure • View chart for selected departure
Remove Departure • Select a new departure
• Remove the selected departure from the
flight plan

Navigation
Arrivals
Loading an Arrival into Flight Plan
• Load a Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) at any airport with a published
arrival procedure
• Flight plans allow only one arrival procedure at a time
• Loading an arrival when one is already present will replace the existing entry
• Selecting an arrival, transition waypoint, and runway defines the route
• Runway selection

Load Arrival: Loads arrival procedure into the active flight plan.
SELECT AN ARRIVAL
From the Home page:

1. Tap PROC > Arrival.
3. Tap Arrival and select an arrival from the list.
4. Tap Transition and select a transition.1
5. Tap Runway. Select a runway or tap NO RWY to defer selection until a later
time.
6. Tap Preview then, review the arrival diagram and sequence list.
7. Tap Load Arrival, then scroll the flight plan to view all arrival waypoints.
To change the arrival:

Tap the existing flight plan arrival and select a different one.
For more about deferring runway selection, read No Runway Option in this section.
1 GTN Xi v20.40 and later: The common point may be selected as the transition point for arrivals.

Navigation
Flight Plan Arrival Options

Selecting an arrival on the flight plan opens a
Arrival Options
menu. Changes to the active flight plan take
View Charts effect immediately.
Select Arrival • View chart for selected arrival
Remove Arrival • Select a new arrival
• Remove the selected arrival from the
flight plan
NO RUNWAY OPTION
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available with GTN Xi software v20.40 and later
Deferring runway selection displays a

series of dashes on the corresponding
leg of the active flight plan. Selecting
Runway re-opens the runway list.
This option is not available for SIDs.
Active Flight Plan provides navigation to the airport

waypoint when you defer runway selection.
If no runway is selected by the time the aircraft is within 15 NM of the final waypoint
in the loaded arrival:
• Advisory message: “Select appropriate runway for arrival procedure.”
• Pilot acknowledges message and selects a runway.

Navigation
Approaches
Loading an Approach into Flight Plan
• Always check the runway, transition, and all waypoints
• Flight plans allow only one approach procedure at a time
• You may load an alternate approach during a missed approach procedure
(flight plan retains all missed approaches)
• Loading an approach when one is already present will replace the existing entry
• Loading and not activating an approach does not remove the approach airport
from the flight plan
• Selecting an approach, transition waypoint, and runway defines the route

Load Approach: Loads approach procedure into the active flight plan.
Load Approach & Activate: Loads approach procedure into the active flight plan
and activates the approach.
Channel/ID: Loads an SBAS approach based on the specified channel.
SELECT AN APPROACH
From the Home page:
1. Tap PROC > Approach.
3. Tap Approach and select an approach from the list.
4. Tap Transition and select a transition.
5. Tap Load Approach. The Active FPL page opens.
6. Scroll the flight plan to view all approach waypoints.
To change the approach:

Tap the existing flight plan approach and select a different one.

Navigation
SBAS APPROACHES
To load an SBAS approach:

Channel ID Key
1. Tap Channel/ID.
• Select the channel ID for an
2. Specify an approach channel.
SBAS approach to the current
destination If present, both channel and ID load
automatically.
• Provides an alternate means
of loading an approach.
• IDs are available from an
approved approach chart
• In the case of duplicate
numbers, select an approach
from the provided list
SUSPENDED APPROACH PROCEDURE ANNUNCIATION

“SUSP” indicates that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended on
the active leg. This annunciation appears in the procedure field of the annunciator
bar.
Suspended approaches typically occur during:
• Holding patterns
• Crossing the missed approach point
• Climb to altitude legs
• Hold to altitude legs

Navigation
PROCEDURE TURNS
A procedure turn is stored as
Roll Steering & another approach leg. It does not
Procedure Turns require any special operations other
The steering provided for a than flying the procedure itself.
procedure turn does not guarantee Roll steering is available for aircraft
that the aircraft will stay within the with a compatible autopilot.
charted procedure turn boundaries.
Always be sure to fly within the
confines of the charted procedure.
Flight Plan Approach Options

Selecting an approach on the flight plan
Approach Options
opens a menu. Changes to the active
Activate Approach flight plan take effect immediately.
Activate Vectors to Final
• Activate the selected approach
View Charts • Activate vectors to final for the
Activate Missed Approach selected approach
Select Approach • View chart for selected approach
Remove Approach • Activate a missed approach
• Select a new approach
• Remove the selected approach
from the flight plan

Navigation
Missed Approach
The method for activating a missed approach depends on your position in relation to
the missed approach point.
BEFORE MISSED APPROACH POINT

Select Activate Missed Approach. This function is available in two applications:
Active FPL:
Home > Flight Plan > Select the approach > Activate Missed Approach
Procedures:
Home > Procedures > Activate Missed Approach
Once selected, guidance continues along an extension of the final approach course
(i.e., final approach fix to missed approach point).
The unit automatically sequences to the first leg of the missed approach. This allows
you to execute the missed approach prior to reaching the missed approach point.
CROSSING MISSED APPROACH POINT

When crossing the missed approach point:
• “SUSP” annunciation indicates that approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended at the missed approach point
• FROM/TO flag on the CDI indicates “From” for non-composite CDIs
• FROM/TO field on the annunciator bar indicates “FR”
• Course guidance continues along the final approach course
If you need to go around the holding pattern again to lose extra altitude or speed,
tap SUSP to manually suspend waypoint sequencing before crossing the holding
waypoint the second time.
If you have already passed the waypoint, re-activate the holding pattern.
AFTER MISSED APPROACH POINT

Upon reaching the missed approach point, a pop-up presents two options.
To continue with sequencing

suspended, tap
Remain Suspended.
To receive guidance to the
missed approach hold point, tap
Activate GPS Missed Approach.

Navigation
Approach Hold
Published holds display on the flight plan one of two ways: with an exit leg or
without. Most published holds have three distinct legs.
Hold Entry Leg Hold Leg Hold Exit Leg
This leg is active prior This leg is active after crossing This leg is active when
to crossing the hold the hold fix for the first time. the navigator is in an
fix for the first time. It remains active until: unsuspended state
• Navigation is unsuspended and the aircraft is
and the hold fix is crossed established inbound.
again
• The Hold exit leg is
activated
If VNAV is enabled, each

Approach
Indication hold leg is accompanied
by a separate altitude
constraint value.
Approach
Hold It is the pilot’s
Detail
responsibility to verify
that altitude constraints
match published charts
and ATC clearance.
In this example, the pilot may have received the instruction, “Cross NECIP at 5,000 ft, hold at NECIP,
maintain 4,000 ft…”
To stay in the holding pattern, tap SUSP, and the Hold leg will remain active.
When you are ready to exit the hold, tap UNSUSP, and the navigation will sequence
the next time the airplane crosses the hold fix.
APPROACH HOLDS WITHOUT AN EXIT LEG

Not all published holds
support a Hold Exit leg.
Hold Entry Some show only Hold
Leg Entry and Hold legs. In
this case, the Hold leg
will remain active until
Hold Leg crossing the hold fix for
the final time.
It is the pilot's responsibility to fly the procedure in accordance with published charts
and ATC clearance.

Navigation
FLIGHT PLAN APPROACH HOLD OPTIONS

Selecting an approach hold on the flight plan opens
Hold Options
a menu. Changes to the active flight plan take
Activate Hold effect immediately.
Insert After
• Activate the selected hold
Edit Hold
Exit Hold • Insert a waypoint after the hold
Remove • Edit hold details
• Exit the holding pattern
• Remove the selected hold from the flight plan
ACTIVATE HOLD
1. Select the hold.
2. Tap Activate Hold.
NOTE: Activating the hold will

result in direct-to navigation to
the hold fix.
REMOVE HOLDING PATTERN

1. Select the hold.
2. Tap Remove.
EXIT HOLDING PATTERN

1. Select the hold.
2. Tap Exit Hold.

Navigation
NON-REQUIRED HOLDING PATTERNS

Upon activating an RNP GPS approach,
decide whether to skip non-required
holding patterns during the initial
transitions of the approach.
A pop-up presents two options.
Selecting Yes adds the hold to the

flight plan.
Preview shows the hold in white.
Selecting No means the hold is not

included in the flight plan.
Preview shows the hold in gray.
Timer/Distance field displays on the active flight plan (refer to this field when flying
the outbound portion of the holding pattern). Holding pattern appears on Map with
the active flight plan leg indication.

Navigation
DME Arc
The unit supports approaches
DME Arc Approaches containing DME arcs.
• Left/right guidance relative to To manually activate DME Arc,
the arc the aircraft must be within the
• Manual arc leg activation shaded area.
once aircraft is near the arc
DME Arc
Intermediate Initial
Approach Approach
Fix Fix
X
1/2 X
Arcing Fix (VOR)

Navigation
RF Legs
The unit supports radius-to-fix (RF)
AC 90-101A - RF Legs legs associated with RNAV RNP 0.3
AC 90-101A defines RF leg as non-AR approaches, when approved
“A constant radius circular path, by the installation.
around a defined turn center, that Flying a radius-to-fix approach is
starts and terminates at a fix. An similar to flying a DME arc approach
RF leg may be published as part of (status indications are identical).
a procedure.”
Unlike DME arcs, however, RF legs are
not based on a VOR. They may have
varying radii, making them larger or
smaller than arc legs.
For details regarding RF legs for specific aircraft, consult the AFMS.
Vectors to Final
Activating the approach with vectors to final displays an
extension of the final approach course on Map.
Magenta depicts the active leg

of the flight plan. CDI needle
remains off center until you are
established on the final approach
course.
As a reminder, “vtf” annunciates
as part of the active leg on the
GPS Nav status bar.
Activating vectors-to-final while on the From side of the final approach fix suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing. “SUSP” annunciates at the bottom of the screen.
Sequencing resumes once the aircraft is on the To side of the final approach fix and
within full-scale deflection.

Navigation
ILS Approach
NOTE
ILS and LOC approaches are not approved for GPS. GPS guidance is for monitoring
purposes only.
Selecting an ILS or LOC

approach results in a pop-up
message. Activate the approach
or select a different one.
Do not attempt to use the unit as the primary navigation source during ILS approach.
VOR+V Approaches
Per guidance provided in AC 90-108 regarding the use of GPS as an alternate means
of navigation, VOR and NDB approaches may be treated as LNAV+V approaches
(i.e., LNAV with advisory vertical guidance) as long as the pilot monitors the VOR.
During approach selection, “+V”

displays for VOR and NDB
approaches when advisory
guidance is available. Approach
strings remain unmodified when
no vertical guidance is available.
If the approach indicates “VOR+V,” then advisory vertical guidance may be

removed without indication. This is due to the vertical guidance not being within
tolerances.
This does not constitute a downgrade. You may still fly the approach to VOR
minimums.
Flying a VOR approach with advisory vertical guidance (VOR+V) does not change
how the approach should be flown. The pilot is still responsible for descending to
the correct altitude at each step down.
The result is still an MDA and missed approach point.

Navigation
RNAV Approaches
Fly RNAV approaches according
Always fly to the published to the published chart.
minimums for:
• LNAV/VNAV
• LNAV
• LNAV+V
• LPV
• LP
• LP+V
LNAV APPROACH
RNAV non-precision lateral navigation approach.
LNAV+V APPROACH
RNAV non-precision LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance.
The glidepath is a light dashed line on the vertical profile (Jeppesen charts only) with
an associated glidepath angle (usually in the 3.00 degree range) to assist in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath, similar to an ILS glideslope.
CDI Full-scale Deflection
1.0 NM
0.3 NM
350 ft
Angle
set by
2.0 NM system
FAF
CDI scale varies when VTF is active.

Navigation
LPV APPROACH
Localizer performance with vertical guidance. Similar to flying the standard ILS
approach.
This segment describes a typical LPV approach sequence and the necessary pilot
actions.
Within 31 NM of destination:
• Mode switches from En Route to Terminal
• CDI scale transitions from 2.0 NM to 1.0 NM, full-scale deflection
Approaching initial approach fix:
• Waypoint message annunciates
• Time to Turn advisory annunciates and 10 second timer counts down as the
distance approaches zero
Approaching final approach fix:
• Mode switches from Terminal to LPV
2.0 NM from final approach fix:
• CDI scaling tightens from 1 NM to the approach-defined angular full-scale
deflection
60 seconds before final approach fix:
• System verifies GPS position integrity is within approach limits
CDI Full-scale Deflection
1.0 NM
0.3 NM
Course
Width
Angle
based on
2.0 NM database
info
FAF Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies when VTF is active.

Navigation
If GPS integrity exceeds the horizontal and/or vertical alarm limits:

• Approach downgrades to non-precision
• “LNAV” annunciates on Map to inform you of the change if there are LNAV
minimums for the approach
• Advisory message: ”GPS approach downgraded. Use LNAV minima.”
• Glideslope indication disappears
• Pilot continues approach using LNAV non-precision minimums, if applicable
If GPS integrity does not meet the non-precision horizontal alarm limits:
• Advisory message: “Abort Approach. GPS approach is no longer available.”
• Pilot acknowledges message
• Unit reverts to terminal limits of 1 NM to support navigation to the missed
approach
When crossing the final approach fix:
• Waypoint sequences to the missed approach point
(e.g., RW31, the runway threshold)
• Pilot flies toward missed approach point, keeping the needle on the external
CDI (or HSI) at center, and observing published altitude minimums
• Final course segment becomes the active flight plan leg on Map
After the aircraft passes final approach fix:
• Pilot captures the glidepath (method is same as for ILS glideslope)
Approaching missed approach point:
• Advisory message: “Arriving at Waypoint.”
Crossing missed approach point:
• Sequencing suspends
• Pop-up message: “Missed Approach Waypoint Reached”
• Pilot decides whether to remain suspended or activate the missed approach
• Tapping Remain Suspended allows you to continue with sequencing

suspended
• Tapping Activate GPS Missed Approach allows you to continue with
guidance to the missed approach hold point
Prepare aircraft for missed approach operation:
• Pilot taps UNSUSP (sequences missed approach), then follows the unit
provided guidance to the missed approach hold point and holds

Navigation
LP APPROACH
Points About LP Approaches
• Use SBAS accuracy, making them similar to an LNAV approach but more precise
• Combine the lateral accuracy of an LPV approach with the angular scaling of a
localizer approach
• Often contain step-down altitudes
• Always result in a minimum descent altitude and missed approach point
This segment describes a typical LP approach sequence and the necessary pilot
actions.
Within 30 NM of destination:
• Mode switches from En Route to Terminal
• CDI scale transitions from 2.0 NM to 1.0 NM, full-scale deflection
Approaching initial approach fix:
• Turn direction message annunciates
• Time to Turn advisory annunciates and 10 second timer counts down as the
distance approaches zero
Approaching final approach fix:
• Unit begins to automatically rescale in an angular fashion, allowing you to fly
as you would a standard localizer approach
2.0 NM from final approach fix:
• CDI scaling tightens from 2 degrees or 0.3 NM full-scale deflection,
whichever is smaller
60 seconds before final approach fix:
• System verifies GPS position integrity is within the horizontal limits to
complete the LP non-precision approach

Navigation
If pilot exceeds the horizontal alarm limits:

• Approach downgrades to non-precision
• “LNAV” annunciates on Map to inform you of the change
• Advisory message: “GPS approach downgraded. Use LNAV minima.”
• Pilot continues approach using LNAV non-precision minimums, if applicable
If GPS integrity does not meet the non-precision horizontal alarm limits:
• Advisory message: “Abort Approach. GPS approach is no longer available.”
• Pilot acknowledges message
• Unit reverts to terminal limits of 1 NM to support navigation to the missed
approach
If the approach indicates “LP+V,” then advisory vertical guidance may be removed
without indication. This is due to the vertical guidance not being within tolerances.
This does not constitute a downgrade. You may still fly the approach to LP
minimums.
Flying an LP approach with advisory vertical guidance (LP+V) does not change how
the approach should be flown. The pilot is still responsible for descending to the
correct altitude at each step down.
The result is still an MDA and missed approach point.
When crossing the final approach fix:

• Waypoint sequences to the missed approach point
(e.g., RW31, the runway threshold)
• Pilot flies toward missed approach point, keeping the needle on the external
CDI (or HSI) at center, observing published altitude minimums
• Final course segment becomes the active flight plan leg on Map
Approaching missed approach point:
• Advisory message: “Arriving at Waypoint.”

Navigation
Crossing missed approach point:

• Sequencing suspends
• Pop-up message: “Missed Approach Waypoint Reached”
• Pilot decides whether to remain suspended or activate the missed approach
• Tapping Remain Suspended allows you to continue with sequencing

suspended
• Tapping Activate GPS Missed Approach allows you to continue with
guidance to the missed approach hold point
Prepare aircraft for missed approach operation:
• Pilot taps UNSUSP (sequences missed approach)
NOTE: For missed approaches with heading legs, fly manually until you reach the
first active course leg.
• Pilot follows the unit provided guidance to the missed approach hold point
and holds

Navigation
Visual Approach
Points About Visual Approaches
• Provide advisory horizontal and optional vertical guidance for the selected
runway
• Lateral guidance is always provided for visual approaches
• Helps stabilize the runway approach
• Three methods for loading and activation
• Valid terrain database
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Not all airports in the database support visual approaches
Published data is used to determine the visual approach GPA and threshold crossing
height (TCH) for the selected runway. If no published data is available, the default is
3 degrees GPA and 50 ft TCH.
You may load and activate a visual approach from the following apps.
• Map • Procedures • Waypoint Info
Upon loading the visual approach,

a pop-up informs you when
vertical guidance is available.
If available, the pop-up contains
the glidepath angle (GPA) and
threshold crossing (TCH).
If unavailable, it reads: “NO VERTICAL GUIDANCE”

Terrain and obstacle obstructions along the approach path determine the availability
of vertical guidance advisories for visual approaches.
• If no known obstructions are within the approach path, vertical guidance is
provided to a maximum distance of 28 NM from the runway.
• If there are known obstructions further than 3 NM, but within the 28 NM
maximum distance from the runway along the approach, vertical guidance
is limited to the approach path after crossing the known obstructions. After
loading the approach, a shortened magenta line shows on the map.
If obstructions are within 3 NM to the runway, along the approach path, advisory
vertical guidance is not available.

Navigation
LOAD A VISUAL APPROACH FROM MAP

When the aircraft is within 10 NM of the destination airport, the Visual Approach
selector key becomes active. This key may appear in one of two places:
On the map or at the left of the screen if the supporting airport is selected.
1. Select the airport icon.
2. Tap Visual.
3. Select from the list of available visual approaches.
Once selected, the visual approach immediately loads and activates.
For more about Visual Approach key configuration, refer to Map Setup.
LOAD A VISUAL APPROACH FROM PROCEDURES

Two methods:
Home > PROC > Approach
OR
Home > Waypoint Info > Airport > PROC, then select an approach
(similar to published instrument approaches)

Navigation
Autopilot Outputs
CAUTION
Engage the autopilot heading mode and set the heading bug appropriately to use
the autopilot on heading legs using the autopilot’s NAV, GPSS, or APR mode. Not all
autopilots follow guidance on these leg types, Some revert to a roll only or wings
level mode.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Applicable to King KAP 140 and KFC 225 autopilots
Outputs for the King KAP 10/KFC 225 autopilot units require
manual activation.
APR Guidance Advisory, GTN 650Xi

If configured,
this function
prompts you to
enable autopilot
outputs during
the approach
procedure.
Once enabled, the unit provides guidance information consistent with what the
autopilot expects (i.e., angular CDI scaling and glideslope capture for LPV or other
vertically guided GPS approaches).
ENABLE AUTOPILOT OUTPUTS

1. Acknowledge the advisory message.
2. Tap Enable APR Output.
3. Follow the unit provided guidance.


4 Planning
VCALC ..........................................................................................................................4-4
TRIP PLANNING .....................................................................................................4-7
FUEL PLANNING ................................................................................................. 4-11
DALT/TAS/WIND CALCULATOR ................................................................. 4-15
RAIM PREDICTION............................................................................................. 4-18
CHECKLISTS........................................................................................................... 4-20
Planning
PLANNING
APPS & FUNCTIONS
The following features make flight planning easier and more efficient.
VCALC Trip Planning

Input: Input:
• Target Altitude • Route
• Altitude Profile • Depart Date/Time
• Target Waypoint • Ground Speed
GTN computes: GTN computes:

• Time to TOD • DIS
• VS Required • DTK
• ESA
• ETA
• ETE
• Sunrise/Sunset
RAIM Prediction Checklists

Input: • Review and complete aircraft
• Waypoint checklists
• Arrival Date/Time
GTN computes:
• RAIM Status

Planning
Fuel Planning DALT/TAS/Winds

Input: Input:
• Route • Air Data
• Fuel Data • Track
• Ground Speed • Heading
• Ground Speed
GTN computes: GTN computes:

• Fuel Required • Density ALT
• Reserve • TAS
• Range • Wind Direction
• Efficiency • Wind Speed
• Endurance • Head Wind
VCALC and VNAV are mutually exclusive. Which app you have is dependent upon
installer configuration. For information about VNAV functions and operations, read
En Route Vertical Navigation in section 3.

Planning
VCALC
Calculate time to TOD and vertical speed required to reach
target altitude at the specified location.
WARNING
Do not rely on VCALC messages as the only means of either avoiding
terrain/obstacles or following ATC guidance. VCALC provides advisory
information only and must be used in concert with all other available navigation
data sources.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
This feature is inhibited when:
• Groundspeed is < 35 knots
• No active flight plan or direct-to destination is available
• One of the following modes is active: SUSP, Vectors-to-Final, OBS
• Navigating to a waypoint after the FAF
Define a VCALC Profile

WHERE TO FIND IT With the Vertical Calculator (VCALC) feature, you
can create a 3D profile to guide you from your
Home present position and altitude to a final (target)
Utilities altitude at a specified location. Once defined, you
VCALC may configure message alerts and additional data
on Map to stay informed of your progress.
Creating a profile is helpful when you want to descend to a certain altitude near an
airport.

Planning
Profile selections allow you to:

VCALC Profile Selections
• Specify a target altitude and offset
Target ALT • Choose a target type
Specify target
• Specify vertical speed
altitude
• Select a target waypoint from the
Altitude Type
Above WPT active flight plan
MSL
VS Profile
Specify vertical
speed
Offset
Specify offset
value
Target Waypoint
Select flight
plan waypoint
Target ALT • Specify the final (target) altitude for the course
• Altitude reference used for VCALC calculations
Altitude Type • Toggles between “MSL” and “Above WPT”
• Above WPT is available for airports only
VS Profile • Specify the vertical speed value
• Distance value representing the geographical location at
the target altitude
Offset
• Distance is measured from the target waypoint along
the flight path
• Select whether the offset distance defines a point before
or after reaching the target waypoint
Before/After
• “After” option not available for last destination in flight
plan (key changes to a non-selectable “Before” indication)
• Reference location specified in the flight plan or active
direct-to that will be used for planning a descent
Target
• When using a flight plan, the target waypoint is a reference
Waypoint
that can be specified from the waypoints in the flight plan
• Last waypoint in the flight plan is the default target setting

Planning
STATUS & VS REQUIRED INDICATIONS
Status VS Required
VCALC status messages Shows the vertical speed
display here. required to reach target
altitude and offset.
VCALC Setup
Setup options allow you to restore
default app settings and display VCALC
related advisory messages.
Restore Defaults Display Messages
• Resets VCALC settings to • Allows VCALC related

their default values advisory messages to display
• Excludes Target Waypoint on the Messages page
GTN 650Xi SERIES
Tap Menu to access setup controls.

VCALC Menu
Restore Defaults
Display Messages
GTN 750Xi SERIES

Setup controls reside on the profile page.

Planning
Trip Planning
View DTK, DIS, ETE, ESA, and ETA information for a direct
course between two specified waypoints or any
programmed flight plan.
WHERE TO FIND IT Trip data calculations are based on route and

ground speed.
Home
Utilities
Trip Planning
Trip Planning Modes

Tapping Mode toggles the active trip planning mode
between Point to Point and Flight Plan. Point to Point
is the default mode setting.
Point-to-Point Mode Flight Plan Mode
Calculate trip data between two Calculate trip data for a specific flight
waypoints in the database, or between plan leg, or for the cumulative
the aircraft’s present position and a flight plan.
selected waypoint.
Use the mode specific controls to define the flight path (leg or route). Required input
values are dependent upon mode selection.
Departure date and time and ground speed data are required independent of mode
selection.

Planning
MODE SELECTION DESCRIPTION

• Enters the current aircraft coordinates as the
departure location (or From waypoint)
P. Position
• Aircraft latitude and longitude fields replace
the From waypoint key
Point-to-
• Specify a waypoint from the database as the
Point
From departure location (or From waypoint)
• Not available when P. Position is active
To
destination (or To waypoint)
• Opens a list of available flight plans
• Options include the active flight plan or one
Flight Plan from the catalog
Flight • Defaults to the active flight plan if no
Plan selection is made
• Options dependent upon flight plan selection
Leg • Defaults to cumulative leg option if no
selection is made
• Specify the departure time (local time at From
Depart Time
waypoint)
Depart Date • Specify the year, month, and day of departure
Use Sensor • Utilize current GPS ground speed data
Data
Behavior based on state of Use Sensor Data key.
Both Use Sensor Data key inactive:
• Function selectable
• Specify ground speed
Ground Speed
Use Sensor Data key active:
• Function not selectable
• Displays current GPS ground speed when the
Use Sensor Data key is active
COMPLETED LEG INDICATION

Dashes indicate when the selected flight plan leg is completed
or the data cannot be computed.

Planning
Trip Data
Trip data calculations are based on
Calculated trip data the selected trip planning mode and
include: specified input values.
• Desired track (DTK) This information is for planning
• Distance (DIS) purposes only.
• Destination sunrise/sunset
times
• Est. time en route (ETE)
• Est. time of arrival (ETA)
• En route safe altitude (ESA)
DESTINATION SUNRISE/SUNSET TIMES

WHERE TO FIND IT The time zone on which destination
sunrise/sunset calculations are based depends
System on the system Time Format setting. This option
Setup resides in the System – Setup Date/Time feature.
Date/Time
Local 12 or 24 hour. Calculations are based on the time zone of the From waypoint.
A flight plan originating in the Pacific time zone and ending in the Central time zone
would show sunrise/sunset times at the destination in Pacific time.
UTC. Calculations use Universal Time Coordinated (time zones are not considered).
There is no potential offset.
ETA CALCULATIONS
The method for calculating ETA varies based on mode selection.
Point-to-Point mode. ETA = ETE + departure time
Flight Plan mode. Calculations depend on flight plan selection:
If Then
ETA reflects the present position and active leg:

Active Flight
ETA = current time + ETE of each leg from the active leg
Plan
up to and including the selected leg
ETA = departure time + ETE of each leg up to and including

Catalog Route
the selected leg
If you select the entire flight plan, the last leg of the flight plan is treated as the
selected leg. This is true whether the selected flight plan is active or inactive.

Planning
GTN 650Xi SERIES
To calculate trip data, enter all required input values and

then tap Compute Data.
Calculations for the selected

leg or route display on a
dedicated data page.
To return to the data entry
page, tap Edit Input Data.
GTN 750Xi SERIES

Trip data calculates automatically upon entry. Calculations for the selected leg or
route display on the lower half of the page.
COMPUTE TRIP DATA

1. Select a trip planning mode.
2. Define a leg or route.
• If “Flight Plan” is set, select the flight plan and leg. Selecting the active
flight plan sets the starting waypoint at the aircraft’s current position.
• If “Point to Point” is set, select From and To waypoints, or use the
aircraft’s current position as the From waypoint.
3. Specify the departure date and time.
4. Specify ground speed or elect to use sensor data.
5. Tap Compute Data (GTN 650Xi Series only).
6. Tap Next or Prev to view calculations for other legs in the flight plan
(if applicable).

Planning
Fuel Planning
View fuel conditions along any flight plan (active or cataloged)
or between two waypoints (including the active direct-to).
WHERE TO FIND IT The fuel planning feature computes fuel

conditions based on route, ground speed,
Home fuel on board, and fuel flow.
Utilities Input values may be entered manually or
Fuel Planning supplied by sensors, if connected.
Fuel Planning Modes

Tapping Mode toggles the active fuel planning mode
between Point to Point and Flight Plan. Point to Point
is the default mode setting.
Point-to-Point Mode Flight Plan Mode
Calculate fuel between two waypoints Calculate fuel for a specific flight plan
in the database, or between the leg, or for the cumulative
aircraft’s present position and a flight plan.
selected waypoint.
Use the mode specific controls to define the flight path (leg or route). Required input
values are dependent upon mode selection.
Fuel on board, fuel flow, and ground speed data are required independent of mode
selection.
For Planning Purposes Only

• When interfaced with a Garmin EIS, Fuel on Board and Fuel Flow values are
supplied by EIS. If an EIS is not present, or if the Use Sensor Data function is not
active, these values are specified by the pilot and are not an indication of actual
fuel on board or fuel flow.
• Fuel Required to <destination> is a calculated prediction. It is not a direct
indication of actual fuel quantity once the aircraft reaches its destination.
• All data entries on this page are used exclusively by the Fuel Planning app.
• Fuel computations are for planning purposes only.

Planning
MODE SELECTION DESCRIPTION

• Enters the current aircraft coordinates as the
departure location (or From waypoint)
P. Position
• Aircraft latitude and longitude fields replace
the From waypoint key
Point-to-
Point
From departure location (or From waypoint)
• Not available when P. Position is active
To
destination (or To waypoint)
• Opens a list of available flight plans
• Options include the active flight plan or one
Flight Plan from the catalog
Flight • Defaults to the active flight plan if no
Plan selection is made
• Options dependent upon flight plan selection
Leg • Defaults to cumulative leg option if no
selection is made
• Specify the amount of fuel on board (gallons)
Fuel on Board • Amount decreases once per second based on
specified fuel flow value or sensor data
• Specify the current fuel flow rate
Fuel Flow
Both (gallons per hour)
• Toggle on to utilize current GPS ground
Use Sensor
speed data and fuel sensor data (if available)
Data1
• Toggle off for manual data entry
Ground Speed • Specify ground speed
1 When inactive, ground speed and fuel data functions are selectable. When active, these functions are not
selectable.
Adjust fuel on board and fuel flow values as necessary to account for changes in
performance.

Planning
Fuel Data
Compute and display fuel data based
Calculated fuel data on the selected fuel planning mode
include: and specified input values.
• Fuel required for leg This information is for planning
• Fuel after leg purposes only.
• Reserve after leg
• Range
• Efficiency
• Endurance
GTN 650Xi SERIES
To calculate fuel data, enter all required input values and

then tap Compute Data.
Calculations for the selected

leg or route display on a
GTN 750Xi SERIES

Fuel data calculates automatically upon entry. Calculations for the selected leg or
route display on the lower half of the page.

Planning
COMPUTE FUEL DATA

1. Select a fuel planning mode.
2. Define a leg or route.
• If “Flight Plan” is set, select the flight plan and leg. Selecting the active
flight plan sets the starting waypoint at the aircraft’s current position.
• If “Point to Point” is set, select From and To waypoints, or use the
aircraft’s current position as the From waypoint.
3. Specify the amount of fuel on board and average fuel flow rate.
4. Specify ground speed or elect to use sensor data.
5. Tap Compute Data (GTN 650Xi Series only).
6. Tap Next or Prev to view calculations for other legs in the flight plan
(if applicable).
If total fuel quantity or fuel flow values are supplied via sensor, GTN uses the data
from this app to calculate the Fuel Range Ring overlay on Map. Fuel range rings
indicate an estimate of remaining flight distance based on fuel onboard, fuel
consumptions rates, and current ground speed.
Map depicts two separate rings: one displaying range to reserve fuel, the other
displaying total endurance range. Both offer additional situational awareness
regarding fuel remaining and endurance.

Planning
DALT/TAS/Wind Calculator
Calculate density altitude, true airspeed, and winds.
• Air data computer for automatic data entry
• Valid sensor data
An air data computer is not required for manual data entry.
WHERE TO FIND IT This function computes density altitude,

true airspeed, and wind data to provide
Home the theoretical altitude at which your
Utilities aircraft performs. Information is based on
DALT/TAS/Winds several input variables, which may be
provided manually or via an air data
computer.

Planning
Edit Input Data

Tapping Use Sensor Data inputs data from the
connected sensors. When active, the available sensor
data populate the appropriate fields.
Sensor data values are not selectable for editing. Toggle the function off for manual
data entry.
• Specify indicated altitude value

Indicated ALT • Use +/- keys to indicate above or below sea level
• Mutually exclusive with Pressure ALT1
BARO • Specify barometric pressure value2
CAS • Specify calibrated air speed value
• Specify true air temperature
TAT
• Use +/- keys to indicate above or below 0º
HDG • Specify heading value
TRK • Specify track angle value
• Inputs reference values
Use Sensor (internal or received from air data computer)
Data • Replaces indicated altitude with pressure altitude received
from fuel/air data computer
Ground Speed • Specify ground speed
1
Toggles to Pressure ALT indication when sensor data is in use and the sensor is providing pressure altitude.
2 Not present if Use Sensor Data is active and the ADC is providing pressure altitude.

Planning
DALT/TAS/Wind Calculations
Compute and display density altitude, true airspeed, and current wind conditions.
Calculations are based on current input values.
This information is for planning purposes only.
Density Altitude True Airspeed Wind Data
• Pressure altitude • Calibrated airspeed • Wind direction and

corrected for corrected for altitude speed
nonstandard and nonstandard • Headwind/tailwind
temperature temperature component
Density altitude and true airspeed calculations are dependent upon indicated altitude, barometric pressure,
and total air temperature. Total air temperature includes temperature and the heating effect of speed, as
read on a standard outside temperature gauge.
Wind data calculations are dependent upon aircraft heading and track, true airspeed, and ground speed.
Wind direction is dependent upon the NAV Angle system unit setting.
If wind speed is zero, wind direction displays as dashes.
GTN 650Xi SERIES
To calculate density altitude, true airspeed, and wind data,

enter all required input values and then tap Compute Data.
Calculations display on a
GTN 750Xi SERIES

Data calculates automatically upon entry.
INVALID INPUT DATA INDICATION

Dashes indicate when input values are invalid.

Planning
RAIM Prediction
Determine GPS coverage availability for the current location
or a specified waypoint at any time and date. RAIM
performs checks to ensure that the navigator has adequate
satellite geometry during flight.
NOTE
RAIM availability prediction is for use in areas where WAAS coverage is not available. It
is not required in areas where WAAS coverage is available.
• Active flight plan or off-route direct-to waypoint (arrival date and time)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
FAA’s TSO requirements for non-precision approaches specify significantly greater satellite
coverage than is required during other phases of flight. As a result, RAIM may not be available
for all approaches.
RAIM prediction results are valid for up to 90 days from the current date. Arrival dates beyond
90 days, or in the past, may not provide accurate results.
This feature predicts the availability of fault detection integrity. It cannot predict the availability
of LPV or L/VNAV approaches.
Use a non-GPS based approach when RAIM is not available. To determine WAAS
availability, including for LPV approaches, visit the FAA’s NOTAM service.
WHERE TO FIND IT This feature can help you plan for a

pending flight by confirming GPS
Home operation before an approach.
Utilities
RAIM Prediction
RAIM Features
• Automatically monitors RAIM during approach operations and warns when
RAIM is not available
• Near 100% availability in Oceanic, En route, and Terminal phases of flight
• Waypoint Identifier, Arrival Date, and Arrival Time setup keys
• Compute RAIM key

Planning
Calculate RAIM Status

Calculate RAIM availability for the specified waypoint,
date, and time. Prediction results annunciate once the
calculation is complete.
WAYPOINT SEARCH OPTIONS

A Waypoint Identifier key allows you to specify a destination airport using multiple
search options.
ARRIVAL DATE & TIME

These setup controls allow you to set the expected date and time of arrival at the
specified airport. Values default to the current date and time in the absence of an
active flight plan and off-route direct-to waypoint.
CHECK RAIM AVAILABILITY

1. Specify a destination waypoint.
2. Specify the expected arrival date and time.
3. Tap Compute RAIM.
RAIM STATUS INDICATIONS

Dashes indicate when the destination waypoint is invalid.
ANNUNCIATION DESCRIPTION
Computing Status is pending.
RAIM Available RAIM is available at the specified waypoint.
RAIM Unavailable RAIM is not available at the specified waypoint.

Planning
Checklists
Review an electronic version of your aircraft checklist(s).
Depending on the number of inspection items, these lists
may be scrollable.
This icon appears only when GTN detects a checklist on your
SD card.
NOTE
Garmin strongly recommends the author of the checklist file to carry out a functional
system test prior to in-flight use. Validation should be carried out on the GTN Xi Series
hardware while the aircraft is on ground.
• SD card for storing checklist files
• Garmin Aviation Checklist Editor software tool for authoring and grouping
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Check boxes automatically clear following a unit power cycle
• Feature title dependent upon installer configuration
WHERE TO FIND IT Depending on configuration, this

feature may be titled “Checklists”
Home or “Task Lists.”
Utilities
Checklists/Task Lists
Disclaimer User generated checklists are created

using the free Aviation Checklist Editor
Operational approval may be software available at flyGarmin.com.
required for the use of any
electronic checklist developed Define properties for groups,
for certified aircraft. Any checklist checklists, and new entries using the
created with the checklist tool features provided in the software tool.
for certified aircraft may require Save checklists in the chklist.ace
additional operational format. Copy the file to the root folder
airworthiness approval and of an SD card.
cannot replace the official Flight
Manual and/or checklist required
by the Type Certificate or
Supplemental Type Certificate. For download instructions and system
Do not use an unapproved requirements, visit the Aviation
checklist during flight Product Support page at
operations. flyGarmin.com.

Planning
View a Checklist
Tap Menu to access available group and
Checklist Menu checklist selections. Functions for clearing
Group check boxes on the active list and all other
checklists on the datacard also reside here.
Select Checklist
Group
Checklist
Select Checklist
Clear Current Checklist
Clear All Checklists
Select from the list of existing groups. Group properties are

Group
defined during checklist creation.
Checklist Select a checklist for viewing and completion.
Clear Current
Clears all check boxes for the active list.
Checklist
Clear All Clears the check boxes for all available checklists on the
Checklists installed SD card.
CHECK BOXES
To mark an item as completed, tap the corresponding check box.
The item description turns green

A check mark appears next to the list item
Tapping the box again deselects

the item.
Deselected

Planning
LIST STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS

Completion status annunciates at the bottom of the list.
One or more list items are not marked as complete.

Review the list and complete the remaining inspection
items.
All check boxes are marked as complete.
Proceed to the next checklist or select a different list
from the menu.
COMPLETE A CHECKLIST
1. Insert SD card containing the file titled chklist.ace.
2. Open the Checklist menu (Home > Utilities > Checklists > Menu).
3. Select a group.
4. Select a checklist.
5. Select Clear Current Checklist or Clear All Checklists (if necessary).
6. Review and complete all inspection items.
Upon completion, select from the following options.

• Advance to the next available checklist: Tap Go to Next Checklist.
• Exit the function: Tap Back.
• Select another checklist: Tap Menu and select another group
and/or checklist.

5 Hazard Awareness
WEATHER AWARENESS .....................................................................................5-3
TRAFFIC AWARENESS ...................................................................................... 5-76
TERRAIN AWARENESS.................................................................................. 5-104

Hazard Awareness
HAZARD AWARENESS
APPS & FUNCTIONS
Menu selections vary based on features and optional equipment installed with
Garmin avionics.
Traffic Weather
• Display traffic Access available weather apps.
• Control traffic system Depending on unit configuration
• Set up the traffic display these may include:
• SiriusXM WX
• FIS-B WX
• Connext WX
• Stormscope
• Radar
Terrain
• Display terrain & obstacles
• Inhibit alerting
• Test alerting

Hazard Awareness
Weather Awareness
For installations with multiple weather sources, tapping the
Weather icon on the Home page opens a menu. Available
options are dependent upon the installed weather sources.
For installations with only a single weather source, tapping
the icon takes you directly to the configured application.
Datalink Weather
GTN presents datalink weather data as overlays
on the dedicated weather app. Available
functions are dependent upon the active
weather source(s).
The unit allows up to three datalink weather
options:
• SiriusXM • FIS-B • Connext
• FIS-B and GDL 88 or GTX 345 (FIS-B Weather)
• GSR 56 Iridium satellite transceiver (Connext Weather)
• GDL 69/69A SiriusXM receiver (SiriusXM Weather)

Hazard Awareness
All datalink weather apps share the same basic layout and features.
2
3
5
Common WX Display Features
Ownship Icon
1
Depicts current aircraft position and orientation.
North Indicator
2
Page Orientation Label

3
Reflects the selected page orientation.
Basemap
4
Presents a graphical depiction of land and water data.
Product Timestamp
5
Approximate time of data collection for each active weather product.

Hazard Awareness
WX Info Banner
Tapping any weather icon displays an information banner. When applicable, a
pop-up window displays additional data.
WX Info Banner Banner Information

• Pan mode symbol
• Bearing and distance to map
pointer from aircraft’s
current position
WX Display Orientation
Each weather app allows you to set the orientation of the weather display.
Tap Menu > Orientation, and select from the following options.
North Up Track Up Heading Up
Orients page to True Orients page to current Orients page to current

north aircraft GPS track aircraft heading
(requires heading data
source interface)
Page orientation label changes to reflect the selected orientation.
Ownship Icon
Position & Orientation
• The tip represents actual
aircraft location
• Symbol type is dependent
upon configuration
• This feature is absent if a GPS
source is not available

Hazard Awareness
WX Display/Map Settings
Several weather map display settings are based on selections made in the setup
menu of the primary Map application.
From the Home page:

Tap Map > Menu > Map Setup, and select the appropriate tab. Applicable map
settings are as follows:
Map Tab Aviation Tab Land Tab
Settings: Settings: Settings:

• North Up Above • Runway Extensions • Road Detail
range • Airport Range • City Detail
• Intersection Range • State/Province
• NDB Range Names
• VOR Range • River/Lake Detail
• VRP Range
• User Waypoint
Range
Changes to these map settings take effect immediately on the configured datalink
weather app(s).

Hazard Awareness
Datalink Weather Products

WARNING
Do not rely solely on datalink weather for weather information. Datalink
weather provides a snapshot in time. It may not accurately reflect the current
weather situation.
NOTE
Datalink weather is not intended to replace weather briefings or in-flight weather reports
from FSS or ATC.
In addition to the dedicated weather app, datalink weather products may display as
one or more of the following, depending on weather source, product type and
availability. For details, refer to the Datalink Weather Products List.
Map Airport Info

Some product overlays are available Textual information about local
for display on Map. For options, weather conditions is accessible
open the Map Setup menu. on the WX Data tab.
WX Pop-up Raw Text Reports

Some product overlays display Textual reports are available for
textual information when selected certain FIS-B weather products.
on Weather or Map. These are accessible via the
Datalink Status page.

Hazard Awareness
DATALINK WEATHER PRODUCTS LIST

When available, datalink weather products display as follows.
DATALINK WEATHER DISPLAY

WEATHER WX WX MAP AIRPORT RAW TEXT
PRODUCT OVERLAY POP-UP OVERLAY INFO REPORT
AIREP C, F, S C, F, S
AIRMET (Graphical) F F
AIRMET (Textual) C, S C, S
Cell Movement/SCIT S S S
Center Weather
F F F
Advisory
City Forecast S S S
Cloud Top F, S S
IR Satellite C C
County Warnings S S
Cyclone Track S
Echo Tops S S
Freezing Levels F, S
Icing Potential/SLD F, S
Lightning (Datalink) C, F, S C, F, S
METAR w/Decoding C, F, S C, F, S C, F, S C, F, S F
NEXRAD/PRECIP C, F, S C, F, S
NOTAM-D F F
NOTAM-FDC F F
PIREP C, F, S C, F, S F
SIGMET C, F, S C, F, S F
Surface Analysis S
TAF C, F, S C, F, S F, S F
Temps Aloft F F
TFR C, F, S C, F, S C, F, S F
Turbulence F, S
Winds Aloft C, F, S F
Connext Product: C FIS-B Product: F SiriusXM Product: S

Hazard Awareness
Product Age
NOTE
Data contained within a composite weather product may be older than its weather
product age and should never be considered current.
A timestamp identifies the approximate time of data collection for each weather
product. For quick reference, the age of each active weather product is calculated
and shown in a color-coded side bar on Weather and Map.
TIMESTAMP COLOR DEFINITIONS
Yellow
Weather product considered stale. Its age is older than
half its expiration time.
A weather product may be amber when its issue date and
time occurs in the future by more than the complete
expiration time for the requested weather product
(e.g., some TFRs).
Green
Weather product considered current. Its age is newer than
half its expiration time.
Tapping timestamp window displays the time for all green
colored weather products.
Gray
Weather product data is one of the following:
• Expired
• Not received
• Not supported at the selected altitude
“No Data” or “ALT UNAVBL” displays next to the weather
product title.

Hazard Awareness
SiriusXM WX Product Age

• Broadcast intervals are defined and controlled by SiriusXM Satellite Radio and
its data vendors
• Data that does not refresh within its defined interval is considered expired and
removed from the display
• Product age may not reflect the time difference between when the data was
assembled by SiriusXM and the current GPS time. It is an indication of the time
elapsed from when it is received by GTN
• Timestamp collapses when all WX products are current
Connext WX Product Age

• Product age is based on time difference between when the data was assembled
by Connext and the current GPS time
• Product expiration is based on intervals defined for each product
• Pilot controls weather product requests
• Refresh intervals are defined and controlled by Connext Satellite Radio services
and its data vendors
• Data is removed upon expiration, ensuring that displayed data is always
consistent with what is currently being provided by Connext Satellite Radio
services
FIS-B weather product update and transmission intervals are published in the
SBS Description Document associated with TSO-C157b. This information is available
electronically via the FAA’s Dynamic Regulatory System: https://drs.faa.gov

Hazard Awareness
Product Legends
A scrollable legend provides relevant product
colors and symbols. Definitions are organized by
product function.
To display the legend for an active weather
product, tap Menu > Legend.
Enabling this feature on one application does not
enable it on all datalink weather apps.
GTN 650Xi SERIES

Toggling this feature on shows datalink weather
product legends on a dedicated page.
GTN 750Xi SERIES
Toggling this feature on shows datalink product
legends along the left side of the display.
Altitude Adjustment Keys

Directional keys adjust altitude for altitude-based
weather products. Selectable altitude values vary
by weather service and product. Includes:
• Icing • Turbulence • Winds Aloft
Airport Icons
Tapping the METAR symbol displays information
about local weather conditions.
The same is true for airports containing the City
Forecast product symbol (SiriusXM Weather only).

Hazard Awareness
Precipitation
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM | CONNEXT
WARNING
Never use NEXRAD weather for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of
hazardous weather. NEXRAD images are snapshots of past weather data. They
are not safe for use as real time depictions of nearby weather activity.
FIS-B NEXRAD
CONUS NEXRAD Regional NEXRAD
NEXRAD weather radar displays a mosaic of precipitation data, colored according to

reflectivity. Composite reflectivity images depict the highest radar energy received
from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. Base reflectivity images depict
radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle. Per AC 00-63A, FIS-B CONUS and
Regional NEXRAD are composite reflectivity images.
The precipitation intensity level reflected by each pixel represents the highest level of
composite radar reflectivity data sampled in that location.
A clear understanding of ground-based Doppler weather radar capabilities will

allow you to interpret the NEXRAD weather imagery in the safest way possible. The
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration hosts a description of the
technology on its website: https://www.weather.gov/jetstream/doppler_intro

Hazard Awareness
RADAR DATA ANIMATIONS

To depict trending weather movements over time, an animation
function stitches the last three to six received radar images
together in sequence, from oldest to newest, and replays them
on a continuous loop.
Play and stop controls are active when three or more images are
available for playback.
CONNEXT PRECIP
Precipitation products are available for areas around
the world. For current coverage areas and product
information, visit www.garmin.com/connext.
FIS-B NEXRAD
FIS-B NEXRAD is uplinked to the aircraft as two separate weather products:
CONUS and Regional NEXRAD. Both products display individually or simultaneously,
separated by a white hash-marked boundary, based on source selection.
Depending on the locations of received FIS-B ground stations, Regional NEXRAD
coverage can extend more than 250 NM around an aircraft’s position. Aircraft flying
at higher altitudes typically receive data from more ground stations than aircraft
flying at low altitudes.
FIS-B NEXRAD does not differentiate between liquid and frozen precipitation types.

Hazard Awareness
Regional Regional Missing Data Indications

Boundary Echo Block
A semi-transparent mask
CONUS Data Not indicates regions where data
Echo Block Received may be missing or incomplete.
for Region
Color is dependent upon the
presence of topographical data.
The mask is purple when there
is no underlying topographical
data, such as on the FIS-B
weather display, or on Map
when the TOPO overlay is off.
On Map, the mask is dark gray
when the TOPO overlay is on,
so that the underlying
topographical features can still
be interpreted.
CONUS & Regional NEXRAD

Combined
Source Options:
Source options are selectable from the FIS-B Weather menu or the NEXRAD key
located in the control bar. The key label changes to reflect the active source.
CONUS
• Large, low-resolution weather image for the entire
continental U.S.
• Pixels are 7.5 min (7.5 NM = 13.89 km) wide by 5 min
(5 NM = 9.26 km) wide
Regional
• High-resolution weather image with limited range, centered
around each broadcasting ground station
• Pixels are 1.5 min (1.5 NM = 2.78 km) wide by 1 min
(1 NM = 1.852 km) tall
• Each weather pixel varies with latitude. Above 60º latitude,
pixel block width doubles to 3 min/NM for regional maps
Combined
• Both CONUS and Regional NEXRAD images display
simultaneously
• White hash mark indicates regional boundary

Hazard Awareness
SIRIUSXM NEXRAD
SiriusXM offers NEXRAD radar imagery from CONUS and non-CONUS sources.
Weather menu options are Composite and Base.
Depending on the SXM service and installed GDL

hardware, radar base reflectivity imaging may have
broader coverage within North America or be limited
to only Canada.
Source Options:
Composite (CONUS) Base

Composite reflectivity image of radar Base reflectivity image. Coverage
for the conterminous U.S. and availability are dependent
upon subscription.
Precipitation above 52º N may display as mixed precipitation regardless of actual

precipitation type. Precipitation of an unknown type always displays as rain.

Hazard Awareness
Textual AIRMETs
AVAILABLE WITH:
SIRIUSXM | CONNEXT
An AIRMET advises of weather that may be particularly hazardous to single engine,

light aircraft and VFR pilots. Overlays draw the geographical boundaries of received
AIRMETs on the dedicated weather page.
SiriusXM Textual AIRMETs

Tapping an AIRMET opens a
detailed report.
AIRMET TYPES
Icing
Areas of moderate airframe icing including areal extent.
Turbulence
Areas of moderate turbulence including vertical extent.
IFR
Weather conditions with ceilings <1,000 ft and/or visibility
<3 mi.
MTN OBSR
Widespread mountain obscuration due to clouds, precipitation,
smoke, haze, mist, or fog.
Surface Winds
Sustained surface winds >30 kt and/or potential non-convective
wind shear below 2,000 ft AGL.

Hazard Awareness
Graphical AIRMETs
AVAILABLE WITH: FIS-B
Graphical AIRMETs (G-AIRMETs) display more weather phenomena than textual

AIRMETs, while eliminating the need to interpret raw text.
Tapping a G-AIRMET displays

textual details.
Updates occur four times daily.
Filtering options allow you to mitigate page clutter. Forecast and filter selections are
accessible from the FIS-B Weather menu.
Forecast Settings:
Off Current (Auto) All Forecasts
Disables automatic Displays active graphical Displays the most recent,

functionality. records based on the non-expired graphical
Filter options not current UTC. records.
available. Function automatically
switches from 0 hr to
3 hr forecasts.
Forecast periods include 0 hr, 3 hr, and 6 hr.

Hazard Awareness
G-AIRMET FILTERS
Freezing Level MTN OBSCR
Icing Surface Winds
IFR Turbulence
Low-level
Wind Shear
To enable graphical AIRMETs:

1. Home > Weather > FIS-B Weather > Menu.
2. Tap G-AIRMET and select between Current (Auto) and All Forecasts.
3. Tap G-AIRMET Filters and select one or more filters.

Hazard Awareness
AIREPs
AVAILABLE WITH:
AIREPs are routine, automated reports of in-flight weather conditions such as wind
and temperature.
SiriusXM AIREPs
AIREPs display as a green map icon.
Tapping this icon displays a report.

Hazard Awareness
Cell Movements
AVAILABLE WITH: SIRIUSXM
Information derived from NEXRAD displays the location of storm cells within a strong
storm. Vector symbols represent cell position and direction of movement.
Tapping one of these symbols

displays details about the cell’s
speed and direction as well as the
storm’s top altitude.
Top Heights
Top height is reported as
maximum altitude of reflected
precipitation. Storm height may
be higher than radar reflections.
Top heights are reported in MSL.

Hazard Awareness
Center Weather Advisory

AVAILABLE WITH: FIS-B
These advisories communicate en route and terminal weather conditions expected to

occur within the next two hours. Information is valid for up to 2 hours.
Tapping a CWA symbol displays textual details.
City Forecast
Provides two-day forecasts for major U.S. cities, including daily forecast high and low
temperatures, chance of precipitation, and sky conditions.
City Forecast offers a 48 hour look ahead.

Tapping a City Forecast symbol
displays weather details.
Forecast Period Options:

• Current • 12 hour • 24 hour • 36 hour • 48 hour

Hazard Awareness
Clouds
CLOUD TOPS
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM
FIS-B Cloud Tops

Indicates the altitude of the highest
visible portions of a cloud at the
time of measurement.
• SiriusXM cloud top altitude
data is estimated from IR
satellite imagery
• FIS-B cloud top data is
generated by a computer
model and has limited accuracy
compared to actual conditions
IR SATELLITE
AVAILABLE WITH: CONNEXT
Infrared Satellite weather

information is available for North
America and Europe. Updates occur
every 30 minutes.
• Lighter grays depict colder
temperatures
• Darker grays depict warmer
temperatures

Hazard Awareness
County Warnings
County warnings are provided for the counties within the continental United States.
Specific public awareness and protection alerts, such as fires and natural disasters,
are included with warnings for tornadoes, thunderstorms, floods and flash floods.
Tapping a County Warning symbol

displays weather details.
Symbols include: • Severe T-Storm • Tornado • Flooding
Cyclone
Displays tropical storm information

as issued by the National Hurricane
Center. Includes the cyclone’s
location, projected path, date, and
time.

Hazard Awareness
Echo Tops
Depicts the location, elevation, and

direction of NEXRAD radar echoes.
This information is useful for
gauging storm intensity in a
relative sense. A higher radar echo
means a stronger storm updraft.
Freezing Levels
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM
SiriusXM Freezing Level

Color-coded contour lines indicate
the altitude of the freezing level.
When freezing data is absent at a

given altitude, it means:
• the system has not received
data for the altitude, or
• the data is expired
FIS-B Weather:
To view freezing altitude, select the freezing level

G-AIRMET. Updates occur four times daily.

Hazard Awareness
Icing
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM
NOTE
Due to the incremental and overlapping nature of the FIS broadcast, timestamps, regional
coverage, and map data availability may vary with altitude for computer generated FIS-B
icing forecasts.
FIS-B Icing
Icing potential provides a graphic
view of current icing conditions.
SLD threat areas are depicted as
black and pink blocks over the icing
colors.
Directional keys allow you to adjust
the reporting altitude within
product-specific limits.
FIS-B SIRIUSXM
Timestamp
Valid time in UTC Time of data compilation
shows:
1,000 ft
3,000 ft
2,000 to 24,000 ft
Altitude Range: 6,000 ft
(at 2,000 ft intervals) 9,000 to 30,000 ft
(at 3,000 ft intervals)

Hazard Awareness
ICING CATEGORIES
Categories vary depending on the

SLD Threat configured weather source.
Heavy
Moderate Icing potential is not a forecast, but a

presentation of icing potential at the
Light time of analysis. Supercooled Large
Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are
Trace1 characterized by the presence of
relatively large, super cooled water
droplets indicative of freezing drizzle
No Coverage2 and freezing rain aloft.
1
Available only from certain weather sources. 2 FIS-B Weather only.

Hazard Awareness
Lightning
AVAILABLE WITH:
SiriusXM Lightning SiriusXM Weather:

A yellow cross icon indicates a
strike event occurring within a two
kilometer region. Strike location is
an estimate of its center.
Unlike Stormscope, the icon does
not change shape or color as data
ages.
Connext Weather:
Only cloud-to-ground strikes are reported through the Connext weather service.
FIS-B Weather:
Lightning strikes display as a bolt or cluster of bolts. The bolt color

indicates the strike polarity.

Hazard Awareness
METARs and TAFs

AVAILABLE WITH:
METAR and TAF reports provide information on current and forecast conditions.
Colored METAR flags display when a METAR reporting station is matched with a
corresponding navigation database identifier.
When selected, the METAR is decoded and displayed above the original METAR text.
METARs are provided only in areas covered by the currently loaded navigation
database.
Tapping a METAR opens a detailed report.
FIS-B METARs
METAR SYMBOLS
VFR
Ceiling greater than 3,000 ft AGL and visibility greater than five miles.
Marginal VFR
Ceiling 1,000 to 3,000 ft AGL and/or visibility three to five miles.
IFR
Ceiling 500 to 1,000 ft AGL and/or visibility one to three miles.
Low IFR
Ceiling below 500 ft AGL and/or visibility less than one mile.
Unknown
Ceiling and/or visibility data unavailable.

Hazard Awareness
PIREPs
AVAILABLE WITH:
PIREPs are pilot-generated weather reports that may contain non-forecast adverse
weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and
turbulence.
FIS-B PIREPs
Selecting a PIREP displays a report.
PIREP SYMBOLS
Routine (UA) PIREPs are issued as either
Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Urgent (UUA) Tapping a PIREP symbol displays
textual details.
Route

Hazard Awareness
SIGMETs
AVAILABLE WITH:
The SIGMET overlay draws the geographical boundaries of received SIGMETs on the
dedicated weather page. Convective and non-convective SIGnificant METerological
Information combine in a textual report and display graphically for the observed or
forecast region.
SiriusXM SIGMETs & AIRMETs

Tapping a SIGMET opens a detailed
report.
Surface Analysis
Displays weather fronts, high (H)

and low (L) pressure centers, and
isobars.
Forecast Period Options:

• Current • 12 hour • 24 hour
• 36 hour • 48 hour

Hazard Awareness
TFRs
AVAILABLE WITH:
WARNING
Do not exclusively use datalink services for TFR information. TFR Depictions
may not be a complete listing and may vary between cockpit devices. Always
confirm TFR information with official sources such as Flight Service Stations or
Air Traffic Control.
TFRs identify areas of airspace where aircraft are temporarily restricted from
operating. They are routinely issued for occurrences such as dignitary visits, military
activities, and forest fires.
Tapping a TFR displays textual details.
FIS-B TFRs
FIS-B Weather:
Latest TFR data transmit every 10 to 20 minutes.
For FIS-B datalink weather, TFRs and NOTAMs that do not include geographical
locations are viewable from the FIS-B Raw Text Reports page.

Hazard Awareness
Turbulence
AVAILABLE WITH:
FIS-B | SIRIUSXM
NOTE
Due to the incremental and overlapping nature of the FIS broadcast, timestamps, regional
coverage, and map data availability may vary with altitude for FIS-B turbulence forecasts.
FIS-B Turbulence
Turbulence data identifies the
potential for erratic movement of
high-altitude air mass associated
winds. This information is intended
to supplement AIRMETs and
SIGMETs.
Turbulence is classified as light,
moderate, severe or extreme.
product-specific limits.
FIS-B SIRIUSXM
Timestamp
Valid time in UTC Time of data compilation
shows:
2,000 to 24,000 ft 21,000 to 45,000 ft
Altitude Range:
(at 2,000 ft intervals) (at 3,000 ft intervals)
Data may not be available for all regions at all altitudes.

Hazard Awareness
Winds Aloft
AVAILABLE WITH:
SiriusXM Winds Aloft

Indicates wind speed and direction,
and temperature forecast for the
specified altitude.
The wind barb extends outward
from the reporting location dot in
the direction of wind origination.
product-specific limits. Reporting
altitudes vary depending on the
weather provider.
FIS-B Winds & Temps Aloft FIS-B Winds & Temperatures Aloft:
FIS-B wind forecasts also provide
temperature data for the selected
altitude. These forecasts update
every 12 hours.

Hazard Awareness
Altitude Range:
FIS-B SIRIUSXM & CONNEXT

1,000 ft Surface to 45,000 ft
1,500 ft (at 3,000 ft intervals)
2,000 ft
3,000 ft SiriusXM data not available
6,000 ft at 45,000 ft
9,000 ft
12,000 ft
15,000 ft
18,000 ft
24,000 ft
30,000 ft
34,000 ft
39,000 ft
45,000 ft
53,000 ft
Not all altitudes provide winds and temperatures aloft forecasts for all regions.

Hazard Awareness
SiriusXM Weather
SiriusXM satellites deliver high bandwidth (S-band) data to
provide high-resolution images. Available data is received
within a few minutes after the aircraft satellite receiver
comes into view of the SiriusXM satellite network.
• SiriusXM receiver (GDL 69 or GDL 69A)
• Active SiriusXM Aviation Weather subscription
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Icing Potential, Winds Aloft (U.S.), and Turbulence: the valid time displays instead of
product age
• Freezing Level and Winds Aloft (Canada): the generation time displays instead of valid
time
Activate SiriusXM Services

Before you can access SiriusXM Weather, you must contact SiriusXM customer
service and provide them with either one or two coded IDs:
• Data Radio ID (Weather)
• Audio Radio ID (Entertainment)
These coded IDs are used to send an activation signal, which allows the use of
weather and entertainment products received by the GDL 69/69A.
When SiriusXM weather

services are not activated:
• All weather product boxes
are cleared on the Service Class refers to the groupings of
weather products available for
GDL 69 Status page
subscription.
• A yellow “Activation
Required” message appears SiriusXM Customer Service:
at the center of the page https://www.siriusxm.com/sxmaviation.

Hazard Awareness
COMPLETE SUBSCRIPTION ACTIVATION

1. Contact SiriusXM using the customer service telephone number listed on the
website.
2. Provide the customer service agent with your Data Radio ID and Audio Radio ID.
3. Position aircraft within the satellite reception area and power on the unit.
4. Navigate to the GDL 69 Status page.
• From the Home page: Tap System > External LRUs, locate GDL 69 and
tap More Info.
• From the Music page: Tap Status.
5. Verify activation. For weather subscriptions, the status page displays your
Data Radio ID, Subscription Level, and a list of weather products.
6. Tap Menu > Lock Activation > OK.
Troubleshooting the
GDL 69/69A
Datalink Receiver
GTN serves as the control head for
your remotely mounted
GDL 69/69A. In the event of a
receiver failure:
It may take several minutes for all
• View datalink receiver status
subscription data to become available
on the GDL 69 Status page
after unit power up.
• Verify the SiriusXM Satellite
For more information, consult
Radio subscription is active
GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio
• Check circuit breakers to Activation Instructions. For subscription
ensure power is applied to activation instructions, visit
the receiver https://www.siriusxm.com/sxmaviation.

Hazard Awareness
SiriusXM Weather Setup

Tap Menu to access weather product
SiriusXM Weather Menu overlay controls and pilot settings.
NEXRAD Changes to an overlay setting take
effect immediately.
Echo Tops
Cloud Tops • Enable/disable weather overlays
Icing • Specify a forecast period
Turbulence
• Change the orientation of the
Winds Aloft
Forecast Period
weather display
Current • Display the product legend
12 Hour
24 Hour
36 Hour
48 Hour
City Forecast
Surface Analysis
Lightning
METAR
Cell Movement
AIREP PIREP
Map WX Overlays
County Warnings
SIGMET AIRMET SiriusXM Weather overlay controls
Freezing Level reside in the Map Setup menu.
Cyclone From the Home page, tap Map >
Orientation Menu, Map Setup, and select
the Weather tab.
North Up
Track Up If another weather source is active,
Heading Up tap Weather Source and select
Legend SiriusXM.

Hazard Awareness
FIS-B Weather
FIS-B weather data displays on the dedicated weather page
and as overlays on Map. No pilot action is required to
receive FIS-B weather information.
• UAT receiver (GDL 88 or GTX 345)
The FAA provides FIS-B as a Surveillance and Broadcast Service operating on the UAT
(978 MHz) frequency band. FIS-B uses a network of FAA-operated ground-based
transceivers to transmit weather datalink information to the aircraft’s receiver on a
scheduled continuous basis.
The Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather service is freely available

for aircraft equipped with a capable datalink universal access transceiver (UAT).
Ground stations provide uninterrupted services for the majority of the contiguous
U.S., Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico, and parts of Alaska. No weather subscription
service is required. For coverage information, visit:
https://www.faa.gov/air_traffic/technology/adsb
Data Transmission Limitations

FIS-B broadcasts provide weather data in a repeating cycle which may take several
minutes to completely transmit all available weather data. Therefore, not all weather
data may be immediately present upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition.
LINE OF SIGHT RECEPTION

To receive FIS-B weather information, the aircraft’s datalink receiver must be within
range and line-of-sight of an operating ground-based transceiver. Reception may be
affected by altitude, terrain, and other factors. Per the FAA, much of the United
States has FIS-B In airborne coverage at and above 3,000 ft AGL. Terminal coverage is
available at altitudes below 3,000 ft AGL and is available when flying near
approximately 235 major U.S. airports. Surface coverage allows FIS-B ground
reception at approximately 36 major U.S. airports.

Hazard Awareness
PER FAA TSO-C157B

FIS-B information may be used for pilot planning decisions focused on updating the
pilot's awareness of the dynamic flight environment; including avoiding areas of
inclement weather that are beyond visual range and pilot near-term decisions where
poor visibility precludes visual acquisition of inclement weather. FIS-B weather and
NAS status information may be used as follows:
a. To promote pilot awareness of ownship location with respect to reported

weather, including hazardous meteorological conditions; NAS status indicators
to enhance pilot planning decisions; and pilot near-term decision-making.
b. To cue the pilot to communicate with Air Traffic Control, Flight Service Station
specialist, operator dispatch, or airline operations control center for general and
mission critical meteorological information, NAS status conditions, or both.
FIS-B information, including weather information, NOTAMs, and TFR areas, are
intended for the sole purpose of assisting in long-/near-term planning and
decision making. The system lacks sufficient resolution and updating capability
necessary for aerial maneuvering associated with immediate decisions. In
extreme scenarios, the oldest weather radar data on the display can be up to
15 to 20 minutes older than the display’s age indication for that weather radar
data. Therefore, do not attempt to use FIS-B weather information to maneuver
the aircraft at minimum safe distances from hazardous weather.
FIS-B information must not be used in lieu of a standard preflight briefing.
c. FIS-B uplink is a subscription-free FIS broadcast managed by FAA SBS. It

provides an FAA approved source for METAR, TAF, WINDS, PIREPs, NEXRAD,
AIRMET, SIGMET, and TFR information, and is subject to the broadcast range
limits for these products.
FIS-B uplink is not an FAA approved source for NOTAMs.
NOTAM 30-DAY LIMITATION

NOTAMs received via FIS-B may not be a complete listing. Active NOTAMs are
removed from the FIS-B data stream 30 days after issuance. Before flight, review all
necessary aeronautical and meteorological information from official sources.
For more information, consult AC 00-63A or latest revision.

Hazard Awareness
FIS-B Product Status

View the status of all FIS-B weather
products. States include:
• Unavailable
• Awaiting Data
• Data Available
You may access this page one of two ways.
From the External LRUs list:

Home > System > External LRUs, locate GDL 88 or GTX 345, and tap More Info
From the FIS-B Weather menu:

Home > Weather > FIS-B Weather > Menu > Datalink Status
FIS-B WEATHER ENABLED

To mitigate any possibility of the avionics receiving
unexpected data formats in the FIS broadcast, you may
disable FIS-B Weather by toggling the Enabled key to off.
This key is active by default. It is not intended for use under
normal broadcast conditions.

Hazard Awareness
FIS-B Weather Setup

FIS‐B Weather Menu overlay controls and pilot settings.
NEXRAD Changes to an overlay setting take
effect immediately.
Off
CONUS • Enable/disable weather overlays
Regional • Select a NEXRAD source
Combined
• Filter G-AIRMETs and specify a
Cloud Tops
forecast period
Icing
Turbulence • Change the orientation of the
Wind/Temp Aloft weather display
Lightning • View datalink status and
METAR enable/disable the FIS-B Weather
PIREP function
SIGMET
• Display the product legend
Center WX Advisory
G‐AIRMET
Off
The Datalink Status page provides
Current (Auto)
controls for enabling/disabling the
All Forecasts
FIS-B Weather function, viewing raw
G‐AIRMET Filters text reports, and checking ground
Freezing Level reception status.
Icing
IFR
LL Wind Shear
Mountain Obscuration
Surface Winds
Turbulence
Orientation
North Up
Track Up Map WX Overlays
Heading Up FIS-B Weather overlay controls
Datalink Status reside in the Map Setup menu.
Raw Text Reports From the Home page, tap Map >
Radio Stations Menu > Map Setup, and select
Icing the Weather tab.
Turbulence If another weather source is active,
Freezing Levels tap Weather Source and select
Legend FIS-B.

Hazard Awareness
Raw Text Reports

View raw textual data for a FIS-B product.
Product Selections
1. Open the FIS-B WX Status page.
CWA 2. Tap Raw Text Reports.
METAR
NOTAM
3. Select a weather product.
PIREP
SIGMET
TAF
Winds/Temps Aloft
UNAVAIL FIS‐B
Products
The latest uploaded

data for the product
displays on a
dedicated page.
Multiple reporting
stations appear in a
list. Tapping View
displays raw text for
the corresponding
identifier.
To view information
about products not
available due to a
service outage,
select Unavailable
Products.

Hazard Awareness
READING WINDS/TEMPS ALOFT REPORTS

Tapping Winds/Temps Aloft displays a forecast of winds and temperatures for
different altitudes. Temperature forecasts are not included for altitudes below
2,500 ft AGL.
On the raw text report, altitude values do not align with the corresponding forecast.
Match the color of the altitude and forecast to interpret the information.
Color markings are for reference only.
ALTITUDE (FT)
3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 34,000 39,000
2209 9900+01 9900-04 2405-07 2928-17 2938-28 293544 294652 304451

Hazard Awareness
FIS-B Ground Reception Status

Monitor FIS-B ground station transmission status from the
FIS-B Reception Status page.
Current Report List shows

the completeness of
NOTAM-TFR, AIRMET, and
SIGMET data for all received
ground stations.
Station Range field indicates
complete/incomplete status
for only the products within
the received ground
station’s range.
OPEN FIS-B RECEPTION STATUS PAGE

This page is accessible from the Datalink
Datalink Weather Menu
Weather menu. You can access this menu
Raw Text Reports one of two ways:
Radio Stations
From FIS-B Weather:

Tap Menu > Datalink Status > Menu > Radio Stations.
From the External LRU list:

Home > System > External LRUs > Locate GDL 88 and tap More Info >
Datalink Status > Menu > Radio Stations.

Hazard Awareness
Connext Weather
Garmin provides Connext datalink, on-demand weather
products through the Iridium satellite system via a GSR 56
transceiver and L-band frequencies. An Iridium satellite data
subscription service is required for worldwide Connext
weather coverage.
• GSR 56 transceiver
• Active Connext subscription
Connext Weather coverage is available throughout most of Europe, Canada, and the
U.S. Additional radar coverage areas are added continuously. Various world-wide
weather subscription package options provide weather reporting for most of Europe,
Canada, Australia, and the U.S.
For the latest radar coverage information, visit:

https://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/connext/worldwide-weather/

Hazard Awareness
Connext Weather Setup

Connext Weather Menu overlay controls and pilot settings.
PRECIP
Changes to an overlay setting take
IR Satellite
effect immediately.
Winds Aloft • Enable/disable weather overlays
Lightning • View Iridium satellite datalink
METAR status and signal strength
PIREP
• Change the orientation of the
SIGMET AIRMET
weather display
Connext Settings
• Display the product legend
Orientation
North Up
Track Up Tap Connext Settings to access the
Heading Up
Data Request function and various
Legend coverage region options. From here
you may access the GSR Status page,
Connext Settings Menu where the Connext Registration
function resides.
Present Position
Destination
Flight Plan Map WX Overlays
Specify distance Connext Weather overlay controls
Waypoint reside in the Map Setup menu.
Specify identifier From the Home page, tap Map >
Request Data Menu > Map Setup, and select the
COV Diameter Weather tab.
Select coverage diameter If another weather source is active,
Datalink Status tap Weather Source and select
Connext Registration Connext.

Hazard Awareness
Connext Data Requests

• Direct connection to GSR 56 (Auto Request function)
Download selected weather products for a specific waypoint, flight plan, destination,
or your current position. A request must be sent in order for downloading to occur.
WHERE TO FIND IT Weather data request controls reside in the

Connext Settings menu.
Connext Weather Menu
Requests may be sent manually or set to
Connext Settings occur automatically within a specified time
Request Data interval.
DATA REQUEST CONTROLS
Request Data Auto Request

Request weather data at any Select a weather request period
time regardless of predetermined to enable automatic updates.
automatic update frequency. Options: • Off • 5 min • 10 min
Once the request is sent, you
may reset the Auto Request timer
(if active) for the next request
interval.
A timer counts down to the next
update. The Cancel Request key
becomes available.
Use these controls when you want to:

Multiple Weather Requests
• Set automatic updates:
To accommodate multiple
Tap Auto Request and select the
weather requests, Connext
merges the following products automatic weather request period.
with stale data, while discarding • Request a manual update:
the stale data of other products. Tap Menu > Connext Settings >
• AIRMETs Request Data.
• METARs • Cancel a request in progress:
Tap Cancel Request.
• SIGMETs
• TAFs
• TFRs

Hazard Awareness
COVERAGE REGION OPTIONS
Present Position Request weather information around aircraft’s present

position. COV diameter determines extent of request.
Destination Request weather information for the destination airport.
Flight Plan Request weather information for the active fight plan
route.
Enter requested weather information for a specified
Distance distance along the active flight plan.
Range: 10 NM to 500 NM
Waypoint Request weather information for a specified waypoint.
COV Diameter Define the diameter of coverage.

Range: 10 NM to 500 NM
GTN 650Xi SERIES
Coverage region controls reside in a dedicated submenu.

Tap Menu > Connext Settings > Coverage Region.

Hazard Awareness
Stormscope
Stormscope lightning information displays on a dedicated
weather page and as overlays on Map.
WARNING
Do not exclusively use the lightning detection system for weather avoidance.
The system may display inaccurate or incomplete information. For additional
information, consult the lightning detection system documentation.
• WX-500 Stormscope Weather Mapping Sensor
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Stormscope lightning information cannot display concurrently with a datalink
lightning weather product (SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B)
Stormscope Features
• Passive weather avoidance system
• Detects electrical discharges from thunderstorms within 200 NM of current
position
• Plots strike count and relative bearing location every two seconds
• Heading and distance from aircraft
• Arc and 360º viewing options
For more information, consult the WX-500 pilot’s guide.

Hazard Awareness
Stormscope Setup
Tap Menu to access Stormscope setup options.
Stormscope Menu
From here, you can change the current display
View view and mode settings.
360°
Arc Changes in mode selection also reflect on the
Mode associated Map overlay.
Cell
Strike
Stormscope Map Overlay
Stormscope overlay controls reside in the
Map menu.
From the Home page, tap Map > Menu >
Stormscope.
Changes in overlay mode selection also reflect on
the Stormscope display. The same is true for
clearing strikes on Map.
Stormscope Modes & Symbols

Cell Mode Strike Mode
Identifies clusters of electrical Displays individual discharge

activity, grouping individual points in relation to where they
strikes together. are detected.
When to use: When to use:

During heavy storm activity to During periods of light electrical
identify where storm cells are activity to plot the initial strikes
located. associated with a building
thunderstorm.
Symbols denote time since last lightning strike
Less than 6 seconds

Less than 60 seconds
(initial strike)
Less than 120 seconds Less than 180 seconds

Hazard Awareness
Strike Rate
Strike Rate reports the approximate number of strikes per minute for a given view
range. Refer here when trying to determine if storm cells are building or decaying.
Strikes occur at a higher rate as a storm matures. They are less frequent as the storm
dissipates.
CLEAR STRIKES
Tapping this key resets the rate value and clears the display
of all strikes. Clearing strikes on the Stormscope display also
clears them on Map.
Stormscope data displays with or without a heading source. If flying without a

heading source, you must clear all strikes following each heading change.
Views
Stormscope provides both arc and 360º views of lightning data.
ARC VIEW

Hazard Awareness
360º VIEW
Stormscope Display
Orientation
Heading Up is the normal display
orientation. If no heading source
is available, the page orientation
label changes to “HDG N/A.”

Hazard Awareness
Airborne Weather Radar

AVAILABLE WITH:
GTN 750Xi SERIES
Weather radar information displays on a dedicated weather

page and as overlays on Map.
WARNING
Use weather radar to avoid severe weather, not to enter it.
• GTN 725Xi or GTN 750Xi
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available modes and intensity levels depend on the installed radar type
• Not available on GTN 650Xi Series units
Maximum Permissible
Exposure Level, GWX 68
Radiation exceeds the U.S.
Government standard level of
1 mW/cm2 11 ft from the
antenna. All personnel must a
minimum safe distance while the For information on safe distance
radar is in operation. determination, refer to Advisory
Average power density at the Circular 20-68B.
MPEL boundary significantly For maximum permissible exposure
reduces with a scanning or levels, consult the appropriate radar
rotating beam. documentation.

Hazard Awareness
6 7
5
4 8
3
9
2
11 10
Weather Radar Features
1 Ownship Icon 7 Feature Status Display
2 Weather Depiction 8 Scan
3 Bearing/Tilt Line 9 Radar Display Range
4 Heading Indication 10 Radar Controls
Selected Display Group

5 11 Intensity Scale
Indication
6 WX App Label

Hazard Awareness
RADAR UNITS
Distance units on the radar display are determined by the pilot selectable
Distance/Speed setting in the System Units app.
Tap Home > System > Units > Distance/Speed.
DISPLAY ADJUSTMENTS
Tapping In and Out changes the radar display range.
TILT AND BEARING ADJUSTMENTS

To adjust tilt and bearing angle, tap and drag the line indicator as necessary,
or use the associated control keys.
INTENSITY SCALE
Each operating mode uses a unique color
palette to depict increasing intensity levels.
Weather Ground
WARM-UP COUNTDOWN TIMER

A warm-up period initiates upon power up
(GWX 68 only). Duration varies depending on
how long the radar is off. The radar begins
transmitting once warm-up is complete.

Hazard Awareness
Weather Radar Setup

Tap Menu to access weather radar
Weather Radar Menu setup options. Available features are
Sector Scan
1 dependent upon configuration.
Select scan width With the exception of Sector Scan
WATCH Shading 1 and Display Group, all selections are
Weather Messages 1 on/off only.
Stabilization
2
Altitude Compensated Tilt
Ground Clutter Suppression 2, 3
Turbulence Detection 2, 3
Display Group 3, 4
Hail Prediction 3, 4, 5 Map WX Overlays
Lightning Prediction 3, 4, 5 The Radar overlay control resides in
the Map Setup menu.
1
From the Home page, tap Map >
Not available for third-party radars
2
Available with GWX 70/75 only. Menu > Radar.
3 Requires feature enablement.
4
Radar and NEXRAD overlays are
Available with GWX 8000 and GTN Xi
software v20.40 or later. mutually exclusive. Selecting one
5 Available only during automatic mode.
automatically turns the other off.
ALTITUDE COMPENSATED TILT
AVAILABLE WITH:
GWX 70/75
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Not available for third-party radars
This feature adjusts the tilt to compensate for

altitude changes as the aircraft climbs and
descends.
Status displays above the radar controls.

Hazard Awareness
GROUND CLUTTER SUPPRESSION
AVAILABLE WITH:
GWX 70/75/8000
• Purchased GWX Ground Clutter Suppression feature enabled on unit
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Enhanced functions available only with GWX 8000
• Horizontal scans only
This feature reduces the amount of returns of highly reflective objects on the ground,
while maintaining the intensity and size of weather returns.
If ground clutter suppression is inoperative, a

yellow “INOP” message annunciates in the feature
status display. This occurs when the GWX radar is
unable to confirm that radar data meets the criteria
for ground clutter suppression due to missing
information.
Enhanced Ground Clutter

Suppression with GWX 8000
During manual mode, the system
uses Doppler radar to suppress
most clutter to 40 NM. Ground
clutter shows for one sweep
following any adjustment to the
tilt setting, allowing the pilot to
determine the proper tilt angle.
During automatic mode, the
system employs the terrain
database to provide data for
ground clutter reduction.

Hazard Awareness
SECTOR SCAN
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
The sector scan option focuses the scan on a smaller segment of the radar sweep.
This is useful when monitoring priority weather targets.
GWX INCREMENTS Horizontal sector scans center

on the bearing line.
68 20º, 40º, 60º, Full
Increments vary according to
70/75/8000 20º, 40º, 60º, 90º, Full radar.
The 90º horizontal scan option is
available only for radars with extended
scan capabilities (120º sweep).
STABILIZATION
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Manual control not available for GWX 8000
This feature helps stabilize the antenna so the scan is parallel to the ground when
active. When off, the antenna scan is relative to the aircraft lateral axis.

Hazard Awareness
TURBULENCE DETECTION
AVAILABLE WITH:
GWX 70/75/8000
• Purchased GWX Turbulence Detection feature enabled on unit
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
This feature detects and displays severe turbulence.
GWX 70/75 Radar Display GWX 8000 Radar Display
GWX 8000 uses symbols to denote

regions of severe turbulence. These
Turbulent areas appear white on GWX 70 and
Region GWX 75 radar displays.
The decision to fly into an area of radar targets depends on target intensity, spacing
between targets, aircraft capabilities, and pilot experience.
Some weather radars detect only precipitation, not clouds or turbulence. While GTN
may indicate clear areas between intense returns, this does not mean it is safe to fly
between them.

Hazard Awareness
A legend shows when turbulence detection is active.
GWX 70/75 GWX 8000
Legend appears above the intensity On/off status annunciates in the

scale when the feature is on. It is feature status display.
absent when the feature is off.
Turbulence Detection
reports as “Off” when:
• Current scan range is greater
than 160 NM
• Radar is not in weather mode
• Vertical scan is active

Hazard Awareness
WATCH
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
Use WATCH to determine where the displayed intensity may be understated beyond
a high-intensity area. Adjust tilt to determine the extent of attenuation in a shaded
area. WATCH displays only in horizontal scans.
WATCH Off WATCH On
WEATHER MESSAGES
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Not available during ground mode
These alerts indicate the presence of heavy

precipitation beyond the current display range.
Multicolored bands on the outer range ring
display at the approximate azimuth of severe
weather targets.
• If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a weather alert is generated by ground
returns.
• If a weather alert is detected within +10 degrees of the aircraft heading, an
advisory displays in the message list.

Hazard Awareness
PREDICTIVE HAIL & LIGHTNING
AVAILABLE WITH: GWX 8000
• Purchased GWX 8000 feature enabled on unit
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available only when automatic scanning mode is active
Predictive Hail & Predictive Lightning On

The system searches volumetric data
for areas that are conducive to the
formation of hail or lightning. GTN Xi
depicts these regions using dedicated
symbols. The circular footprint of
each symbol represents an
approximate area of concern.
You can enable predictive features
while the radar is in automatic mode.
Enable predictive hazard features for

A legend indicates which predictive features initial awareness of possible adverse
are active. weather ahead.

Hazard Awareness
Predictive Hail Depiction
A magenta triangle indicates regions

of hail.
Hail
Region
Predictive Lightning Depiction
A yellow “X” indicates regions of

lightning.
Lightning
Region

Hazard Awareness
DISPLAY GROUPS
• Purchased GWX 8000 feature enabled on unit
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• GWX 8000 allows up to two display groups for selection
• Radar display groupings pertain to GWX 8000 only
• Not available when automatic scanning mode is active
Enable modes and features for all configured GTN Xi

and/or GDU TXi units within an assigned group.
To select a display group, tap

Display Group and choose between
Group 1 and Group 2.
Group 1 is the default group selection.
The selected display group appears in
the upper left of the radar display.
This indication is absent during
automatic mode when the display
grouping function is inactive.
Selected
Display
Group

Hazard Awareness
Radar Modes
WARNING
Do not transmit when personnel or objects are within 16 ft of the antenna.
Tapping Mode opens a list of available mode options.
A confirmation pop-up alerts you

when attempting to scan while on
the ground.
STANDBY
• Parks the antenna at the
centerline
• Automatic standby occurs
during power up and landing
During weather and ground modes,

the system automatically switches to
standby upon landing.

Hazard Awareness
TEST
• Places transmitter in standby
as the display simulates a radar
sweep
• Data verifies communication
between the weather radar
and display
• Radar pulses do not transmit
from the antenna during this
mode
GROUND
• Presents a depiction of terrain
similar to that of a
topographical map
• Useful when trying to verify
aircraft position
GROUND TARGET INTENSITY LEVELS

GROUND MAP
MODE COLOR GWX RADAR THIRD-PARTY
INTENSITY RADAR LEVEL
Black 0 to 2 dB 0
Cyan 3 dB to < 13 dB 1
Yellow 13 dB to < 21 dB 2
Magenta 21 dB to < 29 dB 3 and above
Blue 29 dB and greater Not used

Hazard Awareness
WEATHER
• Presents an airborne depiction of precipitation
• Colors represent approximate rainfall intensity and rates for weather radar
targets.
GWX 68 Radar Display GWX 75 Radar Display

• Presents an airborne depiction
of precipitation
• Colors represent approximate
rainfall intensity and rates for
weather radar targets
THIRD-PARTY
GWX 68/70/75/8000 RADAR
RADAR
RADAR
WEATHER MODE APPROXIMATE APPROXIMATE RETURN
COLOR INTENSITY RAINFALL RATE (IN/HR) LEVEL1
Black < 23 dBZ < .01 0
Green 23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ .01 to < 0.1 1
Yellow 33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ 0.1 to < 0.5 2
Red 41 dBZ to < 49 dBZ 0.5 to < 2.0 3
Magenta 49 dBZ and greater 2.0 and greater 4
2
White Turbulence Detection
1
Consult third-party radar documentation. 2 GWX 70 and GWX 75 only.

Hazard Awareness
AUTOMATIC
• Provides automatic 3D
volumetric scanning of the area
ahead of the aircraft (weather
information only)
• Bearing/Tilt, Gain, Scan, and
enhanced Ground Clutter
Suppression functions occur
automatically
• Hail Prediction, Lightning
Prediction, and Turbulence
features are available in the setup
The age of weather scan data displays (in seconds) menu
once a scan completes.
• Manual range adjustments are
still available
3D Volumetric Scan Process
During automatic mode, the radar
antenna performs multiple scans
and tilt angles to update the
overall weather solution. The
system collects and processes this In addition to automatic mode,
data to provide a display of the GWX 8000 retains the ability to use
strongest returns in the volume of manual mode for investigating
air ahead. In some ways, this is returns. To perform manual scanning,
similar to a NEXRAD composite place the radar in Weather or Ground
image. mode. If multiple radar displays are
Acquiring precipitation targets is present, ensure that at least one of
much easier in this mode. the radar displays is not in standby.

Hazard Awareness
Automatic Mode Status Indications
Upon activation, GWX 8000

requires 20 seconds to render its
initial image.
“Initializing” annunciates on the
radar display to inform you that
initialization is in progress (i.e., the
radar is functioning but scan
depictions are not yet available).
If automatic mode is inoperative,
a yellow “Auto INOP” message
replaces the “Initializing”
annunciation. Select a different
scanning mode to resume radar
operation.

Hazard Awareness
Radar Controls
Some radars allow independent sweeps
Weather Radar Page when connected to multiple displays.
Show Bearing/Tilt 1 GWX 68 synchronizes the controls from all
Bearing connected displays. GWX 70 and GWX 75
Set bearing receive commands from each display
Tilt independently and perform a separate
Set tilt sweep for each. GWX 8000 allows control
Mode
from two display groups.
Standby
Automatic 2
Weather
Ground
Test
Scan
Horizontal
Vertical 3
Gain
Set to Calibrated
1
Dependent upon scan type selection. 2 GWX 8000 only.
3
Not available for RS 181 and RS 811 radars.
SHOW BEARING/TILT
Display the tilt or bearing line depending on the current scan selection. This feature is
useful when making horizontal or vertical scan adjustments.
Horizontal Scan Active Vertical Scan Active
BEARING
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Bearing angle not available on RS 181A and RS 811A radars
Directional keys allow fine adjustment

of the bearing line angle. This method
is optional to tapping and dragging.
Bearing Direction
& Value

Hazard Awareness
TILT
Use antenna tilt to locate the top and bottom of storm cells and to increase intensity
of ground target returns. One degree of tilt equals 100 ft of altitude per nautical
mile.
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup

In a typical tilt setup, the bottom of the radar beam is adjusted
to 4º below parallel with the ground. To achieve this:
1. Fly the aircraft level.
2. Adjust antenna tilt so ground returns display at a distance
equal to the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000.
Remember the following points when flying with the antenna at

this basic angle setting.
Altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 ft AGL:

• Avoid target returns at 5 NM. These may be either weather or ground returns
that are 2,000 ft or less below the aircraft.
• Raise the antenna tilt 4º to separate ground returns from weather returns in flat
terrain. Return the antenna to the previous setting after a few sweeps of the
radar.
• Set the display range to 60 NM for aircraft flying at 15,000 ft or lower. Monitor
ground returns for possible threats.
Altitudes above 29,000 ft:

Be cautious of targets 30 NM or closer. This may indicate a thunderstorm that the
aircraft cannot fly over safely.

Hazard Awareness
For a more accurate view of target coverage and intensity, center the tilt angle on
the strongest return area, aiming below the freezing level of the storm.
In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the vertical scan feature along with antenna tilt
to examine the cells. Avoid shadowed areas behind targets.
VERTICAL SCAN
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Vertical scan not available on RS 181A and RS 811A radars
Tilt Line Vertical scans focus the radar on a

particular vertical target.
• Enable tilt line visibility:

Tap Show Tilt.
• Adjust tilt of vertical scan: Tap
and drag the tilt line up or
down. Or tap Tilt and adjust
angle using the directional keys.
• Adjust horizontal angle for the
vertical scan: Tap Bearing and
adjust angle using the
directional keys.
Vertical Scan with Stabilization

When vertically scanning with
stabilization on, the physical area
that the radar is sweeping may
not match the displayed vertical
scan. This occurs when the aircraft To avoid constant adjustment of the
pitch is not at 0°. To compensate, bearing line, ensure that the aircraft
the GDU does not draw the wings are level when performing a
unscanned portion. vertical scan of a storm cell.

Hazard Awareness
HORIZONTAL SCAN
Horizontal scans provide a visual depiction of weather in front of the aircraft.
• Enable bearing line visibility:

Tap Show BRG.
• Adjust the horizontal scan
bearing: Tap and drag bearing
line left or right. Or tap
Bearing and adjust angle
using the directional keys.
• Adjust vertical angle for the
horizontal scan: Tap Tilt and
adjust angle using the
directional keys.
GAIN
NOTE
Precipitation intensity may not be accurate if the gain is changed.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Third-party radars: this control is active only during ground mode
This feature controls the sensitivity of the radar receiver. Adjustments to receiver
sensitivity automatically change the intensity of radar targets.
Directional keys allow sensitivity adjustments.
Tapping Set to Calibrated

restores the calibrated gain
setting and returns intensity
depictions to their actual
colors.
Default
Calibration
Setting

Hazard Awareness
Radar Alerts
Caution messages alert you
when there is a weather radar
failure. For a list of possible
radar alerts, refer to the
annunciations table in this
segment.
Radar Alert Annunciation
When a radar alert occurs:

• A textual annunciation
appears over the radar sweep
• Scan depictions do not
display In addition to radar alerts, the weather
• Weather radar overlay detail radar overlay is absent from Map if
is absent from Map heading input is lost.

Hazard Awareness
ALERT ANNUNCIATIONS
ANNUNCIATION CONDITION
Condition:
Radar Fault
Data contains a fault unrelated to attitude
Condition:
Radar Fail
Weather radar product status is timed out
Condition:
Radar Controls • Radar’s actual state does not match the commanded
Disagree state
• Third-party radars only
Condition:
Radar Active Radar is in standby but remains active due to another
interfacing controller
Condition:
Off • Radar is off
• GWX only
Condition:
• Radar is warming up
Warm Up XX • Countdown timer displays number of seconds
remaining (“XX”)
• GWX 68 only
Condition:
Standby
Radar is in standby mode

Hazard Awareness
Traffic Awareness
WARNING
Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance
maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance
resolution advisories and does not under any circumstances or conditions
relieve the pilot's responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Traffic symbols vary according to traffic source (e.g., TIS-A, TAS, ADS-B)
• Intruding aircraft without altitude reporting capabilities do not display altitude
separation data or climb /descent indications
• Available display ranges and vector types are dependent upon traffic source
Available functions, alerting features,

Available Traffic Sources and options are dependent upon on
• TIS-A the traffic system source.
• TCAD 9900B ADS-B controls are accessible from
• TCAD 9900BX the Traffic setup menu. Controls
for other traffic systems reside in a
• Ryan TCAD 9900BX
control menu and/or on the
w/GDL 88
Traffic page.
• TAS/TCAS I
• TCAS II
• ADS-B

Hazard Awareness
Traffic Display
Collision avoidance and traffic surveillance data display on
the dedicated Traffic page and as overlays on Map.
The Traffic page displays intruding traffic in relation to the
current position and altitude of the aircraft without clutter
from other data.
WARNING
Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all
of the traffic within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal
reception, and/or inaccurate information from aircraft or ground stations,
traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
2 1
11
3
10
4 6, 7, 8
5
Traffic Display Features
Ownship Icon
Depicts current aircraft position.
1 • Nose of the ownship is the actual ownship location
• Unlike the configured ownship icon on map displays, this icon
is always a directional arrow
2 Ground Station Transmitter Status Icon

Hazard Awareness
Traffic Status & Active Applications

• Status indications:
• On means the AIRB and ATAS traffic applications are active
• Off means that air and ground applications are inactive
3 • Test means the traffic test function is active
• Fail means that ADS-B reports a failure
• +SURF means that ground targets displays in addition to
airborne targets
• Altitude filter setting (NORM, ABV, BLW, UNR)
Range Ring
4 • Outer ring represents selected range
• Range options vary according to traffic application
Selected Vector Type and Duration

5 Types: Absolute and Relative
Refer to Motion Vectors for more information.
Intruding Aircraft Symbol

Actual intruder location varies according to symbol type.
6
• Tip of directional symbols
• Center of non-directional symbols
Altitude Separation Value

Indicates when an intruder is above or below the ownship.
• Value appears above or below the traffic symbol, depending on
7
relative altitude
• Plus or minus sign denotes higher or lower altitude in hundreds
of feet
Vertical Trend Arrow

8 Active when an intruder is climbing or descending at a vertical speed
greater than 500 fpm.
Next Key
9
Available when multiple targets are spaced closely together.
Selected Traffic Information Window

10 Select and view aircraft information for multiple traffic symbols.
Refer to Traffic Interactions for more information.

• Track Up orients page to current aircraft GPS track
11
• Heading Up orients page to current aircraft heading
(requires heading data source interface)

Hazard Awareness
GROUND STATION TRANSMITTER STATUS ICON
TIS-B ground station transmitter Traffic picture may be incomplete

is providing a traffic picture specific in the vicinity of the ownship. A
to the ownship aircraft. partial traffic picture may be
available due to:
• aircraft-to-aircraft ADS-B
and/or
• traffic pictures from the
ground station customized for
other nearby aircraft
TRAFFIC UNITS
Traffic units are always uniform.
PARAMETER UNITS
Selections in the System Units app
Altitude ft
do not affect the traffic display.
Distance NM
TRAFFIC GROUPS
When the Traffic Grouping function is active, traffic within close proximity of each
other may display as a group.
• Asterisk indicates that the target belongs to a group

• Relative proximity of the closest target determines color
• Depiction is of the most immediate threat
OFF SCALE TRAFFIC ALERTS

Off scale (out of range) traffic alerts are depicted as half
yellow symbols on the outermost range ring at the correct
bearing.

Hazard Awareness
TRAFFIC OVERLAY STATUS ICON (MAP ONLY)

This icon appears on Map when the traffic overlay is active.
It is absent when the overlay function is off. An “X” appears
over the icon when the overlay is on but unavailable.
Traffic Setup
Tap Menu to access pilot settings and the self-test functions.
ADS‐B TAS/TCAS I TCAS II TIS‐A

Status Status Standby Status
Surface Operate On Operate
Airborne Standby Altitude Standby
Off Test Reporting
Test
Altitude Filter TA Only
Motion Vector TA/RA
Normal
Absolute Above
Relative Below
Off Unrestricted
Vector Duration
Set duration
Altitude Filter
Normal Map Traffic Overlay
Above
Below
The overlay control resides in the
Unrestricted Map setup menu.
Home > Map > Menu, and select
Traffic.

Hazard Awareness
Traffic Test
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• ADS-B, TAS, and TCAS applications only
• Available only when the aircraft is on ground (i.e., standby mode)
• Test pattern depiction is dependent upon the active traffic system
The test function displays a test pattern on the Traffic page.

For ADS-B, this option is accessible via the Traffic menu.
Altitude Filtering
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• ADS-B, TAS, and TCAS applications only
Selectable filters limit the display of traffic to a specific altitude range relative to the
altitude of the ownship.
Filter selections apply to both the Traffic page and the traffic overlay on Map.
SELECTION LABEL ALTITUDE RANGE

Normal NORM -2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
Above ABV -2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
Below BLW -9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
Unrestricted UNR -9,900 ft to 9,900 ft

Hazard Awareness
Traffic Interactions
Selecting a traffic symbol displays
Selected Traffic information about the aircraft in the
Information upper right corner of the page.
• Registration/call sign Selections remain active through altitude
• Vehicle type filtering, zoom scale, and page changes.
• Closure rate
• Track
• Ground speed
Tapping Next repeatedly steps through multiple symbols spaced

closely together.
Selected
Traffic Info
Next Key
Selected
Traffic
Mute Alert
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available only with GTX 345 & ADS-B software v3.20 and later
When a traffic alert occurs, the Mute Alert option temporarily

replaces the Next key.

Hazard Awareness
Traffic Types
TIS-A
NOTE
Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground
stations is the responsibility of the FAA. For a terminal Mode S radar site map covering
the U.S., consult the AIM.
• Aircraft location is within the service volume of a Mode S terminal radar site
• TIS-capable Mode S transponder is interfaced to the GTN
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Except for GDL 88 or GTX 345 equipped aircraft, TIS and TAS may not both be
displayed at the same time
TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable
terminal radar site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both
Traffic Advisory System (TAS) and TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability
are shown without altitude separation data or climb/descent indication.
TIS will be unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U.S., particularly in
mountainous regions. Also, when flying near the “floor” of radar coverage in a
particular area, intruders below the client aircraft may not be detected by TIS.
TIS-A Features
• 2D graphical depiction of proximate traffic based on data received from
terminal radars
• Track vector depicts intruder trajectory over the ground
• Vertical coverage: +3,500/ -3,000 ft from ownship
• Eight intruder maximum within an 8 NM radius
• Five second update cycle
• Normal and standby mode options
For information about TIS-A functions and limitations, consult the AIM.

Hazard Awareness
TIS-A SETUP SELECTIONS

Select an operating mode: Tap Status and choose Operate or Standby.
TIS-A TRAFFIC SYMBOLS

Traffic information is for advisory use only. The pilot is responsible for identifying
and avoiding traffic.
Non-threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory (TA)
TA Off-scale
TIS-A STATUS INDICATIONS

GTN receives data from the transponder, but a failure
Data Failed
exists in the data stream.
Failed Transponder failure.
No Data GTN is not receiving valid data from the transponder.
System cannot determine TA bearing. Intruder
depiction not available. Annunciation includes:
TA X.X NM ±XX ↕ • Distance in nautical miles
• Altitude separation in hundreds of feet
• Altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
TA OFF SCALE TA is outside the selected display range.
Traffic Coast x SEC Intruder depictions are more than 6 seconds old.
Intruder depictions are more than 12 seconds old.
Traffic Removed
Traffic symbols no longer display.
Transponder not receiving TIS-A data from ground
Unavailable
station.

Hazard Awareness
TCAD 9900B
The Traffic and Collision Alert Device (TCAD) 9900B provides a passive system that
uses transponder replies from other aircraft to acquire traffic information.
Ryan TCAD 9900B
3
1
2
1 Altitude Separation 900 ft, Closing
Traffic Advisory, Altitude Separation 0 ft,

2
Steady Altitude Separation
3 Traffic Advisory, Separation 100 ft, Diverging
TCAD 9900B SYMBOLS

IMMINENT NON-IMMINENT
TRAFFIC1 TRAFFIC
Traffic Closing Vertically
Traffic Diverging Vertically
Traffic not Closing or

Diverging Vertically
1
Traffic within ±500 ft and 1.0 NM or no altitude and within 1.0 NM.

Hazard Awareness
TCAD 9900B PAGE SELECTIONS

• Set local barometric pressure: Tap BARO and specify a barometric pressure
value.
• Set the active shield: Tap Active Shield and choose En route, Standard,
or Terminal.
TCAD 9900B MENU SELECTIONS

Traffic Audio Set volume level of traffic alerts.
Shield Setup Set the active shield. Options are Approach or Standard.
Approach Mode Set the shield height.
Shield Range Set the shield range.
SHIELD SETUP
The Shield Setup function allows you to set the type (mode of operation) and volume
of the shield that will provide alerts when entered by other aircraft.
Set an approach shield:

1. Select En route, Standard, or Terminal
2. Ensure Use DEST APT is deselected and then tap Field Elevation.
3. Specify the field elevation value for traffic reporting.
Use DEST APT to automatically use the field elevation of the destination airport of
the active flight plan for traffic reporting. If a destination airport is not present in the
GTN Xi system, TCAD will not receive a field elevation and therefore not
automatically enter approach mode.
Set an En Route, Standard, or Terminal shield:

1. Tap Shield Type and select the preferred shield type.
2. Tap Shield Height and specify the shield height value.
3. Tap Shield Range and specify the shield range value.
Select a mode:
• Approach mode: Toggle the Approach key to choose between Set, Armed,
or Active.
• Ground mode: Toggle the Ground key on or off.

Hazard Awareness
TCAD 9900BX
The TCAD 9900BX provides an active system that interrogates other aircraft to
acquire traffic information. System setup is identical to TCAD 9900B.
Ryan TCAD 9900BX
4
1
Altitude Separation 1,600 ft Other Traffic, Separation 1,300 ft

1 4
and Ascending Above
Traffic Advisory, Altitude

2 Range Ring Radius 5
Separation 200 ft and Descending
3 Traffic Annunciation
TCAD 9900BX SYMBOLS
Traffic Advisory
Proximity Advisory (color may be configured as cyan)
Other Traffic (color may be configured as cyan)
Out-of-Range Traffic Advisory

Hazard Awareness
Ryan TCAD 9900BX with GDL 88

Ryan TCAD is a system that provides audio and visual alerts for traffic near your
aircraft. The information from this system can be interfaced through GTN Xi.
Ryan TCAD Features

• TCAS-like symbols are used in the 9900BX
• Altitude modes are available (normal, look up, look down, unrestricted)
• Ranges are manually controlled for the current shield
TRAFFIC DISPLAY RANGE

Options include: • 1 NM • 2 NM • 2 and 6 NM • 6 and 12 NM • 12 and 24 NM
RYAN TCAD ALERT TYPES

The Ryan TCAD on-board air traffic display identifies potential collision threats. It
computes the relative altitude and range of threats from nearby Mode C and
Mode S-equipped aircraft. TCAD will not detect aircraft that are not equipped with
operating transponders or that are beyond radar coverage. When within the defined
limits, TCAD creates a shield of airspace around the aircraft that detected traffic
cannot penetrate without triggering an alert.
• TA: Traffic Advisory. Traffic with 500 ft, or less, of altitude separation that is
converging or maintaining altitude separation.
• PA: Proximity Advisory. Traffic with 500 ft of altitude separation that is not a
TA.
• TRFC: Other traffic.
When TCAD is connected to GTX 345, the available controls will appear as
described for TCAS. For details about the Ryan TCAD system, consult the associated
pilot’s guide.

Hazard Awareness
Ryan TCAD with GDL 88
1
2
7
1 ADS-B/TCAD Status 5 Selected Vector Type & Duration
2 Altitude Filter Setting Indication 6 Traffic Annunciation
Alerted Target, 1,200 ft Above

3 7 Selected Traffic Information
and Climbing
4 Range Ring Radius 8 Traffic Motion Vector
TCAD SETUP SELECTIONS

Tapping TCAD Control provides access to setup controls for the TCAD Traffic display.
Traffic Audio Set volume level of traffic audio.

Field Elevation Set the elevation.
BARO Set the barometric pressure.
Operate Toggle TCAD traffic on and off.
Ground Mode Toggle TCAD ground mode on and off.
Approach Mode Toggle TCAD approach mode on and off.

Hazard Awareness
TAS/TCAS I
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
Pilots should be aware of TAS limitations. TAS requires transponders of other aircraft to respond
to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to
phenomena such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be
displayed intermittently, or not at all.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or
climb descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
TAS/TCAS I Features
• Airborne traffic system independent of ground radar
• 2D graphical depiction of traffic relative to aircraft position and altitude
TAS/TCAS I SETUP SELECTIONS

Status Select operating mode. Options are Operate and Standby.
Test Initiate a test of the traffic system.
Select filter range. Options include:
Altitude Filter • Normal • Above
• Below • Unrestricted
TAS/TCAS I TRAFFIC SYMBOLS

Traffic information is for advisory use only. The pilot is responsible for identifying and
avoiding traffic conflict.
Other Traffic
Proximity Advisory
Traffic Advisory
TA Off-scale

Hazard Awareness
TAS/TCAS I STATUS INDICATIONS

GTN receives traffic data, but the TAS unit is reporting
Data Failed
a failure.
Failed Traffic data failure.
No Data GTN is not receiving valid data from the TAS unit.
System cannot determine TA bearing. Intruder
depiction not available. Annunciation includes:
TA X.X NM ±XX ↕ • Distance in nautical miles
• Altitude separation in hundreds of feet
• Altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)

Hazard Awareness
TCAS II
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• GTS 8000 or third-party TCAS II system
• If the installed TCAS II traffic system is not a GTS 8000, refer to the applicable
documentation for system-specific information
TCAS II Features
• Monitors nearby airspace for aircraft flying with operating transponders
• Issues TAs to assist in visual identification of traffic
• Issues RAs to provide recommended vertical guidance maneuvers to resolve
traffic conflicts
TCAS II STATUS INDICATIONS

TRAFFIC PAGE
SELECTION
ANNUNCIATIONS
TCAS II Self-Test Initiated (TEST) Test
Traffic and Resolution Advisory (TA/RA) TA/RA
Traffic Advisory Only TA Only
TCAS II Standby STBY
TCAS II Failed Fail

Hazard Awareness
TCAS II ALERTS
When the TCAS II unit issues a TA or RA,”TRAFFIC” flashes for 5 seconds in the
annunciator bar. It remains until no TAs or RAs are detected.
• RA “TRAFFIC” annunciations are white text with red backgrounds
• TA “TRAFFIC” annunciations are black text with yellow backgrounds
• If a TA and RA occur simultaneously, only the red and white RA “TRAFFIC”
annunciation displays
If GTN Xi is not displaying the Traffic page, the system displays a traffic alert pop-up.
• During a TA event, the system issues a single “Traffic, Traffic” voice alert each
time the system detects a new TA threat
• During an RA event, voice alert(s) provide vertical guidance to resolve the
traffic conflict
◦ The VSI displays a range of vertical speeds to fly to or avoid as applicable
◦ Additional voice alerts occur if the RA status changes and when the
aircraft is clear of the conflict
If the traffic system cannot determine the bearing of a traffic or RA, the alert displays
as a traffic alert banner.
Warning Banner
RA X.X ± XX <UP> OR <DN>

• Displays when the system is unable to determine the bearing
of an RA and extreme pilot vigilance is required
• Indicates distance in NM and altitude separation in hundreds
of feet
• Indicates altitude trend up <UP> for climbing and down <DN>
for descending traffic1
Caution Banner
TA X.X ± XX <UP> OR <DN>

• Displays when the system is unable to determine the bearing
of a TA and pilot vigilance is required
• Indicates distance in NM and altitude separation in hundreds
of feet
• Indicates altitude trend up <UP> for climbing and down <DN>
for descending traffic1
1 If altitude trend is available.

Hazard Awareness
TCAS II TRAFFIC SYMBOLS

Traffic information is for advisory use only. The pilot is responsible for identifying
and avoiding traffic conflict. The TCAS II system categorizes detected traffic into four
groups of increasing collision threat potential. Lowest threat is OT and the highest
is RA.
OT
Other non-threatening traffic.
PA
Traffic is not currently a threat, but is within 6 NM and
±1,200 ft of the own-aircraft altitude.
TA
Indicates traffic is within 20-48 seconds of a potential collision
area.
Off-scale TA
Traffic is beyond the selected map range and the system
displays a half-TA symbol at the edge of the map at the
approximate relative bearing of the TA traffic. If TA traffic
subsequently meets the criteria for an RA, the system issues
an RA.
RA
Indicates traffic is within 15-35 seconds of a potential collision
area.
Off-scale RA
If RA traffic is beyond the selected map range, the system
displays a half-RA symbol at the edge of the map positioned
at the approximate relative bearing to the RA traffic.
TCAS II WITH ADS-B
NOTE
Aircraft that are surveilled only by ADS-B In will not trigger a TCAS resolution advisory.
TCAS II interrogates Mode-S transponder data while automatically receiving ADS-B

position and velocity information directly from a comparably equipped aircraft target.
For preciseness, the system correlates between two data sources and the system
displays the traffic information for the source determined to be the most accurate.
Traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the other) is
also displays for the flight crew. This may occur, for example, if another aircraft is
beyond the surveillance range of the TCAS II, but it is still receiving position and
velocity information from other ADS-B equipped aircraft. The traffic correlation
feature improves the accuracy of the traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence
of displaying a single target twice.

Hazard Awareness
ADS-B
• GTN with external ADS-B In product (GDL 88, GTX 345, or GTS)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Available functions and alerting features dependent upon the ADS-B traffic system
source
ADS-B Features
• Runway and taxiway depiction during SURF mode
(< 2 NM range scale)
• Selectable traffic icons display intruder and vector information
• Customizable motion vectors (type, duration)
• Airborne and surface mode options
• On-scene mode option (rotorcraft only)
ADS-B SETUP SELECTIONS

Enable automatic mode selection. System selects between
ADS-B Status Surface and Airborne depending on the state of the aircraft.
Selecting Off disables the function.
Test Initiate a test of the traffic system.
Select motion vector type. Selecting Off removes all motion
vectors from the display.
Motion Vector
• Absolute • Relative
• Off
Select the amount of time represented by the endpoint.
Vector Duration Options range from 0 seconds to 5 minutes.
A longer duration results in a longer vector.
Select filter range. Options include:
Altitude Filter • Normal • Above
• Below • Unrestricted

Hazard Awareness
ADS-B TRAFFIC SYMBOLS

Traffic Information is for advisory use only. The pilot is responsible for identifying and
avoiding traffic conflict.
Basic Directional Proximate Directional
Basic Non-directional Proximate Non-directional
Basic Off-scale Proximate Off-scale

Selected Selected
Directional
Non-directional Alerted
(On-Ground)
Non-directional Off-scale Non-directional

(On-Ground) Alerted Traffic
Proximate Directional
Directional Alerted Traffic
(On-Ground)
Proximate
Off-scale Directional
Non-directional
Alerted Traffic
(On-Ground)
Directional Surface Non-directional Surface

Vehicle Vehicle

Hazard Awareness
ADS-B TRAFFIC APPLICATIONS

• Aviation database (SURF only)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• ATAS does not alert to traffic on ground
ADS-B In traffic supports three applications:

AIRB: Basic Airborne Application
ATAS: ADS-B Traffic Advisory System
SURF: Surface Situation Awareness
AIRB is considered the fundamental airborne traffic application. ATAS provides

alerts when airborne traffic trajectories pose a potential collision risk.
SURF provides additional situational awareness when you are on ground or within
the terminal environment.
TRAFFIC APPLICATIONS
• Both active when ADS-B is “On”
(airborne traffic indications are available; ATAS arms to
provide airborne alerts)
• Alerts occur when potential collision risks are determined
based on current airborne position and trajectory and the
AIRB & ATAS position and trajectories of other airborne traffic
• Airborne traffic alerts only
(no alerts on ground or for traffic on the ground)
• Nominally allow 20 to 40 seconds for flight crew response
• Provide aural alerting when traffic alerts occur
• Active on ground or within the terminal environment
(<5 NM and <1,500 ft above field elevation)
• Traffic on ground may display when SURF is active
SURF • Runway and taxiway depictions when the zoom scale is
<2 NM (Traffic page only)
• Depicts only traffic and ground vehicles equipped with
ADS-B Out

Hazard Awareness
Traffic Application Failures

During normal operation, the “ADS: On” status annunciation means that both AIRB
and ATAS applications are active. In the rare event of an application failure, it is
possible that only one of the applications may be active. The unit provides indications
to reflect which application is no longer operational.
• ADS field indicates “On”
• If AIRB is active and ATAS is failed, the unit displays the system message:
“ADS-B traffic alerting function inoperative”
• If AIRB is failed and ATAS is active (and still capable of providing a no-bearing
aural alert), “Unavailable” annunciates across the traffic display
MOTION VECTORS
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Motion vectors display on the Traffic page only
A motion vector is a line extending from the nose of an intruder icon. Its orientation
represents the intruder’s direction and movement. A yellow vector indicates when
traffic meets intruding TA criteria (i.e., closing rate, distance, vertical separation).
MOTION VECTOR TYPES

• Cyan or white vector depending on configuration
• Depicts intruder ground track
• Calculations based on intruder direction and ground speed
Absolute
• Endpoint depicts intruder’s position over the ground at the
end of the selected duration
• Airborne and ground functionality
• Green vector
• Depicts intruder movement relative to the ownship
• Calculations based on track and ground speed of both
intruder and ownship
Relative • Endpoint depicts intruder’s location relative to the ownship
at the end of the selected duration
• Airborne functionality only
• “Relative Motion - Unavailable” annunciates during
ground operations

Hazard Awareness
ADS-B STATUS INDICATIONS

Absolute Motion - XX
Active motion vector type is absolute.
SEC/MIN
Failed ADS data failure.
No Data GTN is not receiving valid traffic data.
No GPS Position ADS-B LRU detects that GPS unit is initializing.
Relative Motion - XX
Active motion vector type is relative.
SEC/MIN
Relative Motion - Aircraft is not airborne and the active motion vector
UNAVAILABLE type is relative.
Unavailable Necessary traffic data not available.
ADS-B TRAFFIC INTERACTIONS

Selecting a traffic symbol displays
Selected Traffic information about the aircraft in the upper
Information right corner of the page.
• Registration/call sign Selections remain active through altitude
• Vehicle type filtering, zoom scale, and page changes.
• Closure rate Tapping Next repeatedly steps through
• Track multiple symbols spaced closely together.
• Ground speed
• AIRB/SURF eligibility

Hazard Awareness
ADS-B Traffic
1
2 6
3
4
ADS-B/TCAS Status & AIRB/SURF

1 4 Selected Vector Type & Duration
Eligibility Indications
2 Altitude Filter Setting Indication 5 Selected Traffic
3 Traffic Motion Vector 6 Selected Traffic Information

Hazard Awareness
TRAFFIC PAGE ORIENTATION
ROTORCRAFT ONLY
While flying the helicopter at low speeds:

• Heading may not closely align with track (up to 180° different)
• The state of the Traffic page is dependent upon whether the unit is receiving
valid data from the interfaced heading source
If Then
Traffic page remains fixed with the

GTN Xi is receiving valid heading data
ownship heading pointed up
GTN Xi is not receiving valid heading • The display of traffic is unavailable

data • “Display Unavailable” annunciates
Ownship directionality is invalid across the Traffic page
(no valid heading or track) • Traffic alerts appear in a
non-bearing textual format at the
GPS ground speed is less than 15 kts
top of the page
but the ownship heading is not
available

Hazard Awareness
Traffic Alerting
Traffic alerts occur anytime there is an
Traffic Alert Types
increase in the number of traffic
• Textual annunciations at the advisories. They remain active until the
bottom of the screen area is clear of all TAs.
• Color-coded target icons on
Traffic page Traffic Alert Annunciation
• Pop-up window when
another page is active
GTN 750Xi Series

Traffic pop-ups do not display when
the aircraft is on ground.
GTN 650Xi Series
Traffic Alert Pop-up
ANNUNCIATION CONDITION | POP-UP | AURAL MESSAGE

Condition: Traffic reports a traffic advisory
Pop-up Alert: Yes
TRAFFIC
Aural Message:
Message content depends on current traffic system
configuration
For installations with GTX 345 and ADS-B software v3.20 or later, tapping the
Mute Alert key silences the active traffic alert voice message. This function is
applicable only to the active aural alert (does not mute future alerts). For more
information, read Aural Alerts in section 2.

Hazard Awareness
Alerting Parameters
Alerting Parameter Traffic alerting parameters consider

several factors in order to allow you
Considerations enough time to acquire the target
• Altitude separation and trend and maneuver the aircraft away from
• Angle conflicting traffic.
• Speed To minimize nuisance alerts, traffic
alerting sensitivity is adaptive, based
• Closure rate of each aircraft
on altitude above ground level. No
(ownship and target) aural alerts are given below 500 ft.

Hazard Awareness
Terrain Awareness
WARNING
Do not use Terrain and obstacle data to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
They are an aid to situational awareness only.
All terrain functions require the following components to operate properly.
• Valid 3D GPS position for terrain and obstacle data display
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Alerting functions are dependent upon the configured terrain alerting options
Terrain Configurations
Terrain Proximity displays relative
Available Terrain Modes elevations on moving map depictions
• (H)Terrain Proximity (Terrain page, Map). It does not
• Terrain Alerting provide visual alerts.
• TAWS-B1 Terrain Alerting adds Forward Looking
Terrain Alert (FLTA) and Premature
• TAWS-A1
Descent Alert (PDA) functions. These
• (H)Terrain Alerting include visual alerts when the aircraft
• HTAWS1 flies below an alerting threshold.
1 Optional.
Terrain controls are accessible from the Terrain menu. Map overlay keys are accessible
from the associated map menu.

Hazard Awareness
GPS Altitude for Terrain

GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. To acquire an accurate 3D fix
(latitude, longitude, altitude), a minimum of four operating satellites must be in view
of the GPS receiver antenna.
The terrain system uses GPS altitude and position data to:
• Create a 2D image of surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
aircraft’s position and altitude
• Calculate the aircraft’s flight path in relation to surrounding terrain and
obstacles
• Predict hazardous terrain conditions and issue alerts
GSL ALTITUDE & INDICATED ALTITUDE

The unit converts GPS altitude data to GSL altitude (i.e., the geometric altitude
relative to MSL) for use in terrain functions. All Terrain page depictions and elevation
indications are in GSL.
Variations between GSL altitude and the aircraft’s corrected barometric altitude (or
indicated altitude) are common. As a result, Terrain page altitude data may differ
from current altimeter readings. Both GSL altitude and indicated altitude represent
height above MSL, but differ in accuracy and reliability.
GSL Altitude Indicated Altitude

• Highly accurate and reliable • Barometric altitude source
geometric altitude source corrected for pressure variations
• Does not require local altimeter • Requires frequent altimeter
settings to determine height setting adjustment to determine
above MSL height above MSL
• Not subject to pressure and • Subject to local atmospheric
temperature variations conditions
• Affected primarily by satellite • Affected by variations in pressure,
geometry temperature, and lapse rate

Hazard Awareness
Database Limitations
NOTE
Garmin cross-validates terrain and obstacle data in accordance with TSO-C151d.
However, the information should never be considered all-inclusive. Database inaccuracies
or omissions may exist.
Terrain and obstacle data are not available when the aircraft is operating outside of
the installed database coverage area.
Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from government sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy and completeness of the information. Pilots must
familiarize themselves with the appropriate charts and other data for safe flight.
DATABASE LIMITATION
• Not available north of 89º N latitude and south of
Terrain
89º S latitude
• Coverage areas vary according to database type
• Power line indications for the contiguous United States and
small parts of Canada and Mexico
Obstacle • Regional definitions may change without notice
• May not contain uncharted obstacles
• May include power lines or only HOT lines depending on
database type1
1 HOT lines are power lines that share location with other obstacles identified by the FAA.

Hazard Awareness
Terrain Display
Terrain, obstacle, and wire data display as overlays on the
dedicated Terrain page and as overlays on Map.
4
3
2
Terrain Display Features
Ownship Icon
1
Depicts current aircraft position.
GSL Altitude
2
Displays current GPS height above mean sea level.
North Indicator
3

• Track Up orients page to current aircraft GPS track
• Heading Up orients page to current aircraft heading
4
(requires heading data source interface)
Heading Up takes priority over Track Up when both orientation inputs
are available.
Overlay Icons
5
Indicates power line or obstacle presence at the current zoom scale.

Hazard Awareness
AUTOMATIC ZOOM
In the event an alert occurs, the page
automatically zooms to provide the best
depiction of that alerted terrain, obstacle,
or power line.
AUTOMATIC DATA REMOVAL

Automatic removal of obstacle and power line data
occurs at range scales greater than 10 NM.
Terrain Setup
Tap Menu to access pilot settings as well
Terrain Page Menu as self-test and alert inhibit functions.
View
360
Arc
Layers
Flight Plan Map Terrain Overlays
Legend Overlay controls reside in the
(H)Terrain Alerting Map setup menu.
(H)Terrain Test Home > Map > Menu > Select from
(H)Terrain Inhibit
RP Mode 1
Terrain and OBST/Wires.
ALT Callouts 2, 5
(H)TAWS (Optional)
TAWS Test
TAWS Inhibit (H) designates the function is applicable
Flap Override 3 to rotorcraft.
G/S Inhibit 3
GPWS Inhibit 3
ALT Callouts 4, 5
1 Helicopter alerting functions only.

2 HTerrain only. 3 TAWS-A only.
4
TAWS-A and HTAWS only.
5
Available only with GTN Xi software v20.40 and later.

Hazard Awareness
TERRAIN SETUP SELECTIONS

• Changes view format to a 360º ring
360
encircling the aircraft (default view)
View
• Changes view format to a forward-looking
Arc
120º arc
• Toggles the active flight plan overlay on
Flight Plan
or off (Terrain page only)
Layers
• Toggles the Terrain and Obstacle/Wire
Legend
legend on or off
• Performs a system test of the terrain alerting
Test [NAME] function
• Verifies the validity of required databases
• Inhibits visual alerts for terrain, obstacles,
HTAWS & and power lines
[NAME] Inhibit
(H)Terrain
Alerting • Inhibits the FLTA aural and visual alerts
• Reduces alerting thresholds for low-level
RP Mode
operations (rotorcraft only)
• Provides pop-up controls for configuring
ALT Callouts1, 2
individual voice call out alerts
• Overrides flap-based FIT alerting while other
FIT alert functions remain in effect
Flap Override
• Inhibits nuisance FIT alerts where flap
extension is not desired
• Inhibits glideslope or glidepath alerts
depending on current state
• Use to prevent glideslope/glidepath
TAWS-A G/S Inhibit
deviation alerts (e.g., when flying a localizer
backcourse approach)
• Active only for a single approach
• Inhibits GPWS audible and visual alerts
GPWS Inhibit
• (i.e., EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR)
• Provides pop-up controls for configuring
ALT Callouts1
individual voice call out alerts
• Performs TAWS alerting system test
TAWS Test
• Verifies the validity of required databases
TAWS A & B • Inhibits PDA/FLTA audible and visual alerts
TAWS Inhibit • Inhibits EDR/NCR audible and visual alerts
for TAWS-B
1
Available only with GTN Xi software v20.40 and later. 2 HTAWS and HTerrain only.

Hazard Awareness
Terrain & Obstacle Depictions

Terrain Elevation Depictions
Color shading depicts terrain elevations relative to the aircraft’s position and altitude.
Colors automatically adjust as the aircraft’s altitude changes.
Terrain Shading
Terrain is more than 250 ft

Red above the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude +250 ft
Orange Terrain is between 250 ft and 0 ft

above the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft

Yellow below the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude -250 ft
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft

Green
below the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude -500 ft

Black Terrain more than 500 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Rotorcraft Terrain Shading

Hazard Awareness
Obstacle Elevation Depictions

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Obstacles more than 2,000 ft below current altitude do not display
TOWER OBSTACLES
UNLIGHTED LIGHTED
OBSTACLE LOCATION
OBSTACLE OBSTACLE
<1000’ >1000’ <1000’ >1000’
FIXED WING ROTORCRAFT
AGL AGL AGL AGL
Red obstacle is
Red obstacle is at
above or within
or above current
100 ft below current
altitude.
altitude.
Yellow obstacle is
Yellow obstacle is
between 100 ft
within 250 ft below
and 1000 ft below
current altitude.
current altitude.
White obstacle is
White obstacle more
between 1,000 ft
than 250 ft below
and 2,000 ft below
current altitude.
current altitude.
WIND TURBINE OBSTACLES

UNLIGHTED LIGHTED OBSTACLE LOCATION
WIND WIND
TURBINE TURBINE FIXED WING ROTORCRAFT
OBSTACLE OBSTACLE
Red obstacle is above Red obstacle is at
or within 100 ft below or above current
current altitude. altitude.
Yellow obstacle is
Yellow obstacle is
between 100 ft and
within 250 ft below
1,000 ft below
current altitude.
current altitude.
White obstacle is
White obstacle more
more than 1,000 ft
than 250 ft below
below current
current altitude.
altitude.

Hazard Awareness
POWER LINE OBSTACLES

OBSTACLE POWER LINE OBSTACLE LOCATION
Red power line is above or within 100 ft below current

altitude.
Yellow power line is between 100 ft and 1,000 ft below

current altitude.
White power line is between 1,000 ft and 2,000 ft below

current altitude.
OBSTACLE GROUPS
An asterisk indicates when the obstacle database contains only
a single latitude and longitude for a group of obstacles. This
occurrence is rare.

Hazard Awareness
Alert Types
The behavior of an alerting function is determined at installation. Installer
configurable settings allow:
• Alert suppression for specific runway types
• Gender selection for voice messages
• Volume level
TERRAIN ALERTING Available alerting functions depend

on the installed terrain system.
• Imminent Impact
Imminent Impact and Required
• Required Clearance Clearance alerts are functions of
• Premature Descent Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
TAWS-A (FLTA).
• Imminent Impact
• Required Clearance
• Premature Descent
• Excessive Descent Rate
• Excessive Closure Rate
• Negative Climb Rate
• Flight Into Terrain
• Excessive Below
Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation
TAWS-B
• Imminent Impact
• Required Clearance
• Premature Descent
• Excessive Descent Rate
• Negative Climb Rate

Hazard Awareness
ALERT TYPE CONDITION
Imminent Aircraft reaches the minimum clearance altitude of any

Impact1 obstacle (IOI), terrain (ITI), or power line (ILI) in the
projected flight path.
FLTA
Required Aircraft’s vertical flight path is projected to be within the

Clearance1 minimum clearance altitude of an obstacle (ROC), terrain
(RTC), or power line (RLC).
Aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path
Premature for the nearest runway.
Descent2 • Altitude is <700 ft above terrain
• Distance from destination airport is 15 NM or less
Excessive
Descent Rate Aircraft descends toward terrain at an excessive rate.
Excessive Aircraft closes upon terrain at a rate excessive for gear and
Closure Rate3 flaps.
Aircraft loses altitude following takeoff.
Negative Climb • Altitude is <700 ft above terrain
Rate • Distance from departure airport is 5 NM or less
• Deviation from departure heading is <110º
Flight Into Terrain Aircraft is too low with respect to terrain. Based on
landing gear status, flap position, and ground speed.
Aircraft is significantly below the glidepath for the selected
approach.
Excessive Below Active only after departure and when the following
Glideslope or conditions are met.
Glidepath • Altitude is <1,000 ft AGL
Deviation • Gear is configured for landing
• ILS, LPV, or LNAV/VNAV approach is active and the
unit is indicating vertical navigation
1
Alerting inhibited <200 ft AGL within 0.5 NM of approach runway or <125 ft AGL within 1.0 NM of
runway threshold.
2
Alerting inhibited within 0.5 NM of approach runway or <125 ft AGL within 1.0 NM of runway threshold.
Alerting thresholds for final descent are based on current position, speed, and flight path data.
3
Alerting inhibited within 5 NM of nearest airport, except when FLTA is not available. In such cases,
“TAWS N/A” or “TAWS FAIL” annunciates and ECR alerting remains active until landing.

Hazard Awareness
Alerting Thresholds
FLTA SEARCH VOLUME - REQUIRED TERRAIN CLEARANCE
Require Terrain Clearance (ft)
Distance from Runway (NM)

Hazard Awareness
EDR THRESHOLDS
Height Above Terrain (ft)
e”
R at
S in k
:“
ti on
C au
Warning: “Pull Up”
Descent Rate (fpm)

Hazard Awareness
PDA THRESHOLD
Caution: “Too Low, Terrain”
Runway
Threshold Distance from Destination Airport (NM)

Hazard Awareness
NCR THRESHOLDS
Alert triggers: altitude loss, sink rate
Caution:
“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
Altitude Loss (ft)

Caution:
“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
Sink Rate (fpm)

Hazard Awareness
EXCESSIVE CLOSURE RATE ALERT
Takeoff Configuration
Terrain Closure Rate (fpm)
Landing Configuration
Terrain Closure Rate (fpm)

Hazard Awareness
FLIGHT INTO TERRAIN ALERT

Altitude Change Rate (fpm)
* Flap position will not trigger alert if Flap Override option is enabled. To enable, tap Menu > Flap Override.

Hazard Awareness
OVERRIDING FLAPS-BASED FIT ALERTING
The FLAP O/R (Flap Override) should be activated when an approach without flaps is
going to be performed.
To reduce nuisance FIT alerts on approaches where flap extension is not desired (or is
intentionally delayed), you may override FIT alerting based on the flap position, while
all other FIT alerting remains in effect.
FIT alerts also occur during takeoff or go-around if the aircraft’s height above ground
level (as determined by the radar altimeter) is too close to rising terrain. TAWS-A will
issue the aural message “Too Low - Terrain” and visual annunciations when
conditions enter the caution alert area.
Caution: “Too Low, Terrain”
Radio Altitude Loss (ft)

Hazard Awareness
EXCESSIVE BELOW GLIDESLOPE/GLIDEPATH DEVIATION ALERT

A Glideslope Deviation or Glidepath Deviation (GSD) caution alert is issued when the
system detects that the aircraft is significantly below the glidepath for the selected
approach.
Caution: “Glideslope”
Number of Dots Below Glideslope/Glidepath

(4 Dot CDI Example)

Hazard Awareness
Alert Inhibit
The Terrain Inhibit control is
accessible via the terrain
pop-up alert or the Terrain
page menu.
Always use discretion when inhibiting TAWS or Terrain Alerting alerts. Re-activate
the alert function when appropriate.
TERRAIN INHIBIT FUNCTIONS

Manually inhibits TAWS or Terrain Alerting aural and visual
INHIBIT
alerts for low altitude approaches or rotorcraft operation.
AUTOMATIC Automatically inhibits TAWS and Terrain Alerting alerts
INHIBIT when the aircraft meets the following approach criteria.
TAWS: • GPS/SBAS approach
• Position inside FAF
TAWS & TERRAIN • Altitude <200 ft above
ALERTING: runway elevation
• Position <0.5 NM of
approach end or between
each runway end
TAWS-A INHIBIT ANNUNCIATIONS

Terrain Page
• “FLAP OVRD” does not annunciate if
GPWS Inhibit is already active, as both
functions inhibit FIT alerts.
• A plus sign indicates multiple alerts
(e.g., “TAWS INHB+”)
TAWS-A alert inhibit

annunciations appear at the
bottom right of the display.

Hazard Awareness
Terrain Proximity
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Terrain and obstacle depictions are relative to aircraft altitude
• Obstacle depictions are dependent upon database
• Does not provide visual or aural alerts
View color depictions of terrain and obstacle elevations relative to your current
position and altitude.
Terrain Proximity Features

• Non-TSO C151d certified terrain display system
• 2D graphical representation of surrounding terrain, obstacles, and power lines
relative to aircraft position and altitude
• Declutter automatically removes obstacle and power line data at large ranges
• Continuous monitoring of database validity, GPS and hardware status
• Displays when higher level terrain functions are active

Hazard Awareness
Terrain Alerting
• Valid 3D GPS position solution
Receive visual alerts for potential flight path conflicts involving terrain, obstacles, or
power lines. Alerting behavior is determined at installation.
Terrain Alerting Features

• Non-TSO C151d certified terrain alerting system
• FLTA functions: RTC, RLC, ROC, ITI, ILI, and IOI
• Premature Descent alerts
• Terrain depictions and display overlays
• Cautions and warnings indicate alert severity and threat type
• Textual annunciations
• Pop-up alerts
• Threat location indication on Terrain page and Map
• Self-test and alert inhibit functionality
Terrain Alerts
TERRAIN ALERTING INDICATIONS

ANNUNCIATION CONDITION | AURAL MESSAGE
Condition: FLTA Terrain Warning (RTC-W, ITI-W)
Aural Messages:
PULL UP • “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
• “Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Condition: FLTA Obstacle Warning (ROC-W, IOI-W)
Aural Messages:
PULL UP • “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
• “Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”

Hazard Awareness
TERRAIN ALERTING INDICATIONS

Condition: FLTA Wire Warning (RLC-W, ILI-W)
Aural Messages:
PULL UP • “Wire Ahead Pull Up, Wire Ahead Pull Up“
or
• “Wire Wire, Pull Up, Pull Up”
Condition: FLTA Terrain Caution (RTC-C, ITI-C)
Aural Messages:
TERRAIN • “Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
• “Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Condition: FLTA Obstacle Caution (ROC-C, IOI-C)
Aural Messages:
OBSTACLE • “Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
• “Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Condition: FLTA Wire Caution (RLC-C, ILI-C)
Aural Messages:
WIRE • “Wire Ahead, Wire Ahead“
or
• “Caution Wire, Caution Wire”
Condition: Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)
TERRAIN
Aural Messages: “Too Low, Terrain”
Condition: Voice Call Out (VCO-500)
None
Aural Messages: “Five-Hundred”

Hazard Awareness
TERRAIN SYSTEM STATUS

During power-up, the terrain system conducts a self-test of its aural and visual
annunciations. This test can also be manually initiated. An aural alert is issued upon
test completion. Terrain system testing is disabled when ground speed exceeds
30 knots.
TERRAIN SYSTEM STATUS INDICATIONS

Condition: Terrain alerting available
None
Aural Message: None
Condition: Terrain system test in progress
TER TEST
Aural Message: None
Condition: Terrain system test is successful
None
Aural Message: “Terrain System Test OK”
Condition: Terrain alerting is disabled
TER INHB
Aural Message: None
Condition: Terrain alerting not available
TER N/A
Aural Message: “Terrain Not Available”
Condition: Terrain system test fails
TER FAIL
Aural Message: “Terrain System Failure”

Hazard Awareness
TAWS-B
• Valid 3D GPS position
• TAWS-B feature enablement
TAWS-B Features
• Optional TSO-C151d Class B terrain alerting system
• All Terrain alerting functions plus: premature descent, excessive descent rate,
negative climb rate, and altitude voice callout (500 ft) alerts
TAWS-B Setup Selections
View Selects 360° or Arc view on terrain page.

Selects to display flight plan and/or legend on the terrain
Layers
page.
TAWS Inhibit Prevents TAWS alerts.
Tests the TAWS system. Available only when the aircraft is
Test
on-ground.

Hazard Awareness
TAWS-B Alerts
TAWS-B ALERT INDICATIONS

Pop-up Alert:
• “Terrain Ahead - Pull Up”
or
PULL UP • “Terrain - Pull Up”
Aural Message:
• “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Pop-up Alert:
• “Obstacle Ahead - Pull Up”
or
PULL UP • “Obstacle Pull Up”
Aural Message:
• “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Pop-up Alert: “Wire Ahead - Pull Up”
PULL UP Aural Message:

• “Wire Ahead Pull Up, Wire Ahead Pull Up”
or
• “Wire, Wire, Pull Up, Pull Up”
Condition: Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR-W)
PULL UP Pop-up Alert: “Pull Up”
Aural Message: “Pull Up”

Hazard Awareness

Pop-up Alert:
• “Terrain Ahead”
or
TERRAIN • “Caution - Terrain”
Aural Message:
• “Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
Pop-up Alert:
• “Obstacle Ahead”
or
OBSTACLE • “Caution - Obstacle”
Aural Message:
• “Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
Pop-up Alert: “Wire Ahead”
WIRE Aural Message:

• “Wire Ahead, Wire Ahead”
or
• “Caution Wire, Caution, Wire”
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Don’t Sink”
Aural Message: “Too Low, Terrain”
Condition: Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR-C)
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Sink Rate”
Aural Message: “Sink Rate”

Hazard Awareness

Condition: Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR-C)
Pop-up Alert:
• “Don’t Sink”
or
TERRAIN • “Too Low - Terrain”
Aural Message:
or
• “Too Low, Terrain”
Condition: Voice Call Out (VCO-500)
None
Aural Message: “Five-Hundred”
ALTITUDE VOICE CALL OUT ALERTS

TAWS-B provides an aural advisory alert as the aircraft descends through 500 ft
above the terrain, as determined by the GPS (if greater than 5 NM from the nearest
airport) or 500 ft above the nearest runway threshold elevation (if less than 5 NM
from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this altitude, TAWS-B issues the aural alert
message “Five-hundred.”

Hazard Awareness
TAWS-B SYSTEM STATUS

During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations.
The system test can also be manually initiated. An aural alert is issued upon test
completion. TAWS System Testing is disabled when ground speed exceeds 30 kts.
TAWS-B Not Available Alert

TAWS-B requires a 3D GPS position solution along with specific vertical accuracy
minimums. Should the position solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of
the database coverage area, the annunciation “TAWS N/A” is generated in the
annunciation window and on the TAWS-B page. The aural message “TAWS Not
Available” is generated. When the GPS signal is re-established and the aircraft is
within the database coverage area, the aural message “TAWS Available” is
generated (when the aircraft is airborne).
TAWS-B Failure Alert

TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity,
hardware status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the
aural message “TAWS System Failure” is generated along with a “TAWS FAIL”
annunciation.
TAWS-B SYSTEM STATUS INDICATIONS

Condition: TAWS available
None
Aural Message: “TAWS Available”
Condition: TAWS system test in progress
TAWS TEST
Aural Message: None
Condition: TAWS system test is successful
None
Aural Message: “TAWS System Test OK”
Condition: TAWS alerting is disabled
TAWS INHB
Aural Message: None
Condition: TAWS not available
TAWS N/A
Aural Message: “TAWS Not Available”
Condition: TAWS system test fails
TAWS FAIL
Aural Message: “TAWS System Failure”

Hazard Awareness
TAWS-A
• Valid terrain/obstacle/navigation database
• Valid flap and landing gear status inputs
• Valid radar altimeter
• Valid air data computer
Class A TAWS incorporates radar altimeter input with the GSL altitude to provide a
more accurate position reference when at lower altitudes for certain alert types, and
to retain a level of ground proximity warning capability in the unlikely event of a
navigation, terrain or obstacle database failure.
TAWS-A Features
• Optional TSO-C151d Class A terrain alerting system
• All Terrain-FLTA functions plus: premature descent, excessive descent and
closure rate, negative climb rate, flight into terrain, excessive below
glideslope/glidepath deviation
• Visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles are within the given
altitude threshold from the aircraft
TAWS-A Setup Selections

Tap Menu to access setup
options. Selections are
grouped by function: View,
Layers, and TAWS.
Manually inhibits FLTA or PDA visual alerts for low altitude

INHIBIT
approaches.
Automatically inhibits FLTA alerts when the aircraft meets the
following approach criteria.
AUTOMATIC • Altitude < 200 ft above runway elevation
INHIBIT
• Position < 0.5 NM off approach end or between each
runway end

Hazard Awareness
ENABLE FLAP OVERRIDE

When the Flaps Override option is enabled, “FLAP OVRD” annunciates at the bottom
of the TAWS-A display. The annunciation is not shown if GPWS alerts (including FIT)
are also inhibited.
Tap Menu > Flap Override to toggle the override state.
Flap Override
Annunciation
GSD alerting is only active after departure and the following conditions are met:
• An ILS, LPV, or LNAV/VNAV approach is active and vertical navigation
indications are being displayed.
• Aircraft is below 1,000 ft AGL.
• Gear is configured for landing.
When a GSD caution alert occurs, the aural and visual annunciation “GLIDESLOPE” is
issued. If a GSD caution alert occurs on an LPV, or LNAV/VNAV approach, the aural
and visual annunciation “GLIDESLOPE” is issued.

Hazard Awareness
INHIBIT GLIDESLOPE/GLIDEPATH DEVIATION ALERTS (GSD)

When Glideslope (G/S) alerts are inhibited, they are only inhibited for a single
approach. To inhibit G/S alerts on the next approach, the G/S Inhibit function must be
activated again between the first and second approaches.
Tap Menu > G/S Inhibit to inhibit or enable glideslope or glidepath alerts.
G/S Inhibit
Annunciation
G/S Inhibit Function1

• GSD alerts are inhibited independent from all other FLTA, PDA, and GPWS alerts
• Only active for a single approach; does not remain active for subsequent
approaches
1 GTN Xi software earlier than v20.40: To prevent nuisance GSD alerts, always activate the G/S Inhibit
function when flying a localizer backcourse approach.

Hazard Awareness
INHIBIT GPWS ALERTS (EDR, ECR, FIT, AND NCR)

The Inhibit GPWS function only affects GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR, NCR, and FIT).
Alerting for FLTA, PDA, and GSD is controlled independently from the GPWS alerts
listed below.
EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited as a group.
Discretion should be used when inhibiting alerts and the GPWS system should be
enabled when appropriate. When these alerts are inhibited, “GPWS INHB”
annunciates at the bottom of the TAWS-A display.
Tap Menu > GPWS Inhibit to inhibit or enable GPWS alerts (choice dependent upon
current state).
GPWS Inhibit
Annunciation

Hazard Awareness
ALTITUDE VOICE CALL OUT ALERTS

TAWS-A provides aural advisory alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at 500 ft
above the terrain, as determined by the radar altimeter (if greater than 5 NM from
the nearest airport) or 500 ft above the nearest runway threshold elevation (if less
than 5 NM from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this altitude, TAWS-A issues
the aural alert message “Five-hundred.”
Pilot Configurable VCOs

Additional voice call out (VCO) alerts may be selected by the flight crew to occur at
the following altitudes.
PILOT CONFIGURABLE VCOs

Based on nearest runway
threshold when within 5 NM • 400 ft • 300 ft • 200 ft • 100 ft
of the airport
Based on radar altimeter • 50 ft • 40 ft • 30 ft • 20 ft • 10 ft
Tap Menu > ALT Callouts,

and toggle the desired
altitude key(s).

Hazard Awareness
TAWS-A Alerts
TAWS-A ALERT INDICATIONS

Pop-up Alert:
• “Terrain Ahead - Pull Up”
or
PULL UP • “Terrain - Pull Up”
Aural Message:
• “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Pop-up Alert:
• “Obstacle Ahead - Pull Up”
or
PULL UP • “Obstacle Pull Up”
Aural Message:
• “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Pop-up Alert: “Wire Ahead - Pull Up”
PULL UP Aural Message:

• “Wire Ahead, Pull Up; Wire Ahead, Pull Up”
or
• “Wire, Wire; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Condition: Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
Aural Message: “<whoop> <whoop> Pull Up”
Condition: Excessive Closure Rate Warning (ECR)
Aural Message: “<whoop> <whoop> Pull Up”

Hazard Awareness

Pop-up Alert:
• “Terrain Ahead”
or
TERRAIN • “Caution - Terrain”
Aural Message:
• “Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
Pop-up Alert:
• “Obstacle Ahead”
or
OBSTACLE • “Caution - Obstacle”
Aural Message:
• “Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
Pop-up Alert: “Wire Ahead”
WIRE Aural Message:

• “Wire Ahead; Wire Ahead”
or
• “Caution, Wire; Caution, Wire”
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Don’t Sink”
Condition: Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Sink Rate”
Aural Message: “Sink Rate”
Condition: Excessive Closure Rate Caution (ECR)
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Terrain”
Aural Message: “Terrain, Terrain”

Hazard Awareness

Condition: Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
Pop-up Alert:
or
TERRAIN • “Too Low - Terrain”
Aural Message:
or
• “Too Low, Terrain”
Condition: Flight Into Terrain High Speed Caution (FIT)
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Too Low, Terrain”
Condition: Flight Into Terrain Gear Caution (FIT)
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Too Low, Gear”
Aural Message: “Too Low, Gear”
Condition: Flight Into Terrain Flaps Caution (FIT)
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Too Low, Flaps”
Aural Message: “Too Low, Flaps”
Condition: Flight Into Terrain Takeoff Caution (FIT)
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Too Low, Terrain”
Condition: Glideslope Deviation Caution (GSD)1
GLIDESLOPE Pop-up Alert: “Glideslope”
Aural Message: “Glideslope”

Hazard Awareness

Condition: Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO)
Pop-up Alert: None
Aural Messages:
• “Five-Hundred”
Pilot Configurable VCOs:
• “Four Hundred”
None • “Three Hundred”
• “Two Hundred”
• “One Hundred”
• “Fifty”
• “Forty”
• “Thirty”
• “Twenty”
• “Ten”
1 GSD alert is available if a valid ILS is being used for navigation, even when no valid GPS signal is being
received.

Hazard Awareness
TAWS-A SYSTEM STATUS

During power-up, TAWS-A conducts
a self-test of its aural and visual
annunciations. An aural alert is
issued upon test completion.
TAWS-A System Testing is disabled
when ground speed exceeds 30 kts.
You can manually initiate the system

test anytime the aircraft is
on-ground. Read more about this
option in Terrain Setup.
TAWS-A SYSTEM STATUS INDICATIONS

Condition: TAWS available
None
Aural Message: “TAWS Available”
Condition: TAWS system test in progress
TAWS TEST
Aural Message: None
Condition: TAWS system test is successful
None
Aural Message: “TAWS System Test OK”
Condition: TAWS alerting is disabled
TAWS INHB
Aural Message: None
Condition:
TAWS is not available due to one of the following:
• No GPS position
TAWS N/A
• GPS position unavailable/degraded
• Outside of terrain database coverage
Aural Message: “TAWS Not Available”
Condition:
• TAWS system test fails
• Incorrect TAWS configuration
TAWS FAIL
• Invalid/missing terrain, airport, or obstacle database
• TAWS audio fault
Aural Message: “TAWS System Failure”

Hazard Awareness
TAWS-A SYSTEM STATUS INDICATIONS

Condition: Sufficient GPS signal reception restored
None Aural Message:
“TAWS Available” (aural message only in flight)
Condition: GPWS Inhibit function active
GPWS INHB
Aural Message: “GPWS System Failure”
Condition:
GPWS is not available due to one of the following:
GPWS N/A • Radar altimeter unavailable
Condition:
• Radar altimeter unavailable
GPWS FAIL
Condition: Glideslope Inhibit function active
G/S INHB
Aural Message: None
Condition: FLAP Override function active
FLAP OVRD
Aural Message: None

Hazard Awareness
TAWS-A ABNORMAL OPERATIONS

TAWS-A continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity,
flap and landing gear position, radar altimeter input, and GPS status.
If the GTN does not contain Terrain and Obstacle databases (or the databases are
invalid), the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is generated along with the
“TAWS FAIL” alert annunciation.
TAWS-A requires a 3D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy
minimums. Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out
of the database coverage area, the annunciation “TAWS N/A” is generated in the
annunciation window and on the TAWS-A page, the aural message “TAWS Not
Available” is generated if airborne, some TAWS-A terrain alerts will not be issued,
and GPWS alerting (which are not dependent upon GPS position) will continue to
operate. When the GPS signal is re-established and the aircraft is within the database
coverage area, the aural message “TAWS Available” is generated.
TAWS-A also requires radar altimeter input. Should the radar altimeter input fail or
become degraded, the annunciation “GPWS FAIL” is generated in the annunciation
window and on the TAWS-A Page. The aural message “GPWS System Failure” is also
generated. The “GPWS FAIL” annunciation will also occur if both GPS altitude and
barometric altitude are unavailable. If only the GPWS system has failed, GPWS-based
alerts will not be available, while other TAWS-A alerting remains unaffected.
Multiple TAWS or GPWS annunciations cannot be displayed at the same time. When
multiple annunciations exist, a plus-sign will be present next to the annunciation. The
display of each annunciation will alternate with each being displayed for
approximately five seconds.

Hazard Awareness
HTAWS/HTerrain Alerting
ROTORCRAFT ONLY
NOTE
HTAWS-enabled units can be identified by going to the Terrain page and checking the
lower right-corner for “HTAWS.”
Garmin’s optional Helicopter Terrain Awareness Warning System (HTAWS) increases

situational awareness and assists in reducing controlled flight into terrain. HTAWS is
TSO-C194 authorized. HTerrain Alerting provides similar functionality but is not
TSO-C194 authorized.
HTAWS/HTerrain provides visual and aural indications when terrain and obstacles
pose a hazard to the aircraft.
HTAWS Terrain Display
HTAWS Relative
Terrain Depiction
Rotorcraft Ownship

Hazard Awareness
HTAWS/HTerrain Setup Selections

The Terrain setup menu provides options to acknowledge caution alerts, reduce
protection, or inhibit alerting.
View Display 360° or Arc view on the Terrain page.

Layers Display the flight plan and/or legend on the Terrain page.
Reduce alerting thresholds and suppresses caution alert
indications (aural and visual).
• An external RP Mode switch and an external alert
RP Mode
acknowledge switch can be used
• “RP Mode” displays in the terrain annunciator field
whenever protection is reduced
When ground speed is less than 30 knots,
“HTAWS INHB” / ”TER INHB” automatically annunciates
and cannot be removed by menu option selection.
Other features include:
• Inhibit mode deactivates aural and visual alerts
(Use discretion when inhibiting the terrain system
and remember to enable the system when
HTAWS/HTerrain
appropriate)
Inhibit
• VCOs are not inhibited in Inhibit mode
• All FLTA aural and visual alerting suppressed
• HTAWS/HTerrain should only be inhibited when in
visual contact with terrain and obstacles
• HTAWS/HTerrain configured units will always
power up with HTAWS/HTerrain alerts uninhibited
Test Initiate a manual test of the terrain system. Available only
HTAWS/HTerrain when the rotorcraft is on the ground.
Select altitude for VCOs. Options:
• 500 ft • 400 ft • 300 ft • 200 ft • 100 ft
ALT Callouts1
Additional options available if connected to a radar
altimeter: • 50 ft • 40 ft • 30 ft • 20 ft • 10 ft
1 Available only with GTN Xi software v20.40 and later.

Hazard Awareness
HTAWS/HTerrain Alerts
These alerts employ either a caution or warning alert severity level. Caution alerts
display as constant black text on a yellow background. Warning alerts display as
constant white text on a red background.
When the system issues an alert:
• An alert annunciation appears in a dedicated field on the annunciator bar
• An aural alert in the form of a voice call out accompanies the visual indication
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE

Unit issues terrain alerts when the aircraft altitude is below the terrain elevation and
when aircraft is projected to come within minimum clearance values of the terrain.
Any threat locations are depicted on the display. There are two levels of severity for
FLTA alerts. They are cautionary (amber) and warning (red).
FLTA Caution:
• Estimated potential impact in approximately 30 seconds after a caution
pop-up alert and annunciation
• Accompanied by the aural message “Caution Terrain; Caution Terrain”
• The time to an alert can vary with conditions, therefore there is no guarantee
of a 30 second caution alert being issued
FLTA Warning:
• Warning pop-up alerts issued 15 seconds prior to estimated potential impact
in normal mode and approximately 10 seconds in RP mode
• Accompanied by the aural message “Warning - Terrain, Terrain” or
“Warning - Obstacle, Obstacle”
• The time to an alert can vary with conditions, therefore there is no guarantee
of a 15/10 second warning alert being issued

Hazard Awareness
HTAWS/HTERRAIN VOICE CALL OUT ALERTS

FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Pilot configurable VCO alert options available only with GTN Xi software v20.40
and later
Pilot configurable aural advisory alerts are available for the following altitudes.
• 500 ft to 100 ft above terrain in 100-foot increments
• 50 ft to 10 ft above terrain in 10-foot increments
(with radar altimeter input)
Descending to a selected altitude generates an aural message. No display
annunciations or pop-up alerts accompany this message.
HTAWS/HTERRAIN ALERT RESPONSE

Upon receiving a warning alert, immediately maneuver the rotorcraft in response to
the alert message unless the terrain or obstacle can be clearly identified visually and
determined not to pose an operational safety risk.
A caution alert indicates terrain or obstacle nearby. If possible, visually locate the
terrain or obstacle for avoidance. A warning may follow the caution if the rotorcraft’s
path toward the terrain or obstacle is not changed.
Display of terrain and obstacles on the display is supplemental data only.
Maneuvering solely by reference to the terrain and obstacle data is not
recommended or authorized.

Hazard Awareness
HTAWS/HTERRAIN ALERT INDICATIONS

Condition: FLTA Terrain Warning
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Warning - Terrain”
Aural Message: “Warning - Terrain, Terrain”
Condition: FLTA Obstacle Warning
OBSTACLE Pop-up Alert: “Warning - Obstacle”
Aural Message: “Warning - Obstacle, Obstacle”
Condition: FLTA Wire Warning
Pop-up Alert: “Warning - Wire”
WIRE
Aural Message:
“Wire Ahead Pull Up, Wire Ahead Pull Up”
Condition: FLTA Terrain Caution
TERRAIN Pop-up Alert: “Caution - Terrain”
Aural Message: “Caution -Terrain, Terrain”
Condition: FLTA Obstacle Caution
OBSTACLE Pop-up Alert: “Caution - Obstacle”
Aural Message: “Caution - Obstacle, Obstacle”
Condition: FLTA Wire Caution
WIRE Pop-up Alert: “Caution - Wire”
Aural Message: “Wire Ahead”

Hazard Awareness
HTAWS/HTERRAIN ALERT INDICATIONS

Condition: Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO)
• HTAWS/HTerrain provides optional 500 ft through
100 ft (in 100-ft increments) altitude voice call out
alerts
• Additional values of 50 ft, 40 ft, 30 ft, 20 ft, and
10 ft are available if connected to a radar altimeter
Pop-up Alert: None
Aural Messages:
• “Five Hundred”
None
• “Four Hundred”
• “Three Hundred”
• “Two Hundred”
• “One Hundred”
• “Fifty”
• “Forty”
• “Thirty”
• “Twenty”
• “Ten”

Hazard Awareness
HTAWS/HTERRAIN SYSTEM STATUS

During unit power up, terrain and obstacle database versions display along with a
pilot disclaimer. A terrain system self-test occurs at this time. An aural alert is issued
upon test completion.
SYSTEM TEST RESULT AURAL MESSAGE

Self-test is successful “HTAWS Test OK”
HTAWS
Self-test fails “HTAWS Failure”
HTerrain Self-test is successful “Terrain System Test OK”

Alerting Self-test fails “Terrain System Failure”
A textual annunciation accompanies the aural message if the self-test fails. For a list
of possible alerts, refer to the annunciations table in this section.
You can manually initiate the system test anytime the rotorcraft is on-ground.
Read more about this option in HTAWS/HTerrain Setup Selections.
HTAWS/HTerrain Failure Alert

If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, “HTAWS FAIL” / ”TER FAIL”
annunciates accompanied by the aural message “HTAWS Failure” / ”Terrain System
Failure.”
HTAWS/HTerrain Not Available Alert

• Requires a 3D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy
minimums.
• “HTAWS N/A” / ”TER N/A” annunciates if the solution becomes degraded or
the rotorcraft is out of database coverage area.

Hazard Awareness
HTAWS/HTERRAIN SYSTEM STATUS INDICATIONS

Condition:
• HTAWS/HTerrain has been inhibited by the crew
HTAWS INHB or
• The aircraft ground speed is below 30 knots
(automatic inhibiting)
Pop-up Alert: None
TER INHB
Aural Message: None
Condition: HTAWS not available
HTAWS N/A Pop-up Alert: None
Aural Message: “HTAWS Not Available”
Condition: HTerrain not available
TER N/A Pop-up Alert: None
Aural Message: ”Terrain System Not Available”
Condition: HTAWS system fails
HTAWS FAIL Pop-up Alert: None
Aural Message: “HTAWS Failure”
Condition: HTerrain system fails
TER FAIL Pop-up Alert: None
Aural Message: ”Terrain System Failure”
Condition:
• Alerting thresholds are reduced
• Visual and aural annunciation of caution alerts are
RP MODE
suppressed
Pop-up Alert: None
Aural Message: None

6 Abnormal Operations
EMERGENCY MODES AT A GLANCE ...........................................................6-2
SMART GLIDE ..........................................................................................................6-4
EMERGENCY DESCENT ................................................................................... 6-27

Abnormal Operations
Emergency Modes at a Glance

Emergency modes are available to assist you in the event of
engine failure or a loss of cabin pressure.
NOTE
While emergency features can assist in workload reduction, it is the responsibility of the
pilot in command to know and follow all published AFM/POH normal and emergency
procedures.
Emergency Page, GTN 650Xi

Emergency modes are accessible
via the Emergency page. Available
options are dependent upon
configuration.
A status window displays information related to the

active emergency mode.
Contact a Garmin dealer to see if emergency features are available for your aircraft.

Abnormal Operations
Smart Glide Emergency Descent Mode

Emergency
engine failure cabin depressurization, fire
Condition
Pilot
coherent hypoxic1
Assumption
Mode
manual automatic2 or manual
Activation
Active AFCS
IAS to best glide speed IAS to VMO (fast)
Vertical Mode3
Active AFCS
GPS or ROL at wings level HDG
Lateral Mode3
Controlling LRU GTN Xi GDU TXi (PFD)
1
Pilots experiencing hypoxia may be incoherent or unconscious.
2 Mode activation may occur automatically depending on configuration.
3 Automatic flight director mode change available only with GFC 500/600.

Abnormal Operations
Smart Glide
In the event of engine failure or partial power loss, this
feature allows you to quickly locate and plot a direct
course to the most suitable airport within glide range,
avoiding terrain and obstacles along the way.
WARNING
Do not rely solely upon Smart Glide for navigation, airspeed and altitude
management, or landing field selection. It is the pilot’s responsibility to navigate,
manage airspeed and altitude, and determine the best field for landing.
NOTE
Smart Glide is not an autonomous landing system. It indicates the latest appropriate time
for the pilot to take control of the aircraft by issuing visual and aural “Maneuver and
Land” alerts. It is the pilot’s responsibility to disengage the autopilot (if present) and safely
fly the approach and landing.
• Garmin PFD or Garmin ADI (e.g., GI 275)
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Does not provide automatic weather avoidance, vertical guidance, or altitude
management
• Manual activation only
Smart Glide is unavailable when:
• On the ground and below 1,000 ft AGL (after takeoff)
• Descending below 200 ft AGL (after having reached 1,000 ft AGL)
• Flying at altitudes above 36,000 ft (11,000 m)
• One of the following is lost: GPS, ADC, or AHRS
• A crossfill error occurs and the cross-side navigator is GTN Xi1
• The system is initializing (lasts approximately 40 seconds after unit power up)2
OPTIONAL COMPONENTS
Feature availability is dependent upon software version. Contact a Garmin dealer for more
information.
• G3X • GI 275 • FIS-B In source3
• G5 EFI • G500/G600/G700 TXi4
• GDL 69/69A3 • GFC 500/600 autopilot5
1 Dual GTN Xi installations only. Crossfill errors occur only when both units are online. For information on
how to prevent crossfill errors after installing databases, read Synchronize Databases Across Multiple Units
in section 2. 2 Results in a system advisory message if initialization occurs during flight.
3 Provides datalink winds aloft and METAR information. 4 Requires GDU TXi software v3.30 or later.
5
Automatically engages servos and activates airspeed, wings-level, and GPS flight director modes.

Abnormal Operations
How it Works
Activate Smart Glide when engine
failure occurs. Activation options
vary according to airframe.
• Airframes with a dedicated
Smart Glide switch: Push and
release the dedicated switch.
• Airframes without a dedicated
Smart Glide switch: Push and
hold the Direct To key on
GTN Xi for 2 seconds.
• All installations: Go to the
Emergency page and tap
Smart Glide.
GTN Xi signals all configured LRUs

that Smart Glide is active.
The “Hold for Smart Glide Activation” control label
appears near the bottom of the display when you
activate the feature using the Direct To key.

Abnormal Operations
UPON ACTIVATION
Dual GTN Xi Installations:
GTN 1 displays Smart Glide
indications on Map, while GTN 2
defaults to the Emergency page.
Single GTN Xi Installations:
Map automatically opens and
displays Smart Glide indications.
Installations with GFC 500/600
Autopilot:
If present, the GFC 500/600
autopilot engages servos when
the aircraft is more than 2 NM
from the destination airport.
Coupling will not occur if less than
2 NM; however, the autopilot will
remain coupled if servos are
already engaged. Flight director
modes activate as follows:
• IAS to target the
configured glide speed
• ROL with wings level
reference attitude
• GPS upon calculation of
Dual GTN Xi configuration with dedicated map
display on GTN 750Xi (GTN 1) and Emergency page the Smart Glide route
on GTN 650Xi (GTN 2).

Abnormal Operations
Smart Glide Function

Functionality changes based on whether or not a suitable destination airport is
within the estimated glide range.
Suitable airport within glide range:
• Configures Map to show pertinent glide information, including
Smart Glide Range Ring and arrival AGL
• Replaces existing flight plan with a direct glide route to a suitable destination
airport
• Provides a list of alternate airports that are within the estimated glide range
• Indicates the best glide speed for the aircraft at gross weight
• Triggers autopilot flight director modes to target configured best glide speed
and follow the GPS Smart Glide direct-to route1
• Alerts pilot if glide destination falls outside the Smart Glide Range Ring
• Allows direct tuning of emergency transponder code 77002
• Tunes standby COM to destination CTAF or tower frequency
• CDI scale is set to 0.30 NM
No suitable airport within glide range:

• Configures Map to show pertinent glide information, including
Smart Glide Range Ring
• Indicates the best glide speed for the aircraft at gross weight
• Triggers autopilot flight director modes to target configured best glide speed
and level the wings1
• Allows direct tuning of emergency transponder code 77002
• Tunes standby COM to emergency frequency 121.5
• Provides altitude voice callouts for 2,000, 1,000, and 500 ft AGL
1
Requires a GFC 500/600 autopilot.
2 Requires a compatible transponder that can be controlled from GTN Xi.

Abnormal Operations
DURING SMART GLIDE MODE

Smart Glide calculates the glide
route to a suitable destination
airport. It then plots a direct
course to the airport, replacing
the existing flight plan.
Airport selection is based on
specific characteristics and
conditions. For more about how
Smart Glide prioritizes airports,
read Glide Destination Airport
Criteria.
The Glide key replaces the Messages key when the

Emergency page is not active.
Standby COM frequency tunes to either the airport CTAF or

tower frequency (if the active frequency is not already tuned).
Glide Destination Airport Criteria

Smart Glide will only suggest airports that meet the runway surface requirement.1
Any remaining airports are prioritized if:
• Weather conditions are MVFR or better2
• Estimated AGL altitude upon arrival is higher
• The runway is longer
Airports are de-prioritized if:
• The airport type is Private
• Weather conditions are IFR or lower2
• The longest runway is less than the configured minimum desired runway length1
• Gust speed is higher than configured maximum gust speed1
1 For aircraft specific information, consult the AFMS.
2
Weather rankings apply only to airports with weather reporting capability. Weather affects ranking only
if the aircraft is equipped for weather data and weather information is current.

Abnormal Operations
The yellow Smart Glide Range Ring

automatically appears on all
configured moving map displays
(i.e., Map and HSI Map). Unlike the
normal mode Glide Range Ring,
this ring uses real-time data to
calculate an estimated glide ratio
based on current aircraft glide
performance and available wind
data. Shading outside the ring
denotes areas not within
estimated gliding distance.
An altitude label indicates the
estimated arrival AGL for the
airport. Runway extensions and
AGL and DIS/ BRG APT user fields
turn on if not already active.
Map features automatically declutter and TOPO and
Terrain overlays turn on if not already active. Map
features revert to their previous settings when you
cancel Smart Glide.
HSI Map & MFD Map, GDU TXi
Smart Glide & Glide Range Ring

The Glide Range Ring uses color to indicate its current behavior. Under normal
conditions, the ring is based on the configured glide ratio (cyan coloration). Upon
Smart Glide activation, GTN Xi begins to measure the actual glide ratio and updates
the ring accordingly (yellow coloration). If no aircraft configuration changes are
made (e.g., flaps, gear), the measured glide ratio should reach steady state within
30 seconds of achieving stable glide. After configuration changes, it may take up
to 30 seconds for GTN Xi to determine the new glide ratio.

Abnormal Operations
While en route, GTN Xi navigates

directly to the center of the
airport.
Unless already completed,
disengage the autopilot
(if equipped) and land the
aircraft when you receive the
“Maneuver and Land” alert.
Smart Glide does not manage

altitude. In order to make a safe
landing, you may need to add
drag and/or maneuver the
aircraft off route before reaching
the airport.
Flashing textual annunciations alert the pilot of warning, caution, and advisory
conditions. These annunciations appear in a banner on the Emergency page and over
the route display on Map. They turn solid or disappear after 5 seconds.
Advisory Alert Caution Alert
Annunciates when the aircraft is Annunciates when the destination

4 NM from airport. airport is unreachable.
Warning Alert
Annunciates when the aircraft is

2 NM from airport.
Flashing Alert Annunciations

• “AIRPORT OUT OF RANGE”1
• “APPROACHING AIRPORT”1
• “MANEUVER AND LAND”1
• ”ALTN APT OUT OF RANGE”2 For a list of possible Smart Glide
1
alerts, refer to the annunciation
Turns solid after 5 seconds.
2 Disappears after 5 seconds. tables in Smart Glide Alerts.

Abnormal Operations
Enable Smart Glide Activation

Tapping Smart Glide Activation toggles
activation between Enabled and Disabled.
This key resides in the Emergency menu.
Disabling Smart Glide activation inhibits all methods of activation. An advisory

message informs you of the following:
“SMART GLIDE Disabled. Activation manually disabled by pilot.”
To enable or disable Smart Glide activation:

From the Home page, tap Emergency > Menu > Smart Glide Activation.
Activate Smart Glide

NOTE
Contact a Garmin dealer if your installation does not provide access to emergency
features.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
Activation options are dependent upon installer configuration. If configured for an external
switch, activation via the Direct To key is not available.

You may activate Smart Glide from
any configured GTN Xi Series
navigator or MFD TXi series display
unit. If installed, an external switch
allows manual activation without
the use of a touchscreen.
A message in the Emergency Mode Status window

informs you that no emergency modes are active.

Abnormal Operations
ACTIVATE SMART GLIDE VIA EXTERNAL SWITCH

From a dedicated external switch:
Press or toggle the dedicated switch (if configured).
ACTIVATE SMART GLIDE USING THE DIRECT TO KEY

Push and hold the Direct To key for 2 seconds. Activation occurs
following a 3-2-1 countdown.
ACTIVATE SMART GLIDE FROM THE EMERGENCY PAGE

WHERE TO FIND IT The Smart Glide activation key resides on the
Emergency page of the configured GTN Xi Series
Home navigator or MFD TXi series display unit.
Emergency From the Home page:
Smart Glide Tap Emergency > Smart Glide.

Abnormal Operations
View Smart Glide Status Information

Tapping Glide opens the Emergency page. Refer here for active route and longest
runway details, the configured best glide speed for the aircraft, and available control
options. This page is also accessible via the Emergency icon on the Home page.
When Smart Glide is active, this key The Message key returns once the
replaces the Message key in the Emergency page opens or when
control bar. you cancel Smart Glide.
2
7
1 Mode Status Banner 5 Menu Key
2 Active Route Display 6 Smart Glide Controls
3 Longest Runway Information 7 Best Glide Speed Indication
4 MSG Key (active)

Abnormal Operations
ACTIVE ROUTE DISPLAY
Shows the active direct route for gliding to the destination airport.
Information includes:
• Active airport identifier
• Airport name
• Estimated arrival AGL
Arrival AGL (or extra altitude) is the aircraft’s estimated height above ground level
when crossing the center of the airport.
Active Flight Plan, GTN 750Xi Series

Upon activation, Smart Glide
replaces the active flight plan
with a new direct course.
A message informs you that the
flight plan is unavailable while
Smart Glide is active.
GTN 650Xi SERIES

Active route identifiers appear on the Emergency page, active flight plan,
Default Navigation page, and Map.
GTN 750Xi SERIES
Active route identifiers appear on the Emergency page, active flight plan, and Map.
Active route identifiers appear in multiple locations on configured Garmin displays.

For details about the Smart Glide indications on these units, consult the associated
pilot’s guide.

Abnormal Operations
LONGEST RUNWAY INFORMATION
NOTE
Wind data displays for airports without weather reporting if another airport with valid
weather data is within 5 NM. The pilot is responsible for determining current wind
direction and intensity.
View details about the destination runway.
Identification Surface Type

Number Length and Width1 (hard/soft)
Headwind and Crosswind

(if available)
[To include image.]
Headwind data field changes color to indicate when tailwind conditions exist.
Advisory wind data received via datalink could be up to 90 minutes old.
“Wind data not available” Indication

This message displays in the absence of valid wind data.
1 Runway length is always listed first followed by the runway width.

Abnormal Operations
BEST GLIDE SPEED INDICATION

Shows the airspeed necessary to follow the calculated glide route.
This value is configured by the installer

and based on the published AFM/POH
value for best glide speed at gross weight.
SMART GLIDE CONTROLS

Available control options allow you to:
Emergency Smart Glide Page
• Direct tune emergency transponder
Squawk 7700 code 7700
Map
• View Smart Glide information on Map
Alternate Airport
Cancel Glide • View and select alternate airports
• Cancel Smart Glide
Tune Transponder
Tapping Squawk 7700 tunes the transponder to
emergency code 7700. Use this function to immediately
alert all air traffic control facilities in the area of your
emergency.
A pop-up message requests

confirmation.
Tapping OK confirms the request.
Tapping Cancel closes the pop-up
without alerting ATC.

Abnormal Operations
View Smart Glide Information on Map

The Map key provides direct access to the moving map.
Map shows a graphical representation of the active
direct-to course for the suggested airport. Shading
denotes areas estimated to be unreachable on glide.
Map, GTN 750Xi
Estimated
Arrival AGL Label
Active Leg to
Center of Airport
Glide Range Ring
Beyond Reach
Shading
To return to the Emergency page, tap Glide.
An alert banner displays textual warning, caution, and advisory annunciations.

User fields indicating the aircraft's present AGL and its distance/bearing from the
destination airport display on a solid black background for greater visibility. Other
user fields declutter along with unnecessary map overlays.
DIS/BRG APT Alert AGL

User Field Banner User Field
If previously configured by the pilot, these two user fields remain in the same location once Smart Glide
is activated. If not configured, they will appear in the upper corners as shown. If only one field is
configured, the other will appear in the upper left or right corner.

Abnormal Operations
Data removed during Data depicted during

Smart Glide Smart Glide
• Airways • Airports
• Best Glide Airport indicator • Active glide route
• Charts overlay • AGL and DIS/BRG APT user fields
• Fuel Range Ring • Alert banner
• Heliports • Estimated Arrival AGL label
• Intersections • Glide Range Ring
• METAR product timestamp • Runway Extensions
• NAV Range Ring • Terrain overlay
• NEXRAD • TOPO overlay
• TOPO Scale
• User fields other than AGL and
DIS/BRG APT
• Visual Approach selector key
GTN 750Xi SERIES

Active glide route identifiers appear on the GPS NAV Status bar.

Abnormal Operations
Select an Alternate Airport on Map

You can select an alternate airport by tapping your
finger directly on the map display. Selecting an airport
icon within glide range opens an information banner. The
Glide to Airport key replaces the Graphically Edit FPL
key during Smart Glide mode.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
Map displays up to 25 alternate airports within the estimated glide range. If more than
25 airports are within glide range, not all will be selectable for the destination airport.
This feature is available only for airports in the database.
Map, GTN 650Xi

1. Open Map to view all airports
within glide range.
Selected Airport
2. Select the airport that best

suits your needs.
3. Tap Glide To Airport.
The active glide route adjusts to

reflect the new destination.
GPS NAV status bar updates to
show the new route identifiers
(GTN 750Xi Series only).
The new waypoint now appears
as active atop the alternate
airport list.

Abnormal Operations
Find Alternate Airport

You may select an alternate airport directly from the
map display or from the Alternate Airport list.
Tapping Alternate Airport displays only the airports
and runways within the projected glide range.
WARNING
Be aware that other airports or off airport landing areas may be available and
more suitable but unknown to the Smart Glide system. The pilot must evaluate
all options and choose the most appropriate course of action given the
conditions.
NOTE
This system is intended to aid the crew in the initial avionics setup during a glide
emergency and, if possible, assist the pilot in finding and navigating to a suitable airport
within the estimated glide range of the aircraft. The pilot must make every effort to
ensure that the system guidance is as desired.
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Lists up to 25 alternate airports within the estimated glide range
• Available only for airports in the database (e.g., private airports not in the database
do not appear in the list)
Alternate Airport List, GTN 650Xi

Runway length
Active Airport and surface
Indication type display for
the longest
Alternate runway at each
Airport
Indication airport.
Alternate airports appear until no longer within the

projected range.
Selecting an airport immediately creates a new direct route.

Tapping Glide or Back returns to the Emergency page.
Using the Direct To function to create and activate a new direct course automatically
cancels Smart Glide.

Abnormal Operations
Deactivate Smart Glide

You may deactivate Smart Glide at any time by tapping
Cancel Glide.
A pop-up message requests

confirmation.
Tapping OK confirms the request.
Tapping Back closes the pop-up
without deactivating Smart Glide.
Upon deactivation:
• Map features revert to their previous settings
• Active Flight Plan restores and activates the previous flight plan route
• Aural message “Smart Glide canceled” alerts flight crew of deactivation
• Autopilot (if present) remains in its current active modes or reverts to
ROL lateral mode
• CDI scale reverts to its previous setting

Abnormal Operations
Smart Glide Alerts

WARNING
Do not rely solely upon Smart Glide data for guidance or decision-making.
Smart Glide is intended only to enhance situational awareness during an
emergency. Always manage any emergency in accordance with the approved
flight manual or third-party operating instructions.
Textual annunciations alert the pilot of warning, caution, and advisory conditions
related to Smart Glide. An aural voice message may play depending on the alerted
condition.
Map, GTN 750Xi
Smart Glide Alert Banner
When an alert occurs:

• Textual annunciations appear
in a banner on the Emergency
page and over the route display
on Map1
• Emergency page opens if
another page is active2
• An aural voice message may
play
1
System failure alerts do not appear on Map.
2 System failure alerts only. In dual GTN Xi
installations, this occurs on GTN 2 only.

Abnormal Operations
SMART GLIDE ALERTING

ANNUNCIATION CONDITION | AURAL MESSAGE | BEHAVIOR
Condition:
Aircraft is 2 NM from the destination airport’s center.
If not already doing so, the pilot should disconnect the
autopilot (if equipped) and maneuver to manage altitude
MANEUVER AND for a safe landing.
LAND
Aural Message:
“Maneuver and land. Airport X o’clock. Two miles.”
Alert Behavior:
Flashing annunciation turns solid after 5 seconds.
Condition:
Smart Glide activates with wings level and no airport
NO AIRPORT IN
within estimated glide range.
RANGE
Aural Message:
“No airports within glide range.”
Condition:
Destination airport is out of estimated glide range. May
occur due to decreasing glide performance.
AIRPORT OUT OF Aural Message:
RANGE “Airport out of range.” (plays only once)
Alert Behavior:
Note: Estimated arrival AGL not available.
Condition:
The pilot selects an alternate airport via Map or the
alternate airport list, but the airport becomes
unreachable before Smart Guide can complete route
ALTN APT OUT OF calculation.
RANGE
Duration: 5 seconds
Aural Message: None
Alert Behavior:
Flashing annunciation disappears after 5 seconds.

Abnormal Operations

Condition:
Caution - Smart Glide is active within 2 NM of the
destination airport, the autopilot is engaged, and there is
not enough altitude for the system to safely make a full
None circle descent with 2,000 ft remaining. Disengage
autopilot to manage energy.
Aural Message:
“Disconnect autopilot.” (plays 10 seconds after arriving
within 2 NM of destination airport)
Condition:
System is calculating the glide route to a suitable
destination airport. Occurs during the following:
• Smart Glide activation
CALCULATING • Selection of an alternate destination (pilot override)
ROUTE • When the CDI exceeds half of full-scale deviation
Aural Message: None
Note:
Estimated arrival AGL not available until route calculation
is complete.
Condition:
Destination airport within range. Follow the displayed
GPS route.
Aural Messages:
ACTIVE • “Airport X o’clock. More than thirty miles.”
• “Airport X o’clock. X miles.”
• “Airport X o’clock. X and a half miles.”
• “Airport X o’clock. One mile.”
• “Airport X o’clock. Less than one mile.”
Condition:
Pilot attempts to activate Smart Glide via dedicated
aircraft switch or Direct To key while the system is
None
experiencing an error. On-screen Smart Glide key
not available.
Aural Message: “Smart Glide disabled.”

Abnormal Operations

Condition:
Aircraft is 4 NM from the destination airport’s center.
APPROACHING Aural Message:
AIRPORT “Approaching airport. X o’clock. Four miles.”
Alert Behavior:
Condition:
Smart Glide Pilot attempts to activate Smart Glide via dedicated
disabled until
aircraft switch or Direct To key while Smart Glide is
aircraft reaches
disabled on ground or before reaching 1,000 ft AGL.
1,000 ft AGL
Aural Message: “Smart Glide disabled. Low altitude.”
Condition:
None Pilot deactivates Smart Glide by tapping Cancel Glide.
Aural Message: “Smart Glide canceled.”
Condition:
None Pilot activates Smart Glide.
Aural Message: “Smart Glide active.”
Condition:
Smart Glide is active and current AGL reaches 500 ft.
None Aural Message: “Five hundred.”
Note:
Occurs only if unit is configured for Terrain Proximity.
Condition:
Smart Glide is active and current AGL reaches 1,000 ft.
None Aural Message: “One thousand.”
Note:
Occurs only if no airports are within range.
Condition:
Smart Glide is active and current AGL reaches 2,000 ft.
None Aural Message: “Two thousand.”
Note:
Occurs only if no airports are within range.
Condition:
None GFC transitions to autopilot engaged.
Aural Message: “Engaging autopilot.”

Abnormal Operations
System Failure Alerts

In the case of a Smart Glide system failure (e.g., position data failure), discontinue
use of Smart Glide for navigation. Use alternate forms of navigation and consider
alternate landing areas.
When a Smart Glide system failure occurs, the Emergency page automatically opens
if another page is active. In dual GTN Xi installations, this occurs on GTN 2 only.
These alerts do not appear on Map.
SYSTEM FAILURE ALERTING
Condition:
TERRAIN DB Terrain database has an error.
ERROR Aural Message:
“Smart Glide failure. Consider alternate landing area.”
Condition:
NAVIGATION DB Navigation database has an error.
Condition:
POSITION DATA Position or altitude data has an error.
Condition:
FPL LOAD Error occurs while attempting to calculate a route.
FAILURE Aural Message:

Abnormal Operations
Emergency Descent
Emergency Descent Mode (EDM) assists pilots of pressurized
aircraft in the event of cabin depressurization. Depending
on installation type, GTN Xi provides access to this feature
via the Emergency page.
• GDU 700( )/1060 PFD (host)
• GFC 600 autopilot configured for EDM
For automatic activation:
• GFC 600 must be configured with an air data module that provides cabin pressure
monitoring
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Availability and the manner in which activation occurs (manual or automatic)
dependent upon configuration
EDM Activation
If configured for cabin pressure
monitoring, the system monitors
cabin pressure once EDM is armed.
EDM is considered armed when:
• Autopilot is active
• Aircraft is above 15,000 ft MSL
Once armed, activation may occur
manually or automatically.
EDM is a function of GDU TXi. For more information regarding functionality, consult
G500(H)/G600/G700 TXi Pilot’s Guide.

Abnormal Operations
Manual Activation
WHERE TO FIND IT You can activate EDM one of two ways:
Home From the Home page:

Tap Emergency > Emergency Descent.
Emergency
Emergency
Descent From a dedicated external switch:
Enable the dedicated switch (if configured).
Automatic Activation
If the aircraft experiences decompression and cabin altitude increases beyond the
threshold configured for the aircraft, the system automatically triggers EDM.
Upon Activation
The status window displays a
warning message and timer.
Emergency descent occurs once
the timer expires. This delay can
range from 10 to 60 seconds.
Warning and timer indications are identical to those

appearing on the Emergency page of the host
GDU TXi.
If manually activated, you may

skip the delay and activate EDM
immediately by selecting
Emergency Descent again.
Status messages inform you of mode status.

7 Services
SIRIUSXM AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT..........................................................7-3
CONNEXT SERVICES............................................................................................7-9
Services
SERVICES
APPS & FUNCTIONS
Optional satellite services are available when your unit is

connected to a GDL 69/69A datalink receiver (Music) or
GSR 56 Iridium transceiver (Phone, SMS Text, and
Position Reports).
Phone SMS Text

• Place telephone calls • Compose & send messages
• Set up call notifications • Receive messages
• Set up text notifications
Music Position Reports

• Tune SXM radio • Set up automatic reporting
• Adjust radio volume • Transmit reports manually
Contacts
• Manage contacts
• Call or message contacts

Services
SiriusXM Audio Entertainment

The Music app provides controls for tuning and presetting
satellite radio music channels. This subscription-based
service is available through SiriusXM Satellite Radio.
• GDL 69A SiriusXM receiver
• Active SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription
1 7
2
6
5
4
3
Music Features
1 Channel Selection Key 5 Browse Categories Key
2 Channel Seek Controls 6 Volume Key
3 Preset Group Key 7 Current Selection Info
4 Preset Channel Keys 8 SXM Signal Level

Services
SiriusXM Audio Activation

The GDL 69A Status
page provides
information necessary
for activating
SiriusXM Satellite
Radio services.
OPEN GDL 69A STATUS PAGE

You can access this page one of two ways.
From the External LRUs list:
Home > System > External LRUs, locate GDL 69A and tap More Info
More Info Activation Incomplete

Key Indication
From the Music page:
Home > Services > Music > Status
COMPLETE SUBSCRIPTION ACTIVATION

1. Navigate to the GDL 69A Status page.
2. Verify activation. For entertainment subscriptions only, the status page displays
your Audio Radio ID and subscription information.
3. Tap Menu > Lock Activation > OK.

Services
Adjust Radio Volume

Tap the Volume key to adjust or
mute music volume.
Mute toggles
radio audio
output on or off.
Decrease Mute Increase Mute On

Volume Volume
Direct Channel Tuning

Music provides both numeric entry
SiriusXM Radio Options
and channel seek functionality.
• Channels 0 to 999
• Categories 0 to 63
Tapping CH Number allows you to

enter a specific radio channel by
number. The channel, song, artist,
and music category display for the
current selection.
Seek controls allow you to step to the

next or previous channel.

Services
Browse Music Channels

Tapping Browse allows you to scroll through a list of all available channels.
Current
Category
Current Selection
Channel
Selection Category
Key
Active
Channel
Indication
To filter the list according to a specific genre, tap Category

and then choose one of the available music types.
To choose all available types,

select All Categories.

Services
Assign Channel Presets

For quick tuning, use presets to
Quick Tuning Options store multiple channels in the
• Choice of three preset groups: unit’s memory.
XM 1, XM 2, XM 3
• Assign up to five preset channels
per group
ASSIGN A CHANNEL PRESET

1. Select a channel.
2. Tap Presets until the desired preset group displays.
3. Tap and hold any preset key for three seconds.
Unassigned Preset Keys
SELECT A PRESET
1. Select a preset group (XM 1, XM 2, or XM 3).
2. Tap any assigned preset key.
Assigned Preset Keys

Services
XM Data Link Failure

If the Audio Radio ID and/or Data Radio ID do not display during GDL 69A operation,
contact a Garmin dealer.
No Service Indication
and Missing Audio ID
Failure Annunciation
Troubleshooting the
GDL 69/69A
Datalink Receiver
GTN serves as the control head for
your remotely mounted
GDL 69/69A. In the event of a
receiver failure:
It may take several minutes for all
• View datalink receiver status
subscription data to become available
on the GDL 69 Status page
after unit power up.
• Verify the SiriusXM Satellite
For more information, consult
Radio subscription is active
GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio
• Check circuit breakers to Activation Instructions. For subscription
ensure power is applied to activation instructions, visit
the receiver https://www.siriusxm.com/sxmaviation.

Services
Connext Services
Optional 2-way text and voice
communication and GPS-referenced
position reporting apps are available
through the Iridium satellite network.
• GSR 56 satellite datalink
• Iridium satellite network subscription
• Valid phone number or email address for 2-way text messaging via SMS
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Applicable to the Iridium satellite telephone system only
Phone
Make and receive telephone calls using the Iridium satellite
communications network.
WHERE TO FIND IT Phone is accessible from the Services menu.
Home Incoming calls generate a pop-up, allowing you to

accept or ignore the call without leaving the
Services current screen.
Phone

Services
3 4
5 6
Phone Page
4 5
Phone Pop-up
1 Phone Status Window 5 Volume Controls
2 Phone Number Entry Key 6 Suppress Visuals Function
3 Call Key 7 In-call Distribution Controls1
4 End Call Key (inactive)

1 Available only when interfaced with a GMA 35 Audio Panel.

Services
Phone Volume
Tap the Volume keys to set
telephone volume to the preferred
level.
Volume displays as a percentage of
the maximum volume, with 0%
Decrease Increase being muted and 100% being
Volume Volume maximum volume.
Percent of
Max Volume These controls are grayed out when
the function is not available.
Volume controls are available

only when Phone is:
• Idle
• Connected
• Changing Volume
Phone Status Annunciations

Refer to the Status window for
current call time and operating
status.
ANNUNCIATION MEANING
Idle Phone is not communicating via GSR 56.
Initializing GSR 56 and its driver are initializing.
Call Time ##:## Duration of the current telephone call.
Connected GSR 56 is connected to the dialed number.
GSR 56 is in the process of connecting to the dialed
Connecting Call
number.
Changing Volume The volume level on GSR 56 is fluctuating.
Phone is in use by another service. Call may not
Busy
complete.
Dialing GSR 56 is dialing the number.
Incoming Call GSR 56 is receiving a call.
Hanging Up GSR 56 is disconnecting from the call.
Unavailable GSR 56 is not usable by the Iridium phone system.

Services
Suppress Visuals
FEATURE LIMITATIONS
• Applicable only to calls using the Iridium telephone system
Enabling this function inhibits visual indications of

incoming calls and text messages.
Tap Phone > Suppress Visuals, and select from the
following options.
On During
Off On
APR/MAPR/TERM
No suppression. Suppression active. Suppression active

You may transmit and Incoming call/text during approach, missed
receive calls normally pop-up indication will approach, and terminal
through the Iridium not resume until you operations only.
phone. turn suppression off.
Suppression does not

affect:
• Audible indications
(i.e., phone ringer,
incoming SMS chime) Garmin recommends inhibiting audio
• Outgoing calls from GSR 56 when the Iridium phone
• Answering incoming calls is not in use.
In-Call Distribution
• GMA 35 Audio Panel
Distribute telephone audio to selected crew and/or passenger positions.

These include:
• Pilot • Copilot • Passenger
You may toggle the telephone audio off to any position at any time.

Services
Outgoing Calls
Call someone directly or dial an
existing contact in your contact list.
MAKE A CALL
Tap Phone > Phone Number.
From here you may:
• Direct dial a number: Type the number you wish to call and then tap Enter.
• Dial an existing contact: Tap Contacts, select a name from the list, then
tap Call.
To cancel the call, tap End Call.
DATA ENTRY
If it is necessary to enter data during a call
(e.g., an automated phone menu prompts you
to make a numeric selection), tap Touchtone Entry
and enter the value using the provided keypad.

Services
Incoming Calls
Incoming calls generate a status
message. Options allow you to accept
or ignore the call.
ACCEPT A CALL
Tap Answer. Status window shows the call as “Connected” and the cumulative call
timer begins.
Upon accepting a call, you have the following options.
• Adjust call volume: Use volume controls to set the level according to
preference.
• Distribute telephone audio: Select Pilot, Co-Pilot, and/or Passenger.
• Hang up: Tap End Call.
IGNORE A CALL
Tap Ignore. This disconnects the call (i.e., hangs up).

Services
SMS Text
Send and receive text messages via phone or email through
your GSR 56 phone connection.
WHERE TO FIND IT Message tabs allow for management of all

incoming and outgoing messages. Each tab
Home displays a message list.
Services Notations indicate the status of messages
SMS Text within each list. The total number of messages
annunciates at the bottom of the pane.
Tab Message
Notations Quantity
Field
Inbox Lists up to 250 received messages.

Drafts Lists all saved outgoing messages.
Outbox Lists all sent messages pending transmittal.

Services
MESSAGE ICONS & NOTATIONS

TXing Sent
Draft message Sent message
pending transmittal (outbox)
New
Send/Resend
New message
Send message
(inbox)
Open
Failed
Message has been
Failed to send
read
Message Filtering & Setup Options

Tap Menu to access SMS text messaging
SMS Text Messaging filtering and setup options.
Menu
• Sort messages according to time or
Time address
Address
• Suppress incoming call indications
Mark All As Read
Delete All Messages • Mark or delete all messages
Suppress Visuals
Off
On
On During
APR/MAPR/TERM
Sort Messages Organize messages according to time.

By Time The most recent entry appears at the top of the list.
Sort Messages Organize messages according to address.
By Address Entries are listed in alphabetical order.
Mark All
Mark all inbox messages as read.
As Read
Delete All Remove all messages from each tab simultaneously.
Messages This command requires user confirmation.
Enable/disable the suppression function.
Suppression
Options: Off, On, On During APR/MAPR/TERM

Services
Send a Text Message

Compose and send a new text message via telephone or email.
1. Tap Compose.
2. Select the message destination:
Tap To, then choose either Phone
Number or Email Address.
3. Specify the recipient’s phone number
or email address. For existing contacts,
tap Contact and select the recipient’s
name from the list.
4. Tap Message and then type the
message content.
Recipient Field
Message Body
Message Options
Once you begin to compose your message,

Draft Message Options
you have the following options.
Delete • Delete the unsent message: Tap Delete.
Save
• Save the message as a draft: Tap Save.
Send
• Send the message: Tap Send.
Once sent, the message automatically appears in your outbox. Pending messages
remain in your outbox until they complete transmittal.

Services
Open a sent message if you wish to:

Sent Message Options
• Delete it from your outbox: Tap Delete.
Delete
• Save the phone number or email address:
Save Contact
Send Again
Tap Save Contact and enter the new
contact name.
• Resend after it failed to send on the first
attempt: Tap Send Again.
MESSAGE FAILED TO SEND

Failed messages remain in the outbox until they are resent
or deleted. The number of failed messages annunciates below
the tab name.
To resend the message:

Select the message from the outbox list, then tap Send Again.
If the message fails to send, you can tap Delete to remove it from the list.

Services
Receiving Text Messages

To view a new text message, tap Inbox and select the message from the list.
All received messages allow the following

Received Message Options
options.
Delete • Delete the message from your inbox:
Save Contact Tap Delete.
Reply
• Add the sender to your contact list:
Tap Save Contact and enter the new
contact name.
• Compose a response: Tap Reply.

Services
Position Reports
Enable automatic GPS-referenced position reports for
continuous monitoring of aircraft status while en route. This
function collects system variables and transmits them at
predefined intervals through the GSR 56.
WHERE TO FIND IT Set the report function to transmit

automatically based on a schedule of your
Home choice, or send a report immediately by
tapping Send Report.
Services
Position Reports
Position Report Data

Enabling the position reporting function allows those on the ground to better track
your progress while the aircraft is en route. Reports are sent to Garmin servers via the
Iridium satellite network. This information is accessible using a third-party flight
tracking service such as FlightAware or Leidos.
Position information includes:
• Message Type • Discrete Flags
• Date (day/month/year) • Time (hh/mm/ss)
• Position (lat/lon) • Ground Speed
• Ground Track • Heading
• Baro Altitude • True Airspeed
• Outside Air Temperature • Destination Airport
• ETE (hh/mm)
FlightAware subscribers can use position reports to determine if the aircraft is using a
position source other than ADS-B. Unlike ADS-B, these reports provide ETE and
destination information.
Position reports are useful for To set up position data forwarding,

monitoring the aircraft's en route contact Garmin Product Support
status in remote (oceanic) or and provide them with your
ADS-B underserved areas. They third-party flight tracking service
may also be used for Search and account information. Visit the
Rescue purposes when other Aviation Product Support page at
options are not available. flyGarmin.com for contact options.

Services
Position Reporting Status Annunciations

Position reporting enables when the aircraft is in the air. A window displays
the status of GSR 56 functions.
ANNUNCIATION MEANING
Idle GSR 56 reporting function is not in use.
GSR 56 reporting function is not in use.
Idle - On Ground
Aircraft is on the ground.
Initializing GSR 56 and its driver are initializing.
Transferring GSR 56 is transmitting a position report.
Unavailable GSR 56 is not usable by the reporting system.
GSR 56 Product
Information Reporting
Once GTN powers up, it takes
90 seconds for the GSR 56 to
report its serial number. During
this period, GSR 56 product
information status shows as
Waiting.

Services
Counters & Timers

Time Until Transmit Reports in Queue
• Countdown timer • Counter

• Shows time remaining until • Shows the number of reports
the next data transmission waiting in queue
• Dashes indicate when the
aircraft is on the ground
Position Reporting
Tapping Automatic Reporting toggles the automatic
position reporting function on or off.
SPECIFY A REPORT PERIOD

1. Enable automatic reporting.
2. Tap Report Period and specify a reporting interval between 2 and 60 minutes.
SEND A REPORT
1. Disable automatic reporting.
2. Tap Send Report.

Services
Contacts
Store up to 250 contacts. Call by telephone or send text
messages via SMS or email.
WHERE TO FIND IT Scroll the list or search by name. Contact names

are in alphabetical order.
Home
Services
Contacts
Create a Contact
1. Tap Add.
2. Enter the contact’s name, phone number, and/or email address using the
appropriate data entry keys.
3. Tap Save Contact.
The new contact appears in the list.
A field in the upper right corner of the page indicates the

total number of contacts in the list.
When direct dialing or storing a contact’s phone number, dial “1” before the area
code and seven-digit telephone number.
1 + area code + seven-digit telephone number

Services
Find a Contact
1. Tap Search.
2. Type the contact’s name and tap Enter.
The page displays the matching entry.

To return to the full list view, tap Clear Search.
Contact Options
Selecting an existing contact opens a menu.
Options allow you to:
• Dial a contact’s telephone
• Send a text message via phone or email
• Edit contact information
• Delete a contact from the list
DELETE A CONTACT
1. Select a name from the contact list.
2. Tap Delete.

8 Messages
ADVISORY MESSAGES.........................................................................................8-2
Messages
Advisory Messages
Message List
Advisories are system-related
messages relative to the display.
• Most recent advisories appear
at the top of the message list
• View-once advisories remain in
queue until viewed by the pilot
• Persistent (or conditional)
advisories remain active until
the indicated condition is
resolved
Dual GTN Installations

Advisory messages are not
crossfilled between GTN units.
Each unit displays messages based
on the data it receives. This may
result in duplicate messages
between units.
Always view the messages on
both GTNs to ensure that all
information is received.

Messages
Message Key
This key displays in the unit’s control bar when an advisory condition is present.
Tapping MSG once displays an advisory list. Tapping it again acknowledges all active
advisories and closes the list.
The key no longer displays after all active advisories are cleared.
The key flashes when a new It turns solid once all active
advisory is present. advisories are acknowledged.
Airspace Advisories
Alerted airspace types are based on pilot settings in the Airspace Alerts page.
These advisories are informational only. No action is necessary.
ADVISORY CONDITION
AIRSPACE ALERT
Aircraft is inside alerted airspace.
Inside airspace.
AIRSPACE ALERT
Alerted airspace is within 2 NM of the path and
Airspace within 2 NM and
projected to enter in less than 10 minutes.
entry in less than 10 minutes.
AIRSPACE ALERT
Aircraft is projected to enter alerted airspace
Airspace entry in less than
in less than 10 minutes.
10 minutes.
AIRSPACE ALERT Alerted airspace is less than 2 NM from the

aircraft. May not be projected to enter the
Within 2 NM of airspace.
airspace.

Messages
Database Advisories
ADVISORY CONDITION CORRECTIVE ACTION
Navigation databases do
Verify that the database
CROSSFILL ERROR not match between
version specified by both
GTN Navigation DB GTNs, resulting in a loss
GTNs is up to date. Update
mismatch. of communication
the database if needed.
between the two units.
A system ID mismatch
DATABASE
between the database Re-download and install all
Database not and the system unit databases. Contact a Garmin
unlocked for this results in a database dealer for support.
system. installation failure.
DATABASE
The Terrain or Obstacle Re-download and install the
Terrain or Obstacle database is missing or indicated database. Contact a
database not corrupt. Garmin dealer for support.
available.
Terrain/TAWS function
unavailable. Terrain
DATABASE
database cannot provide Load appropriate coverage
Terrain display elevation at the current area onto the external
unavailable for
GPS position. Aircraft is datacard.
current location.
outside the database
coverage area.
DATABASE Navigation database
Verify user-modified updates and the stored
Verify the procedures are
procedures in stored flight plan contains
correct.
flight plans are user-modified
correct. procedures.
The stored flight plan
DATABASE
contains an airway that is Verify all airways are correct. If
Verify airways in
inconsistent with the necessary, reload airways to
stored flight plan are
current navigation the stored flight plan routes.
correct.
database.
DATABASE Database update causes Verify cataloged flight plan
A procedure has flight plan to exceed and procedures are correct. If
been modified in a 100 waypoint limit. necessary, reload procedures
cataloged flight Procedure is removed or to the stored flight plan
plan. truncated as a result. routes.

Messages

Verify expiration date:
Home > System >
The charts database is System Status > Active tab
DATABASE approaching expiration. If available, load the next cycle
Chart database valid of the charts database into
until [date]. standby.
The charts database is Update the database if
expired. necessary for operation.
DATABASE Re-download and install the
Charts database
Chart function indicated database. Contact
verification failure.
unavailable. a Garmin dealer for support.
DATABASE
Chart database Re-download and install the
Charts database
incomplete. Some indicated database. Contact
verification failure.
charts may be a Garmin dealer for support.
unavailable.
Terrain database is not
available at system
DATABASE startup. Terrain
Terrain database is information and alerts
Re-load the database on the
not installed, is do not display.
external datacard.
corrupt, or is not The database may be
valid for this system. corrupt, not present,
or not authorized for
the unit.
DATABASE
Open the System Status page
Chart Streaming Chart streaming not
and check database
unavailable. Using available. GTN reverted to
synchronization status. If the
installed chart the currently installed
problem persists, contact a
database from charts.
Garmin dealer for support.
datacard.
DATABASE Wait for database
SYNC in progress. Database synchronization synchronization to complete.
View System Status is in progress. Restart GTN to use new
page for more info. databases.
Magnetic variation
flagged as unreliable in
MAGNETIC
the MagVar database.
VARIATION Verify that the geographical
Typically occurs when
Aircraft in area with region supports navigation
operating at high
large mag var. Verify based on magnetic variation.
latitudes that do not
all course angles.
support a magnetic
NAV angle.

Messages
Datalink Advisories
DATALINK
ADS-B In source detects
ADS-B In fault:
a UAT receiver fault.
UAT receiver.
DATALINK
ADS-B In source detects Service required.
ADS-B In fault:
a 1090 receiver fault. Contact dealer for support.
1090 receiver.
DATALINK FIS-B receiver reports a
FIS-B weather has failure. FIS-B products
failed. may not display.
1. Close the GDL 69/69A
circuit breaker.
2. Verify that the GDL 69/69A
unit is receiving power.
DATALINK
GTN loses 3. Ensure the aircraft has a
GDL 69 is
communication with clear view of the sky.
inoperative or
GDL 69/69A. Datalink 4. Verify subscription status is
connection to GTN
data not available. active (Home > System >
is lost.
External LRUs, locate
GDL 69/69A and tap
More Info).
5. Contact dealer for service.
DATALINK
GDL 88 cannot transmit
GDL 88 ADS-B
the ADS-B message due
failure. Unable to
to an internal failure or
transmit ADS-B
an antenna failure.
messages.
GDL 88 detects a fault
DATALINK
with one of the
GDL 88 ADS-B fault.
UAT/1090 antennas.
Service required.
DATALINK Contact dealer for support.
GDL 88 loses
GDL 88 ADS-B fault.
communication with the
Pressure altitude
pressure altitude source.
input is invalid.
DATALINK
GDL 88 ADS-B is not
GDL 88 detects a position
transmitting
input fault.
position. Check GPS
devices.

Messages

DATALINK
GDL 88 GDL 88 detects a
configuration configuration module
module needs fault.
service.
DATALINK
GDL 88 control input GDL 88 loses
fault. Check communication with the
transponder is in transponder.
Service required.
correct mode.
Contact dealer for support.
GTN loses
DATALINK
communication with the
GDL 88 is datalink device (GDL 88).
inoperative or Traffic and/or FIS-B
connection to GTN
weather data not
is lost.
available.
DATALINK
GDL 88 reports an
GDL 88 needs
internal fault.
service.
DATALINK GSR 56 requires 1. Register the GSR 56.
GSR 56 data services registration. GSR weather 2. Activate a Connext
inoperative; and position reporting subscription.
registration required. services are not available. 3. Contact dealer for service.
GTN loses 1. Close the GSR 56 circuit
DATALINK
communication with breaker.
GSR 56 is
GSR 56. GSR weather, 2. Verify that the GSR 56 unit
inoperative or
position reporting, and is receiving power.
connection to
phone services are not
GTN is lost. 3. Contact dealer for service.
available.

Messages
Flight Plan Advisories

Unit unable to decode
FLIGHT PLAN Check for proper operation
flight plan contents.
IMPORT of all necessary components.
Wireless import of the
Flight plan import If the problem persists,
requested flight plan not
failed. contact dealer for service.
possible.
FLIGHT PLAN The flight plan catalog is
Delete any unnecessary
IMPORT full. Wireless import of the
flight plans from the
Flight plan import requested flight plan not
catalog.
failed. Catalog is full. possible.
FLIGHT PLAN Unit receives the specified
IMPORT number of flight plans via
New imported flight the import function. They No action necessary.
plan(s) available for are available for viewing on
preview. the Preview page.
FLIGHT PLAN Unit receives a flight plan
IMPORT from G3X Touch, but the Service required.
Changes to active External FPL Crossfill Contact dealer for support.
route are disabled. function is off.
FLIGHT PLAN
IMPORT
Unit loses communication Verify that the GDU is on.
GDU disconnected.
with the G3X Touch. Contact dealer for service.
External flight plan
crossfill inoperative.
FPL WAYPOINT Verify all stored cataloged
LOCKED Current navigation flight plans and procedures.
Stored flight plan database no longer Modify stored flight plans as
waypoint is not in contains a stored flight plan necessary to include
current navigation waypoint. waypoints that are in the
database. current navigation database.
Verify stored cataloged
FPL WPT MOVED A waypoint in a stored flight plans and procedures.
Stored flight plan flight plan moved by more Modify stored flight plans as
waypoint has than 0.33 arc minutes from necessary to include
changed location. its previous position. waypoints that are in the
current navigation database.

Messages

OBS
OBS is not available OBS not supported in dead
due to dead reckoning mode. Requires
reckoning or no an active waypoint.
active waypoint.
PARALLEL TRACK
Parallel track not Parallel track not supported
supported for leg on active leg type.
type. No action necessary.
PARALLEL TRACK
Parallel track not supported
Parallel track not
for turns greater than
supported for turns
120 degrees due to the
greater than
acute angle.
120 degrees.
PARALLEL TRACK
Parallel track not supported
Parallel track not
on approaches.
supported past IAF.
SELECT ARRIVAL
Aircraft is 15 NM from the
RUNWAY
final arrival waypoint in the
Select appropriate Select a runway.
flight plan and no runway
runway for arrival
has been selected.
procedure.
The flight plan contains an
acute course change
STEEP TURN ahead. Following the
Steep turn. Aircraft guidance requires a bank Slowing the aircraft may
may overshoot in excess of normal. shallow the turn.
course during turn. If coupled, the autopilot
may not be able to execute
the steep turn.

Messages
GPS/WAAS Advisories
Wait for GPS satellite
GPS NAVIGATION geometry to improve. Ensure
LOST the aircraft has a clear view of
GPS position lost due to
Insufficient satellites. the sky. Use a different GPS
lack of satellites.
Use other navigation receiver or a non-GPS based
source. source of navigation.
Contact dealer for service.
GPS NAVIGATION
Use a different GPS receiver or
LOST
GPS position lost due to a non-GPS based source of
Erroneous position.
erroneous position. navigation. Contact dealer for
Use other navigation
service.
source.
GPS receiver indicates
GPS RECEIVER that its clock battery is
Low internal clock low. May experience Contact dealer for service.
battery. delay when attempting to
acquire GPS position.
GPS receiver reports that Use a different GPS receiver or
GPS RECEIVER
it requires service. GPS a non-GPS based source of
GPS receiver needs
module functionality may navigation. Contact dealer for
service.
be unavailable. service.
GPS RECEIVER
Use a different GPS receiver or
GPS receiver has Internal communication
a non-GPS based source of
failed. Check GPS to the GPS receiver is
navigation. Contact dealer for
coax for electrical inoperative.
service.
short.
GPS receiver is acquiring
GPS SEARCHING position and may take
SKY longer than normal.
Ensure GPS antenna Typically occurs when the No action necessary.
has unobstructed unit is powered on after
view of the sky. installation or being off
for several weeks.
Ensure the aircraft is clear of
LOSS OF
hangars, buildings, trees, etc.
INTEGRITY (LOI)
GPS board reports LOI. Use a different GPS receiver or
Verify GPS position
Antenna may be shaded a non-GPS based source of
with other
from satellites. navigation. If the problem
navigation
persists, contact dealer for
equipment.
service.

Messages
Navigation Advisories
GPS approach not Initiate a climb to the MSA
ABORT APPROACH available. GPS unable to or other published safe
GPS approach is no provide approach level of altitude, abort the approach,
longer available. service (i.e., LPV, LNAV, and execute a non-GPS
LNAV+V, or L/VNAV). based approach.
APPROACH Approach downgraded
DOWNGRADE from LPV or LNAV/VNAV Continue to fly the approach
GPS approach to an LNAV approach. using published LNAV
downgraded. Vertical guidance no minimums.
Use LNAV minima. longer available.
GPS approach could not
APPROACH NOT transition to active
Abort the approach and then
ACTIVE (e.g., the unit remains in
execute a non-GPS based
Approach guidance TERM as it does not have
approach.
not available. the required HPL/VPL for
LNAV).
Verify course guidance is valid
CDI/HSI FLAG Main Lateral/Vertical
and correct by crosschecking
Main lateral/vertical Superflag output is off
the unit’s on-screen CDI with
flag on CDI/HSI is due to an overcurrent
other navigational equipment.
inoperative. condition.
Aircraft is on a GPS
approach, but CDI is set
CDI SOURCE
to VLOC.
Select appropriate Select the appropriate CDI
Aircraft is on VLOC source for the approach.
CDI source for
approach, CDI is set to
approach.
GPS, and aircraft is less
than 2 NM from the FAF.
It is past the specified
HOLD EXPIRED No action necessary.
Expected Further
Holding EFC time Consider contacting ATC
Clearance time for the
has expired. as appropriate.
user-defined hold.
MAGNETIC NORTH
APPROACH The loaded approach is
Change NAV angle setting
Verify NAV angles magnetic, but the NAV
to Magnetic.
are referenced to angle reference is not.
Magnetic north.

Messages

NAV ANGLE
NAV angles are
NAV angle is set to True.
referenced to True
north (T).
No action necessary.
NAV ANGLE
NAV angles are
NAV angle is set to User.
referenced to a user
set value (U).
NON-WGS84
WAYPOINT The active waypoint does
For more information, read
Location may be not reference the WGS84
“Points About Non-WGS84
different than where datum.
Waypoints” in this section.
surveyed for <WPT>.
SELECT
FREQUENCY The active NAV frequency Enter the correct frequency
Select appropriate is not correct for the into the active NAV frequency
NAV frequency for approach procedure. window.
approach.
SET COURSE The selected course on
Set the CDI/HSI selected
Set Course on the CDI/HSI does not
course to the current desired
CDI/HSI to match the current desired
track.
<current DTK>. track.
TOD/BOD Aircraft will reach

top/bottom of descent in No action necessary.
in 1 minute. 1 minute.
TRUE NORTH The loaded procedure
APPROACH references True north and
Verify the NAV angle is set
Verify NAV angles the active leg has a
to True north.
are referenced to published True north
True north (T). reference.
VISUAL
APPROACH NOT A direct course was
ACTIVE created to the runway Reactivate the approach or
Approach guidance waypoint. Approach cancel the direct course.
not available when guidance not available.
direct-to runway.
VNAV Altitude constraint Attempt to intercept vertical

cannot be reached based
Unable to reach path by adjusting aircraft
on current ground and
vertical waypoint. altitude.
vertical speeds.

Messages

The lateral flight plan Treat the flight plan segments
VNAV contains a procedure before and after the affected
Unavailable. turn, vector, or other leg as separate vertical
Upcoming flight plan unsupported leg type profiles. GTN cannot provide
leg not supported. prior to the active vertical automatic guidance between
waypoint. the two segments.
VNAV Crosstrack exceeds limit, Navigate within 10 NM of
Unavailable. causing vertical path flight plan centerline, or edit
Excessive cross guidance to become flight plan to allow for vertical
track error. invalid. navigation.
VNAV Track angle error exceeds
Unavailable. limit, causing vertical Navigate within 70º of active
Excessive track angle path guidance to become flight plan course.
error. invalid.
A loss of data from the
VNAV
barometric altitude
Unavailable.
sensor causes vertical Contact dealer for support.
Barometric
path guidance to
altitude lost.
become invalid.
WAYPOINT Pilot set the arrival alarm
Informational only.
Arriving at and is within the
[wpt name]. specified distance.
Points About Non-WGS84 Waypoints

• There are several types of geodetic datums that a waypoint can reference.
• TSO-C146 requires that all waypoints reference the WGS84 datum, but allows
for navigation to coordinates not compliant with this standard as long as the
pilot is notified of the potential difference in location.
• Not all waypoints in the navigation database reference the WGS84 datum.
For some of these coordinates the reference datum is unknown. In such cases,
the “Non-WGS84 Waypoint” advisory displays.
• Garmin cannot determine the exact proximity of a non-compliant waypoint to
the WGS84 datum in use by the system. Typically, the distance is < 2 NM.
• Most non-WGS84 waypoints are outside of the United States.

Messages
Pilot Specified Advisories

These advisories display when the associated timer expires or reaches a preset value.
They are informational only. Other than acknowledging the message, no action is
necessary.
ADVISORY CONDITION
SCHEDULED MESSAGE
The custom message timer expired.
<Text>.
TIMER
The generic timer is past its preset value.
Timer has expired.

Messages
Smart Glide Advisories

The unit automatically inhibits Smart Glide when the required conditions are not
met.

REMOTE KEY System detects the
STUCK indicated remote key is Push the indicated key again.
Engage/Disengage depressed for at least If it remains stuck, contact
Smart Glide key is 30 seconds. It will now dealer for service.
stuck. ignore this input.
SMART GLIDE Pilot disables Smart Glide
Disabled. activation by toggling the
Activation manually Smart Glide Activation
disabled by pilot. key to Disabled.
Re-enable Smart Glide
System disables activation. From the Home
SMART GLIDE Smart Glide activation page, tap Emergency >
Disabled. because the feature Menu, and toggle the
Erroneous activation exceeded the maximum Smart Glide Activation key
detected. May be number of activations to Enabled.
re-enabled via allowed within a one
Emergency page minute period. System
menu. allows up to three
activations per minute.
System disables
SMART GLIDE Wait 40 seconds for system
Smart Glide activation
Disabled. initialization to complete, then
for 40 seconds after unit
System initializing. re-attempt activation.
power up.
Descend below
SMART GLIDE
Aircraft altitude is above 11,000 m/36,000 ft
Unavailable above
the indicated MSL. and attempt to activate
11,000M/36,000FT.1
Smart Glide.

Messages

SMART GLIDE GTN Xi is not receiving a
Unavailable. valid roll angle from the
AHRS roll angle lost. AHRS source.
SMART GLIDE
Unavailable. GTN Xi is not receiving
Barometric altitude valid barometric altitude.
lost.
SMART GLIDE A crossfill error prevents
Unavailable. Smart Glide from Contact dealer for service.
Crossfill Error. functioning properly.
SMART GLIDE
GTN Xi is not receiving a
Unavailable.
valid heading from AHRS
Magnetic heading
source.
lost.
SMART GLIDE GTN Xi is not receiving
Unavailable. valid true airspeed from
True airspeed lost. ADC source.
1 Actual units dependent upon configuration.

Messages
System Hardware Advisories

APR GUIDANCE
AVAILABLE
Approach guidance is Before engaging approach
Press “Enable APR available and waiting for mode on the autopilot, tap
Output” before pilot acknowledgment. the Enable APR Output key.
selecting APR on
autopilot.
AUDIO FAIL
Aural alerts GTN is unable to play
unavailable. GTN audio for alerts.
needs service.
CONFIGURATION GTN cannot
MODULE communicate with its
GTN configuration configuration module. Contact dealer for service.
module needs Unit configuration may
service. still be valid.
Unit temperature exceeds Decrease cabin temperature
COOLING
the over temperature and increase cabin airflow
GTN over temp. threshold. Backlight dims near the unit. If the problem
Reducing backlight to reduce power and persists, contact dealer for
brightness. heat. service.
The unit’s cooling fan is Extended operation at high
COOLING FAN not turning at the temperatures is not
The cooling fan required RPM. Backlight recommended as damage
failed. may dim to reduce power to the unit may occur.
and heat. Contact dealer for service.
CROSSFILL ERROR Crossfill function is on,
Contact dealer for software
GTN software but not working due to a
update.
mismatch. software mismatch.
The unit lost
CROSSFILL ERROR communication with the
Crossfill is other GTN. Contact dealer for service.
inoperative.
One GTN requires service.
CROSSFILL STATUS
To re-enable, open
Crossfill is turned Crossfill function is off.
System Setup and toggle the
off.
associated function key on.

Messages

An error occurred in the
pilot stored data. The
following user settings
may be lost.
DATA LOST • Alert settings
Pilot stored data • Map menu settings Recheck settings.
was lost. Recheck • User waypoints
settings.
• Catalog flight plans
• User field settings
• Unit convention
selection
1. Reformat the SD card
using an external
DATACARD ERROR computer.
The SD card has an error
SD card is invalid or 2. Re-insert the SD card in
and is unreadable.
failed. the slot.
3. Contact dealer if the
problem persists.
DATACARD
The external SD card
REMOVED Reinsert SD card.
was removed.
Reinsert SD card.
DATA SOURCE GTN is not receiving
Heading source heading information
inoperative or from any source. Heading
connection to up map orientation not
GTN lost. available.
GTN is not receiving
pressure altitude data
DATA SOURCE from any source.
Pressure altitude NOTE: A transponder
source inoperative receiving pressure Contact dealer for service.
or connection to altitude data from GTN
GTN lost. will not receive pressure
altitude while this
condition is present.
GTN is not receiving radio
DATA SOURCE
altitude information from
Radar Altimeter any source.
source inoperative
50 foot VCO aural alert
or connection to
not available. (HTAWS
GTN lost.
installations only).

Messages

DEMO MODE Power cycle the unit to exit
The unit is in demo demo mode.
Demo mode is mode. Do not use for
active. Do not use actual navigation. Verify that the Direct To key
for navigation. is not stuck.
GTN Loss of factory calibration
GTN needs service. data.
INTERFACE
ADAPTER
GAD 42 reports a
GAD 42
configuration error.
configuration needs Verify all input/output data
service. to/from the adapter.
INTERFACE Contact dealer for service.
GAD 42 reports it needs
ADAPTER
service. Functionality may
GAD 42 needs
be unavailable.
service.
The unit’s internal
INTERNAL
SD card has an error.
SD CARD ERROR
This card is not accessible
GTN needs service.
by the user.
INTERNAL The internal SD card has
SD CARD been removed from the
REMOVED unit or it has experienced
GTN needs service. a failure.
System detects the
KEY STUCK indicated bezel key is Push the indicated key again.
<Name> key is depressed for at least If it remains stuck, contact
stuck. 30 seconds. It will now dealer for service.
ignore this input.
• Push the knob again. If it
KNOB STUCK System detects the remains stuck, use the
<Dual concentric indicated knob is
corresponding
inner/Volume> knob depressed for at least
touchscreen controls.
is stuck in the 30 seconds. It will now
pressed position. ignore this input. • Contact dealer if the
problem persists.

Messages

1. Reformat the SD card
using an external
<NAME> Export failure. May computer.
LOG EXPORT occur for GPS receiver
2. Re-insert the SD card in
<Name> log export diagnostic or flight data
the slot.
failed. logs.
3. Contact dealer if the
problem persists.
<NAME> Export to SD card
LOG EXPORT successful. Occurs for
<Name> log export GPS receiver diagnostic
complete. and flight data logs.
REMOTE KEY System detects the

indicated remote key is Push the indicated remote key
STUCK
depressed for at least again. If it remains stuck,
Remote <Name> key 30 seconds. It will now contact dealer for service.
is stuck. ignore this input.

Messages
Audio Panel Advisories

AVAILABLE WITH:
GTN 725Xi/750Xi

GMA 35 is reporting that
AUDIO PANEL
it requires service. Service required.
Audio panel needs Functionality may be Contact dealer for support.
service. unavailable.
Remove power from GMA 35
AUDIO PANEL by pulling the Audio circuit
Unit loses communication
Audio panel is with GMA 35. Audio breaker. Maintain
inoperative or panel control is not communication using the
connection to possible. COM 2 radio.
GTN is lost.
REMOTE KEY System detects the key
STUCK depressed for at least
Press the key again. If it
Pilot/Co-pilot voice 30 seconds. It will now
remains stuck, contact dealer
command ignore the input signal.
for service.
push-to-command This input is not available
key is stuck. on all installations.

Messages
COM Radio Advisories

AVAILABLE WITH:
GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi

COM radio is reporting
COM RADIO
that it requires service. Cycle radio power.
COM radio needs Functionality may be Contact dealer for service.
service. unavailable.
Push and hold volume knob
or external com remote
COM RADIO COM radio is not
transfer switch (if installed)
COM radio may be communicating with
to force the radio to
inoperative. the unit.
121.5 MHz. Contact dealer
for service.
• Decrease length of com
transmissions
COM radio is in overtemp • Decrease cabin
COM RADIO or undervoltage mode. temperature and increase
Transmitting power cabin airflow, especially
COM overtemp or
automatically reduces
undervoltage. near the unit
to prevent damage to
Reducing transmitter the com radio. Radio • Check aircraft voltage and
power. range is reduced as a reduce electrical load as
result. necessary
• Contact dealer for service
if message persists
COM RADIO
COM radio is locked
COM locked to to 121.5 MHz via the Hold remote transfer switch
121.5 MHz. external com remote for two seconds to exit mode.
Hold remote com transfer switch.
transfer key to exit.

Messages

Unit detects the specified
key in the pressed
position for 30 seconds.
The input is ignored as
a result. Radio stops
REMOTE KEY transmitting.
Verify that the key is not
STUCK Includes:
stuck. Contact dealer for
COM <Name> key • Push-to-talk key service if message persists.
is stuck. • Remote transfer key
• Remote frequency
increment key
• Remote frequency
decrement key

Messages
XPDR Advisories
TRANSPONDER 1/2 Transponder is not Ensure the aircraft has a clear
ADS-B is not receiving valid GPS view of the sky.
transmitting position data. Unable If the problem persists,
position. to support ADS-B. contact dealer for service.
TRANSPONDER 1/2
ADS-B Out system Transponder loses
fault. Pressure communication with the
altitude source pressure altitude source.
inoperative or
connection lost. Contact dealer for service.
Transponder detects an
TRANSPONDER 1/2
internal failure.
Transponder has Functionality may be
failed. unavailable.
The transponder is
TRANSPONDER 1/2 Verify squawk code and
reporting that it needs altitude with ATC.
Transponder 1/2 service. Functionality may
needs service. Contact dealer for service.
be unavailable.
TRANSPONDER 1/2
Transponder 1/2 is GTN is unable to Verify squawk code and
inoperative or communicate with the altitude with ATC.
connection to GTN configured transponder. Contact dealer for service.
is lost.
TRANSPONDER 1/2
Transponder is operating Cycle power to the
Transponder 1/2 is in a mode intended for transponder once ground
operating in ground ground testing. test completes.
test mode.
Decrease cabin temperature
Transponder reports that
TRANSPONDER1/2 and increase cabin airflow
its internal temperature
Transponder near the transponder. If the
exceeds the over
overtemp. problem persists, contact
temperature threshold.
dealer for service.
Transponder reports that
TRANSPONDER 1/2
its internal temperature If the problem persists,
Transponder is below the normal contact dealer for service.
under temp. operating threshold.

Messages
Terrain Advisories
Terrain/TAWS alerting
CONFIGURATION
inoperative due to a unit
TAWS/Terrain configuration problem. Service required.
configuration is Message accompanied Contact dealer for support.
invalid. GTN needs by the “TER FAIL”
service. annunciation.
Terrain database
HTAWS
resolution does not
Invalid Terrain support HTAWS
Database. (rotorcraft only).
Load rotorcraft specific terrain
Terrain database database from the external
HTERRAIN resolution does not SD card.
ALERTING support the current
Invalid Terrain terrain alerting
Database. configuration
(rotorcraft only).
The alerting system’s
audio inhibit discrete
TAWS/TERRAIN
input is active for at least
AUDIO INHIBITED
30 seconds. Contact dealer for support.
TAWS/Terrain audio
Alerts may be heard
inhibit input is stuck.
simultaneously with other
audio alerts.

Messages
Traffic System Advisories

ADS-B traffic system Ensure that the aircraft has a
TRAFFIC
reports a CSA failure. clear view of the sky.
ADS-B In traffic
Functionality not If the problem persists,
alerting has failed.
available. contact dealer for service.
ADS-B traffic system
TRAFFIC
detects an internal fault.
ADS-B In traffic has
ADS-B traffic system has
failed.
lost GPS position.
TRAFFIC The primary ADS-B traffic
ADS-B In traffic source is not available.
source does not GTN is relying on data
match configuration. from backup source.
TRAFFIC
GTS reports a device
Traffic device has
failure.
failed.
TRAFFIC
Traffic device is GTN is not receiving data
inoperative or from the configured
connection to GTN traffic device.
is lost.
TRAFFIC TAS/TCAS device reports
TAS/TCAS a traffic failure.
Reset the TCAS device.
inoperative or GTN loses Contact dealer for support.
connection to communication with the
GTN is lost. TAS/TCAS device.
If traffic alerts are desired,
TRAFFIC
open the Traffic app and
Traffic device has GTN is airborne; traffic
enable the operating mode of
been in standby device in standby
the traffic device:
for more than > 60 seconds.
Home > Traffic > Menu >
60 seconds.
Operate
TRAFFIC GDL 88 reports that the
TCAD has a low external traffic system has Contact dealer for support.
battery. a low battery.

Messages

TRAFFIC
Traffic device battery
The TCAD system
low. Traffic device Contact dealer for support.
indicates a low battery.
user config settings
not saved.

Messages
VCALC Advisories
User configured a vertical
VCALC descent calculation, and
Approaching top of the aircraft is within
descent. 60 seconds of the
calculated top of descent.
User configured a vertical
VCALC descent calculation, and
Arriving at VCALC the aircraft is
target altitude. approaching target
altitude.
VLOC/GS Advisories
Verify glideslope deviation
indications with another
Glideslope board is source and cross-check final
GLIDESLOPE approach fix crossing altitude.
reporting that it requires
Glideslope receiver service. Functionality may If another source is not
needs service. be unavailable. available, fly a GPS based
approach.
VOR/LOC/GS NAV radio is not
RECEIVER communicating with the Use GPS based navigation.
Navigation receiver system. VOR, LOC, and Contact dealer for support.
has failed. GS are inoperative.
NAV radio is reporting
VLOC RECEIVER
that it requires service. Service required.
Navigation receiver Functionality may be Contact dealer for support.
needs service. unavailable.

Messages
Waypoint Advisories
GNS CROSSFILL User waypoint catalog is
Delete any unnecessary user
Catalog full; not all full. Import of the
waypoints from the catalog
GNS waypoint(s) requested user waypoints
and try again.
transferred. could not complete.
GNS CROSSFILL Avoid overwriting existing
A user waypoint from the
GTN user waypoints by ensuring that
GNS unit replaces one or
waypoint(s) replaced all requested user waypoints
more existing waypoints
with GNS user have unique identifiers prior
on GTN.
waypoints. to transfer.
GNS CROSSFILL
Waypoint transfer did not
Waypoint transfer Reattempt data transfer.
complete.
failed.
• Wait for GPS satellite
MARK ON geometry to improve
TARGET
MOT waypoint creation • Ensure that the aircraft
Waypoint creation
failed due to missing has a clear view of the sky
has failed. MOT
GPS position. • Reattempt waypoint
requires GPS
position. creation
• Contact dealer for support
USER WAYPOINT Verify that media has the
User waypoint import
IMPORT correct file format. If the
failed due to improper
User waypoint problem persists, contact
file format.
import failed. dealer for service.
USER WAYPOINT
IMPORT User waypoint catalog is
Delete any unnecessary user
User waypoint full. Import of the
waypoints from the catalog
import failed. User requested user waypoints
and try again.
waypoint database could not complete.
is full.
USER WAYPOINT
IMPORT
User waypoints were No action necessary.
successful.
imported
successfully.

Messages

USER WAYPOINT
IMPORT
successful. Import
User waypoints
function reuses existing No action necessary.
imported
user waypoints instead
successfully - existing
of creating duplicates.
waypoints reused.

Messages
Weather Service Advisories

Weather radar detects To view information about
WX ALERT the presence of a severe weather in the current
Possible severe weather alert within flight path, open the Radar
weather. +/- 10 degrees of the app:
aircraft heading. Home > Weather > Radar
WX RADAR FAIL
GTN is not receiving
Weather radar is Contact dealer for support.
weather radar data.
inoperative.
Weather radar reports
WX RADAR
that a degraded or
SERVICE
inoperative condition Service required.
Weather radar needs
exists. Contact dealer for support.
service. Return unit
Appears only when the
for repair.
aircraft is on ground.
STORMSCOPE 1. Close the Stormscope
Stormscope is GTN is not receiving data circuit breaker.
inoperative or from the Stormscope 2. Verify that the Stormscope
connection to GTN unit. unit is receiving power.
is lost. 3. Contact dealer for support.
STORMSCOPE
Stormscope data is correct
Invalid heading Stormscope reports an
and safe for use.
received from invalid heading source.
Stormscope.


9 Qualification
GLOVE QUALIFICATION ....................................................................................9-2
VOICE COMMAND QUALIFICATION...........................................................9-6
NOTE
The procedures described in this section are not authorized for completion during flight.
All tasks must be performed while the aircraft is on the ground.
Qualification
Glove Qualification
The touchscreen uses capacitive touch technology to sense the proximity of skin to
the display. A glove creates a barrier between the skin and the display glass,
potentially reducing the ability of the display to detect touches.
This procedure qualifies a specific glove for use with the touchscreen. Due to
differences in finger size and glove size, the qualification procedure is specific to the
pilot/glove and GTN combination. Multiple units must be evaluated individually.
GLOVE SELECTION CONSIDERATIONS

• Thinner gloves perform better than thicker gloves.
• Leather gloves, and gloves designed specifically for use with capacitive
touchscreen devices, are often found to be acceptable.
• To improve touchscreen sensitivity while wearing gloves, use the pad of your
finger instead of the tip during touch interactions.
GLOVE QUALIFICATION GUIDANCE

• Checklist 1 contains the tasks required to qualify a glove.
• Checklist 2 contains tasks that are not required to qualify a glove, but may
limit how some functions are accessed while wearing a glove.

Qualification
GLOVE QUALIFICATION STEPS

Complete only the tasks for the capabilities relevant to the installed navigator.
1. Sitting in the pilot’s seat, start the unit in demo mode
(push and hold the Direct To key during power up).
2. Perform the tasks presented in each checklist, tapping the specified keys with
a non-gloved finger. It is not necessary to record any results for this step.
3. Repeat step 2 using a gloved hand.
4. For each task, determine whether the touchscreen response is the same or
worse than without the glove.
5. Record the results in the applicable column. Items that may cause the operation
to be worse include, but are not limited to:
• Multiple attempts to select a key
• Unintentional selection of adjacent key(s)
• Excessive force on the touchscreen to select a key
6. If all applicable tasks produce the same response with and without a glove,
you may use the glove in flight.
GLOVE QUALIFICATION PROCEDURE
Pilot:
Glove Description:
Circle the applicable navigator.
GTN 625Xi GTN 635Xi GTN 650Xi
GTN 725Xi GTN 750Xi

Qualification
CHECKLIST 1:
REQUIRED TASKS
OPERATION WITH GLOVE

TASK
(circle one)
Starting from the Home page:
1. Tap Demo > GPS > Waypoint. Same Worse
Type the airport identifier “KSLE”
2. Same Worse
and tap Enter.
3. Return to the Home page. Same Worse
4. Tap Flight Plan > Add Waypoint. Same Worse
Type the airport identifier “KSLE”
5. Same Worse
and tap Enter.
Add each of the following waypoints in the same manner.
6. KMMV Same Worse
7. KONP Same Worse
8. BTG Same Worse
9. Select BTG. Same Worse
10. Tap Load Airway > V23 > ALFOR > Load. Same Worse
Scroll the list of flight plan waypoints up
11. Same Worse
and down, then tap Back.
GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi ONLY
12. Select the COM STBY frequency window. Same Worse
13. Type a valid frequency and tap Enter. Same Worse
Select the active COM frequency window.
14. Observe: active and standby frequency Same Worse
values swap positions.
GTN 650Xi/750Xi ONLY
Select the active NAV frequency field.
15. Observe: active and standby frequency Same Worse
values swap positions.

Qualification
CHECKLIST 2:
NON-REQUIRED TASKS
OPERATION WITH GLOVE

TASK
(circle one)
Starting from the Home page:
1. Tap Flight Plan. Same Worse
With one finger on the page, drag the
2. Same Worse
waypoint list up and down, then tap Back
3. Tap Map. Same Worse
Tap the map display and select
4. Same Worse
Graphically Edit FPL.
Drag KONP to an empty area of the map,
panning and zooming as necessary.
5. Same Worse
Observe: KONP is removed from the
flight plan.
Drag the leg between KMMV and BTG
6. to KSPB. Same Worse
Observe: KSPB is added to the flight plan.

Qualification
Voice Command Qualification

This procedure qualifies the
Qualification Procedure Telligence Voice Command voice
Requirements recognition feature for use by the
• GMA 35/350 pilot and/or copilot.
• Valid GPS position Crew members must be proficient in
• Aviation headset and MIC English and comfortable with
speaking into an aviation headset.
• English proficiency
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Minimum passing score: 85% (17 out of 20)
Allowable number of attempts: 1
VOICE COMMAND GUIDELINES

• Position headset MIC approximately 1/8” away from mouth. Align with
bottom lip to avoid breathing into the microphone.
• Review commands before performing the qualification.
• Enunciate each word, maintaining a normal tone, volume, and cadence.
• After activating the PTC switch, pause briefly before speaking the command.
If Then
Verify that the system is performing the

The command is uninterpretable intended action or displaying the
appropriate data
The system does not recognize Use the touchscreen controls to execute
the command the function
The total number of successful

Disable the voice command feature
commands is less than 17
A list of all performed commands is available in the Voice Command History. From
the Home page, tap System > Voice Commands > Command History.

Qualification
ALTERNATE COMMANDS
Not all features listed in this qualification may pertain to your aircraft’s configuration.
Speak the alternate phrase if the initial command is not applicable to your system.
Example: The command is “Toggle COM 2,” but the unit is not equipped with a
COM radio. In this case, speak the alternate command: “Say distance.”
VOICE COMMAND QUALIFICATION

1. Start the unit in normal mode and acquire a GPS position.
2. Perform checklist tasks in the order presented. For each task:
• Push and hold PTC switch.
• Speak the provided command and then release switch. For commands
pertaining to non-applicable features, speak the alternate command.
• Listen for the audible tone.
3. Record the result in the provided column.
For audible tone definitions and feature activation/deactivation steps, refer to

Telligence Voice Command in section 2.

Qualification
CHECKLIST:
VOICE COMMANDS
RESULT
TASK
(circle one)
Speak: Show Flight Plan page.
1. Pass Fail
Then: Manually enter a towered airport as the destination.
2. Speak: Show Trip Planning page. Pass Fail
1
Speak: Tune nearest ground.
3. Pass Fail
Alternate: Show Nearest Airport page.
Speak: Tune nearest ATIS.1
4. Pass Fail
Alternate: Show nearest weather frequency page.
Speak: Toggle COM 2.2
5. Pass Fail
Alternate: Say distance.
6. Speak: Show Map page. Pass Fail
7. Speak: Zoom out. Pass Fail
8. Speak: Say distance to destination. Pass Fail
9. Speak: Show Flight Timers page. Pass Fail
2
Speak: Select MIC 2.
10. Pass Fail
Alternate: Say ETA at destination.
11. Speak: Say active waypoint. Pass Fail
12. Speak: Create waypoint here. Pass Fail
Speak: Tune destination tower.1
13. Pass Fail
Alternate: Show Destination Runways page.
Speak: Show Traffic page.3
14. Pass Fail
Alternate: Show Nearest page.
15. Speak: Show Procedures page. Pass Fail
Speak: Show V-CALC page.
16. Pass Fail
Alternate: Show System page.
17. Speak: Show current time. Pass Fail
18. Speak: Say desired track. Pass Fail
19. Speak: Back. Pass Fail
20. Speak: Show Voice Command History page. Pass Fail
1 2
Requires GTN Xi COM radio feature. Requires two COM radios connected to GMA.
3
Requires traffic capability on GTN Xi.

10 Practice
DEMO MODE ........................................................................................................ 10-2
Practice
Demo Mode
GTN Xi provides a demonstration (or demo) mode that allows
simulation of certain operations while on the ground. Enable
this mode when you want to familiarize yourself with the
unit controls.
WARNING
Never use GTN Xi for navigation when demo mode is active. Demo mode is for
learning purposes only. It is not for use in the air.
NOTE
Demo mode has limited capabilities. Not all unit features are functional during demo
mode. For a comprehensive training on GTN Xi Series features, purchase
GTN Essentials 2.0 eLearning Course from garmin.com.
Enable Demo Mode

While the aircraft is on ground:
1. Push and hold the
Direct To key.
2. With the key depressed,
apply power to the GTN.
The unit powers up in demo
mode. A dedicated start-up page
presents a caution message.
Tapping Continue advances to
the normal mode start-up page.

Practice
DEMO MODE INDICATIONS

During demo mode, the Home page has the appearance of being in normal mode
with two notable exceptions:
A Demo key provides access to An active mode indication

mode setup options. This key resides appears in the annunciator bar.
in the unit’s control bar.
Home Page, GTN 750Xi
Demo Key
Active Mode
Indication

Practice
Demo Setup Options

Tapping Demo opens the Demo Setup page.
Options allow you to specify GPS position

Demo Setup and other parameters so that you may
practice navigating with the unit.
Waypoint
Select waypoint Advanced settings for GPS, navigation,
Coordinates date, and time are accessible via the
Specify lat/lon respective page access keys.
Airspeed
Specify value
Altitude
Specify value
Track Mode
Select mode
GPS
NAV
Date/Time
Waypoint Set GPS position by selecting a waypoint.

GPS
Position Set GPS position by specifying the lat/lon
Coordinates
coordinates.
Airspeed Specify the value for true airspeed.
Altitude Specify the value for altitude.
Select the track mode. Options include:
NAV
• Flight plan
Track Mode
• Flight Plan + Vertical
• Manual
GPS Access advanced GPS settings.
Advanced
NAV Access advances navigation settings.
Settings
Date/Time Access date and time settings.

Practice
Advanced Settings
Solution Airspeed Date

Select type Specify value Specify date
Coordinates Vertical Speed Time
Specify lat/lon Specify value Set time
Waypoint Altitude
Select waypoint Specify value
HPL FD Track Mode
Adjust value Select mode
HPL WAAS Time Scale
Adjust value Select scale
VPL WAAS
Adjust value
Position Error Values

You may adjust position error
values to reflect errors induced by
naturally occurring conditions.
These values are not normally
adjusted for most demo mode
operations. Values include:
• Horizontal protection levels
for fault detection and SBAS
• Vertical protection levels for
SBAS


11 Glossary
A
ACT Altitude Compensated Tilt
ADAHRS Air Data/Attitude & Heading Reference System
ADC Air Data Computer

ADF Automatic Direction Finder
ADIZ Air Defense Identification Zone

ADS-B Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcast
AFM Aircraft Flight Manual

AFMS Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement
AGL Above Ground Level

AHRS Attitude Heading Reference System
AIM Aeronautical Information Manual

AIRB Basic Airborne Application
AIRMET Airman’s Meteorological Information

ALT Altitude Hold
AP Autopilot
APR Approach
APT Airport
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center

AR Approval Required
ASOS Automated Service Observing System
ATAS ADS-B Traffic Advisory System
ATC Air Traffic Control

ATIS Automatic Terminal Information Service
ATK Along Track
AWOS Automated Weather Observing Station

Glossary
B
BRG Bearing
C
CDI Course Deviation Indicator
CDU Control and Display Unit

CNXT Connext
CRS Course
CTAF Common Traffic Advisory Frequency

CUM Cumulative
D
DALT Density Altitude
DB Database
DEST Destination
DFLT Default
DG Directional Gyro
DIS Distance
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
DPRT Departure
DTK Desired Track

Glossary
E
EDM Emergency Descent Mode
EDR Excessive Descent Rate

EFC Expected Further Clearance
EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service

EHSI Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator
ENR En Route
ESA En Route Safe Altitude
ESP Electronic Stability and Protection

ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE Estimated Time En Route
F
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FAF Final Approach Fix
FCC Federal Communication Commission
FDC Flight Data Center

FIS-B Flight Information Services Broadcast
FLTA Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance

FMS Flight Management System
FPL Flight Plan

FREQ Frequency
FSS Flight Service Station

Glossary
G
GAGAN GPS-aided GEO Augmented Navigation
GCS Ground Clutter Suppression

GDC Garmin Air Data Computer
GDL Garmin Datalink

GDU Garmin Display Unit
GFC Garmin Flight Controller

GMA Garmin Marker Beacon Audio
GMU Garmin Magnetometer Unit

GP Glidepath
GPS Global Positioning System

GPSS Global Positioning System Steering
GRS Garmin Reference System

GS Glideslope
GSL Geometric Sea Level
GSU Garmin Sensing Unit

GTP Garmin Temperature Probe
GTX Garmin Transponder
GWX Garmin Weather Radar
H
HDG Heading
HOT Hazardous Obstacle Transmission

HPL Horizontal Protection Level
HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator

HTAWS Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System

Glossary
I
IAF Initial Approach Fix
IAS Indicated Airspeed

IAT Induction Air Temperature
IFR Instrument Flight Rules

ILI Imminent Line Impact
ILS Instrument Landing System

INT Intersection
IOI Imminent Obstacle Impact

ISA International Standard Atmosphere
ITI Imminent Terrain Impact
K
KIAS Knots Indicated Airspeed
L
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LDI Lateral Deviation Indicator

LOA Letter of Authorization
LOC Localizer
LOI Loss of Integrity
LPV Localizer Performance with Vertical Guidance

LRU Line Replaceable Unit

Glossary
M
MAG VAR Magnetic Variation
MAP Missed Approach Point

MAHP Missed Approach Holding Point
MDA Minimum Descent Altitude

METAR Meteorological Terminal Aviation Routine Weather Report
MGRS Military Grid Reference System

MOA Military Operations Area
MOT Mark on Target

MSA Minimum Safe Altitude
MSAS MTSAT Satellite Augmentation System

MSG Message
MSL Mean Sea Level
N
NAV Navigation
NAVAID Navigation Aid

NCR Negative Climb Rate
NDB Non-Directional Beacon

NEXRAD Next-Generation Radar
NOTAM Notice to Air Missions
O
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OBS Omni Bearing Selector

OCN Oceanic
P
PCL Pilot Controlled Lighting
PDA Premature Descent Alert

PVT Position, Velocity, and Time

Glossary
R
RA Resolution Advisory
RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring

RF Radius to Fix
RLC Reduced Line Clearance

RNAV Area Navigation
RNP Required Navigation Performance

ROC Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
RRC Remote Radio Control

RTC Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
S
SAR Search and Rescue
SAT Static Air Temperature

SBAS Satellite Based Augmentation System
SBS Surveillance and Broadcast Services
SD Secure Digital
SID Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET Significant Meteorological Information

SSID Service Set Identifier
STAR Standard Terminal Arrival

STBY Standby
SUA Special Use Airspace

SURF Surface Situation Awareness
SUSP Suspend
SVID Satellite-Vehicle Identification

Glossary
T
T True
TA Traffic Advisory
TACAN Tactical Air Navigation System
TAF Terminal Aerodrome Forecast

Traffic Advisory System
TAS
True Airspeed
TAT Total Air Temperature
TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning System

TCA Terminal Control Area
TCAD Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Devices

TCAS Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
TCH Threshold Crossing Height

TERM Terminal
TFR Temporary Flight Restriction
TIS Traffic Information Service

TMA Terminal Maneuvering Area
TRK Track
TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area

TSAA Traffic Situational Awareness with Alerting
TSO Technical Standard Order
U
UPS Universal Polar Stereographic Grid
USR User
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
UTM Universal Transverse Mercator

Glossary
V
VCALC Vertical Calculator
VCO Voice Call Out

VDI Vertical Deviation Indicator
VFR Visual Flight Rules

VHF Very High Frequency
VLOC VOR/Localizer
VNAV Vertical Navigation
VOR Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Range

VORTAC Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Range Station
and Tactical Air Navigation
VPL Vertical Protection Level
VRP Visual Reporting Point

VS Vertical Speed
VSI Vertical Speed Indicator
W
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
WGS84 World Geodetic System 1984
WPT Waypoint
WX Weather
X
XPDR Transponder
XTK Cross Track


12 Regulatory Information
COMPLIANCE........................................................................................................ 12-2
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ........................................................... 12-3

Regulatory Information
Compliance
FCC Compliance Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC limits for Class B digital devices. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Furthermore, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by relocating the equipment or connecting the equipment to
a different circuit than the affected equipment. Consult an authorized dealer or other
qualified avionics technician for additional help if these remedies do not correct the
problem.
Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
AC 90-100A
Statement of Compliance
The Garmin navigational unit meets the performance and functional requirements
of FAA Advisory Circular (AC) 90-100A, U.S. Terminal and En Route Area Navigation
(RNAV) Operations.

Regulatory Information
Software License Agreement

BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY
GARMIN (“THE GARMIN PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE
READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”)
grants you a limited license to use the software embedded in the Garmin Product
(the “Software”) in binary executable form in the normal operation of the Garmin
Product. Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the
Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You acknowledge that
the Software is the property of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is
protected under the United States of America copyright laws and international
copyright treaties. You further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and
code of the Software are valuable trade secrets of Garmin and/or its third-party
providers and that the Software in source code form remains a valuable trade secret
of Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile,
disassemble, modify, reverse assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human
readable form the Software or any part thereof or create any derivative works based
on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to any country in
violation of the export control laws of the United States of America.


190-02327-03 Rev. F

GTN Xi Series: Pilot's Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GTN Xi Series: Pilot's Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GTN Xi Series: Pilot's Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GTN Xi Series

INFORMATION & SUPPORT

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide i

ii Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide iii

iv Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide v

vi Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide vii

REVISION DATE CHANGE DESCRIPTION

B 12.06.19 Production Release.

C 11.20.20 Updates for software v20.10.

D 07.22.21 Updates for software v20.20.

E 01.03.23 Updates for software v20.30.

F 03.01.24 Updates for software v20.40.

Available for Download

viii Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

SECTION TITLE The design and layout of this guide is

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide ix

When you see It means

the information pertains to all

product names separated by a forward slash the information pertains to both

GTN 650Xi Series

x Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xi

GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions 190-00355-04

GDL 84/88 ADS-B Transceiver Pilot’s Guide 190-01122-03

GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide Addendum for GDL 60 190-02327-A0

GTX 335/345 All-In-One ADS-B Transponder Pilot’s Guide 190-01499-00

Telligence Voice Command Guide 190-01007-50

WEBSITE QR CODE (SCAN/GO)

Aviation Limited Warranty

FAA Dynamic Regulatory System

Garmin Aviation Weather Radar 2.0 eLearning Course

GTN Essentials 2.0 eLearning Course

xii Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

1 SYSTEM AT A GLANCE ..................................................................................................... 1-1

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xiii

Revert Knob Function to Radio Control ..................................................... 2-42

xiv Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

Enable Anonymous Mode ........................................................................ 2-79

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xv

3 NAVIGATION ......................................................................................................................... 3-1

xvi Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

Active Flight Plan .............................................................................................................................. 3-75

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xvii

Flight Plan Departure Options ................................................................. 3-132

xviii Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

City Forecast ............................................................................................ 5-21

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xix

TAS/TCAS I ............................................................................................... 5-90

xx Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

SiriusXM Audio Activation .............................................................................. 7-4

190-02327-03 Rev. F Pilot’s Guide xxi

Glove Qualification .............................................................................................................................9-2

xxii Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03 Rev. F

PILOT INTERFACE .................................................................................................1-5

COMPATIBLE EQUIPMENT............................................................................ 1-20

4.9” GTN 650Xi Series 6.9” GTN 750Xi Series